JP2019150676A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine enabling an improvement of motion between operation means and motion means.SOLUTION: A state change of an opening/closing member 340 is started by an operation of an operation member 310 through a generation of an abutting load from the operation member 310 to the opening/closing member 340. Therefore, the timing between an operation of the operation member 310 and a deformation start of the opening/closing member 340 can be matched. In this way, a player can obtain by the operation a real feeling of having caused a start of a presentation related to the operation member 310.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an opening and closing member that can form a state in which the button cannot be pushed by covering the button and a state in which the button can be pushed by leaving the button. There is a gaming machine that produces an effect of changing the appearance around a button by operating a drive motor (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-112276, A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement regarding the operation of the button and the opening / closing member.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the operation of the button and the opening / closing member.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operating means operated by a player, a first position in accordance with an operation of the operating means, and a second position different from the first position. And a return means for returning the operating means to the first position. The game machine is interposed between the operating means and the operating means. Second operating means that can be synchronized with the operating means, and the second operating means is displaced by a predetermined amount with respect to the operating means in synchronization with the operating means, whereby the operating means operates.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein a load is applied from the second operating means to the operating means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the operating means is displaced before and after operating the operating means, and the operating means before and after operating the operating means. Are provided with a switching means capable of forming an invariant state arranged at the same position, and a driving means for generating a driving force for arbitrarily changing the state of the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation of the operation means and the operation means can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operating means can be operated by the load transmitted through the second operating means.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the operation mode of the operating means can be changed while the operating means is maintained in an operable state. .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member, a clutch member, an opening / closing member, and a switching device. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is an expanded view of the outer peripheral surface of a switching apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the IX-IX line of FIG. FIG. 12 is a top view of the operation device when viewed in the direction of arrow XII in FIG. 11. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a top view of the operation device in the arrow XIV direction view of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XIX-XIX line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXI-XXI line | wire of FIG. (A)-(d) is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. (A)-(d) is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. (A) And (b) is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. It is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXVII-XXVII line | wire of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member, a clutch member, an opening / closing member, and a switching device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the state of each opening-and-closing member, (b) is a table | surface which illustrates how to replace the structure of each opening-and-closing member. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the state of each opening / closing member, (b)) is a table | surface which illustrates how to replace the structure of each opening / closing member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member, a clutch member, an opening / closing member, and a switching device. It is a top view of a main body ring part and an adjustment step part. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXXVIII-XXXVIII line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XL-XL line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XL-XL line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XL-XL line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of the operation device in a 4th embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of the switching device, and (b) is a top view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIXb in FIG. 49 (a). (A) is a front view of one first return member, (b) is a top view of the first return member as viewed in the direction of arrow Lb in FIG. 50 (a), and (c) is FIG. It is a side view of the 1st return member in the arrow Lc direction view of (a). (A) is a front view of one second return member, (b) is a top view of the second return member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIb in FIG. 51 (a), and (c) is FIG. It is a side view of the 2nd return member in the arrow LIc direction view of (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LVII-LVII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LVII-LVII line | wire of FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of the reaction force given to the player who pushed the operation member and operated. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a switching device. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the main body ring part in the LXIIa-LXIIa line of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LXV-LXV line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial side view of the opening-and-closing member and switching device in the arrow LXVIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a partial side view of the opening-and-closing member and switching device in the arrow LXVIIIa direction view of FIG. (A) to (c) are side views of the switching device and the opening / closing member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of the switching device, and (b) is a top view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a). (A) is a front view of an opening / closing member, (b) is a side view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a), and (c) is a front view of the movable cover member. (D) is a side view of the movable cover member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIId in FIG. 72 (c), and (e) is a top view of the movable cover member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIe in FIG. 72 (c). . It is a top view of an operation device. FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 73. FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 73. It is a top view of an operation device. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. 76. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in 7th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the LXXXa-LXXXa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the LXXXa-LXXXa line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a long period of time. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a short period. (A) is a top view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device in the direction of arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is an arrow LXXXVIc in FIG. 86 (a). It is a front view of the switching device in the direction view. It is a top view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LXXXIX-LXXXIX line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LXXXIX-LXXXIX line | wire of FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a long period of time. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a short period.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 27, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a specific winning port 65a, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A specific winning port 65 a is provided below the first winning port 64. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 490, 4590.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the operation device 300 will be described. The operation device 300 is an apparatus for causing a player to participate in the production by an operation. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, FIGS. 7A and 7B are front perspective views of the operation device 300, 8 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 320, the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 340, and the switching device 400, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 6 and 9, the front frame 14 is partially illustrated. 7A and 7B, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. 6 and 7A, the first position state of the opening / closing member 340 is illustrated, and in FIG. 7B, the second position state of the opening / closing member 340 is illustrated.

  The operation device 300 causes the state change of the opening / closing member 340 illustrated in FIGS. 6, 7A, and 7B to be executed in response to the operation of the operation member 310, and the state change is a game. It is an apparatus that produces an effect that improves the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize.

  The operation device 300 has a function of giving a rendering effect to the operation device 300 by visually recognizing a part of the internal mechanism, and is formed with an opening 301a at the bottom center portion of the inverted cup shape and the front surface. An outer wall member 301 fixed to the front frame 14 in a mode in which an operation device such as the switching device 400 is accommodated between the frame 14 and a shape in which the width in the height direction of the outer wall member 301 is shortened. An overlap member 302 that has an opening 302a that is coaxial with and substantially the same shape (slightly larger in diameter) as the opening 301a and that is overlapped and fixed in such a manner as to form an internal space with the outer wall member 301, is inserted into the openings 301a and 302a. A dish-shaped operation member 310 which is a member whose movement is restricted by an internal space formed by the outer wall member 301 and the overlapping member 302 and is made of a light-transmitting material, and its operation A base member 320 disposed on the back side in the pushing direction of the material 310, a clutch member 330 supported on the base member 320 so as to be slidable in the pushing direction of the operation member 310, and the clutch member 330 being fitted The position of the opening / closing member 340 is defined by a pair of opening / closing members 340 pivotally supported by the base member 320 and abutting the opening / closing member 340, as viewed in the pushing operation direction. A switching device 400 that is configured in a donut shape and is supported by the base member 320 so as to be rotatable around the base member 320, and a drive motor 490 that rotates the switching device 400 are mainly provided.

  The outer wall device 301 has an opening 301a formed as a circular through hole at the center of the bottom of the inverted cup shape, and an upper surface that is spaced apart by 90 degrees on the radial outer side of the opening 301a with respect to the center of the opening 301a. And a recessed portion 301b recessed downward from the main.

  The recessed portion 301b is arranged so as to overlap the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 310 in the vertical direction, and houses the lower end portion of the spring SP1 that returns the operation member 310 upward (see FIG. 9).

  The operation member 310 is disposed on the front side of the upper plate 17 of the front frame 14, is formed in an inverted cup shape, and is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A projecting portion 312 projecting toward the outside, an outer extending portion 313 extending outwardly from the peripheral surface portion of the main body portion 311 in a flange shape, and the side opposite to the upper base with respect to the extending portion 313 A misalignment prevention portion 314 extending to the inner side, and an inner extension portion 315 extending in a flange shape from the extension end of the misalignment prevention portion 314 to the inner peripheral side.

  The main body 311 has a circular outer periphery and has substantially the same diameter in the vertical direction.

  The protruding portion 312 is a portion that comes into contact with a contact portion 332 of a clutch member 330 described later. When the operation member 310 is pushed in by the projecting portion 312, even if the clutch member 330 and the operation member 310 come into contact with each other, the load applied to the main body portion 311 can be reduced and the main body portion 311 can be prevented from cracking. can do.

  The outer extending portion 313 is a portion that is inserted into a space formed between the bottom portion of the outer wall member 301 and the bottom portion of the overlapping member 302, and is formed in an annular shape around the periphery of the main body portion 311. The vertical movement end position of the operation member 310 is formed at a position where the outer extending portion 313 contacts the upper surface of the bottom portion of the outer wall member 301 or the lower surface of the bottom portion of the overlapping member 302.

  The misregistration prevention portion 314 is an annular portion having a diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the main body portion 311 and extending below the main body portion 311, and the extending tip is inserted into the opening 301 a of the outer wall member 301. The Here, the opening 301a is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the misalignment prevention portion 314, and the opening 302a is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body portion 311. Supporting at the two positions can prevent the operation member 310 from being disturbed (displaced in the radial direction) while allowing the operation member 310 to slide in the vertical direction.

  The base member 320 is a member that is fixed to the front frame 14 vertically below the operation member 310, and is centered on a vertical line that passes through the center of the rotationally symmetric main body 321 and the convex portion 312 of the operation member 310. A cylindrical portion serving as an axis, and a recessed portion 322 that is recessed vertically downward from the upper surface of the main body portion 321, and is spaced apart from the recessed portion 322 in the horizontal direction and perpendicular to the recessed direction of the recessed portion 322. A shaft portion 323 that is a pair of rotating shaft rods that are extended and supported by a portion protruding from the upper surface of the main body portion 321, an extended bottom portion 324 that extends radially outward from the lower end of the main body portion 321, Is mainly provided.

  The extended bottom portion 324 includes a support protrusion 324a that protrudes from the main body portion 321 toward the outer side in the radial direction at the periphery thereof, and an upper surface of the extended bottom portion 324 that extends upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 321. And a circular projecting portion 324b that projects along an annular shape coaxial with the central axis.

  Since the contact ridge between the switching device 400 and the base member 320, which will be described later, can be reduced by the support protrusions 324a and the circular protrusions 324b, the operating resistance of the switching device 400 can be reduced, and the drive The driving force required for the motor 490 can be reduced.

  The clutch member 330 is a member that is fitted in the recessed portion 322 of the base member 320 and moves up and down along the recessed direction, and is formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recessed portion 322. A main body bar portion 331 in which a lower portion is fitted in the recessed portion 322, and extends from the upper end of the main body bar portion 331 coaxially with the main body bar portion 331 and has a smaller diameter than the main body bar portion 331. A contact portion 332, an extended portion 333 that extends in the radial direction from the upper end of the main body bar portion 331, and a sealing portion that supports the main body portion 331 on the upper end side and is fixed to the base member 320 on the lower end side. 334, an E ring 335 that is fitted into the main body bar portion 331 from the radial direction and has an action of expanding the outer diameter of the main body bar portion 331, and a lower side of the E ring 335 between the sealing portion 334 and the base member 320 Placed in E A spring SP2 for generating biasing force for moving the main rod portion 331 upwardly through the grayed 335 mainly comprises a.

  The abutting portion 332 is a portion that abuts against the protruding portion 312 of the operation member 310, and the clutch member 330 is lowered by being abutted and pushed down. Here, when the clutch member 330 is biased by the spring SP2 on the opposite side of the operation member 310, even if the operation member 310 is operated violently (at high speed), the protruding portion 312 is caused by the interference action of the elastic force. And the contact portion 332 can be prevented from being excessively loaded.

  The extending portion 333 includes an annular recess 333a that is recessed in a donut shape from the upper surface downward. The annular recess 333a acts to prevent a change in the posture of the opening / closing member 330 in the first position state of the opening / closing member 340 shown in FIG.

  The sealing portion 334 is formed in a half pipe shape in which the inner diameter of the upper end portion inner hole 334 b of the opening is formed with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body rod portion 331 and is divided by a straight line passing through the central axis of the main body rod portion 331. After the pair of half members 334 a are combined, the base member 320 is fixed.

  The method of assembling the sealing portion 334 to the base member 320 will be described in detail. First, the E-ring 335 is fitted into the main body rod portion 331 from the radial direction, and then the pair of half members are accommodated inside the cylinder. Combine 334a. Thereafter, the spring SP2 is inserted into the sealing portion 334 from the lower end side of the main body bar portion 331, and in this state, the lower end portion of the main body bar portion 331 is inserted into the recessed portion 322 of the base member 320, while the sealing portion The sealing portion 334 is fixed to the base member 320 by fitting the lower end portion of 334 to the base member 320.

  By assembling in this way, it is possible to prevent the sealing portion 334 from falling off from the intermediate member obtained by combining the pair of half members 334a with the main body bar portion 331. Therefore, the main body bar portion 331 and the sealing portion 334 can be connected in advance, so that the production efficiency can be improved in the production line.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the main body bar portion 331 is supported at two points, that is, the recessed portion 322 of the base member 320 and the upper end inner hole 334 b of the sealing portion 334, and thus the main body bar portion 331 of the clutch member 330. Can be suppressed, and the movement width when the clutch member 330 moves in the vertical direction can be ensured without waste.

  The opening / closing member 340 is a long member that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 323 of the base member 320, and a main body plate portion 341 that is formed in a long plate shape when viewed in the axial direction, and a lower end portion of the main body plate portion 341. A support hole 342 formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 323, an engagement claw 343 projecting from the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 341 on the side facing the clutch member 330, An adjustment receiving portion 344 that protrudes from a side surface that intersects with the support hole 342 of the main body plate portion 341, and an adjustment that protrudes from the side surface opposite to the side facing the clutch member 330 at the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 341. The arm portion 345, the bulging portion 346 bulging from the surface of the main body plate portion 341 facing the sealing portion 334, and the shaft portion 323 are wound around and locked by the convex receiving portion 344, thereby opening and closing the opening / closing member 340. Turn to outside position Mainly includes a torsion spring NB1, the generating a biasing force for.

  In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the expected degree of jackpot can be grasped by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340. Therefore, by making the player visually recognize the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340, the player can be relieved.

  The main body plate portion 341 is formed such that the lower half portion to be pivotally supported is formed in a plate shape, and the upper half portion connected thereto is formed from a three-dimensional shape (substantially rectangular shape) enlarged in the plate thickness direction. .

  The engaging claw 343 is formed in a bowl shape protruding downward from the tip (projecting toward the shaft portion 323 side), and in a state where the opening / closing member 340 is closest to the clutch member 330 (first position state). Then, it engages with the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 (see FIG. 9). The engagement claw 343 engages with the annular recess 333 a, thereby preventing the opening / closing member 340 from rotating around the shaft portion 323. That is, the opening / closing member 340 is prevented from moving from the first position state to a state (second position state or the like) separated from the clutch member 330.

  The adjustment arm portion 345 is a member that defines the end of rotation of the opening / closing member 340 by contacting an upper surface of the switching device 400 described later. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the end of rotation of the opening / closing member 340 is mainly selectable from three types.

  The bulging portion 346 is a portion that defines the rotation end of the opening / closing member 340 by contacting the sealing portion 334. In this embodiment, the surface facing the sealing portion 334 is configured in a planar shape, but may be configured in a curved surface shape that matches the curvature of the outer peripheral surface of the sealing portion 334.

  The switching device 400 is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body portion 321 of the base member 320, so that the periphery of the base member 320 can be relatively rotated, and a donut-shaped main body ring portion 410 viewed from above An adjustment step portion 420 that is formed on the upper surface of the main body ring portion 410 and stops the rotation operation of the opening and closing member 340 by contact with the adjustment arm portion 345; Gear teeth 430 engraved in this manner, and a drive motor 490 that drives a drive gear 491 meshed with the gear teeth 430.

  The switching device 400 is a device configured to be able to change the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340, and is disposed below (on the back side) of the operation device 300 from the opening / closing member 340 when viewed from the player. Thereby, while making it easy for a player to visually recognize the opening / closing member 340, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the switching device 400.

  The adjustment step portion 420 is configured in such a manner that the height of the upper side surface changes for each angular position (phase) with respect to the axis center when the main body ring portion 410 is viewed in the rotation axis direction. Therefore, the position at which the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 stops depends on which surface of the adjustment step 420 the adjustment arm 345 contacts.

  The gear teeth 430 rotate when driving force is transmitted from the driving gear 491. As the gear teeth rotate, the main body annular portion 410 and the adjustment step portion 420 formed on the upper surface thereof similarly rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the adjustment stepped portion 420 has a first surface 421 whose upper surface is the highest step h0 and a second surface 422 that is one step lower than the first surface 421 and the middle step h1. And the third surface 423, which is the lowest low step h2, and each connection surface that connects the circumferential ends of the respective surfaces (for the high step h0, the middle step h1, and the low step h2). (See FIG. 10). Note that a cut surface θL0 and a third surface 423, which will be described later, are arranged with a difference of approximately 110 degrees with respect to the central axis of the main body ring portion 410.

  In addition, each connecting surface has a volume portion in which the annular shape of the main body ring portion 410 and a solid body (block-shaped member) extending radially from the rotation axis of the main body ring portion 410 overlap each other. It is formed from a mode in which it is recessed in the form of being extracted from the ring portion 410. Therefore, each connection surface is in a mode in which a straight line extending from the connection surface intersects the central axis of the main body ring portion 410 on a plane perpendicular to the axis of the main body ring portion 410.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the operation member 310 is disposed so as to face the upper surface of the outer wall member 301 and the upper surface of the opening / closing member 340 in the direction of the push-in operation. A length until the top surface of 301 or the top surface of the opening / closing member 340 comes into contact is set. In the present embodiment, in a state where the operation member 310 is disposed at the upper end position (see FIG. 9) of the movement range, the distance from the lower surface of the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 310 to the upper surface of the outer wall member 301 is The distance from the upper bottom surface of the main body 311 of 310 to the upper surface of the opening / closing member 340 is shorter. Thereby, even if the operation member 310 is pushed down to the lower end of the movement range, it is possible to prevent the operation member 310 and the opening / closing member 340 from colliding in the vertical direction.

  With reference to FIG. 10, the detail of the relationship between the adjustment step part 420 and the opening-and-closing member 340 is demonstrated. In the description of FIG. 10, FIG. 8 is appropriately referred to.

  FIG. 10 is a development view of the outer peripheral surface of the switching device 400. 10 is developed from the predetermined cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL2 arranged at a position moved by a center angle of 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. FIG. 10 is a developed view, and the lower side of FIG. 10 shows the side surface of the main body ring portion 410 from the cutting line θL2 to the cutting line θL0 arranged at a position shifted by a center angle 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. FIG. 8 is a developed view (see FIG. 8 for the cutting lines θL0 and θL2).

  Here, in FIG. 8, the position intersecting with the straight line drawn up and down is the opposite position across the central axis of the main body ring portion 410 (the protruding receiving portions 344 of the pair of opening and closing members 340 can simultaneously contact each other). Corresponding position).

  As for the main body ring portion 410, cutting lines θL0 to θL3 are drawn vertically on the side surface as a reference line for convenience when the side surface is expanded. Here, from the cutting line θL0, the cutting line θL1 is arranged at a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in top view around the central axis of the main body ring portion 410, and is positioned 180 degrees counterclockwise in top view (see FIG. The cutting line θL2 is disposed at a position (opposite to the cutting line θL0), and the cutting line θL3 is disposed at a position rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above (a position opposite to the cutting line θL1) (see FIG. 8).

  As described above, the adjustment step portion 420 is a portion that contacts the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340, and the opening / closing member 340 moves outward depending on which position of the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 420 abuts. The way of opening (operation mode) when rotated toward the direction changes.

  For example, the shape of the adjustment step portion 420 from the cutting line θL1 to the cutting line θL2 and the shape of the adjustment step portion from the cutting line θL3 to the cutting line θL0 are the same in the relationship between the upper and lower figures in FIG. That is, when the adjustment arm 345 is disposed opposite to the section from the cutting line θL1 to the cutting line θL2 and the section from the cutting line θL3 to the cutting line θL0 of the adjustment step section 420, the opening / closing member that rotates outwardly. 340 rotates to a similar position with a pair of opening and closing members 340.

  On the other hand, the shape of the adjustment step portion 420 from the cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL1 is different from the shape of the adjustment step portion from the cutting line θL2 to the cutting line θL3 in the relationship between the upper and lower figures in FIG. . Specifically, in the section from the cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL1, the second surface 422 is arranged close to the cutting line θL0 (the center position in the circumferential direction of the second surface 422 is cut by 11.25 degrees from the virtual line BK2). In the section from the cutting line θL2 to the cutting line θL3, the second surface 422 is close to the cutting line θL0 side in the section from the cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL1. The second surface 422 is disposed close to the cutting line θL3 side. Therefore, the operation modes of the opening / closing member 340 can be made different from each other. Next, this will be described in detail.

  As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 10, a description will be given by drawing three virtual vertical lines at equal intervals between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1. In FIG. 10, virtual lines BK1, BK2, and BK3 are defined in order from the side close to the cutting line θL0. The virtual lines BK 1, BK 2, and BK 3 are a straight line extending radially from the central axis of the main body ring portion 410 and a plane formed by the central axis of the main body ring portion 410, and the circumference of the main body ring portion 410. Corresponds to the line where the plane intersects.

  Since the length in the left-right direction in FIG. 10 corresponds to the size of the angle with respect to the central axis of the main body ring portion 410, the virtual lines BK1, BK2, between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 By BK3, it is divided at equal intervals of 22.5 degrees. Similarly, in the lower diagram of FIG. 10, virtual lines BK1, BK2, and BK3 are drawn between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3.

  Next, the case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where each of the virtual lines BK1, BK2, BK3 is drawn will be described in order, starting with the case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where the cutting line θL0 is drawn.

  When the adjustment arm 345 is in contact with the point where the cutting line θL0 is drawn (the initial state of the main body ring portion 410, see FIG. 6), the adjustment arm 345 is the adjustment step portion in the first position state of the opening / closing member 340. It is already in contact with the first surface 421 of 420. Accordingly, since the opening / closing member 340 cannot move further toward the second position state, even if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the opening / closing member 340 is not provided. Is maintained in the first position state. In FIG. 10, the state in which the adjustment arm 345 can come into contact with the point where the cutting line θL0 is drawn corresponds to the initial state (waiting for instruction) of the main body ring portion 410.

  Next, a case where the adjustment arm part 345 contacts the point where the virtual line BK1 is drawn will be described. This state corresponds to a state in which the main body ring portion 410 of the switching device 400 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  In a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 can contact the point where the virtual line BK1 is drawn (first effect state), the adjustment arm portion 345 (hereinafter referred to as the adjustment arm) disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3. Part 345b) is still in contact with the first surface 421 of the adjustment step part 420, while the adjustment arm part 345 (hereinafter referred to as the adjustment arm part) disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1. 345a) is opposed to the second surface 422, and a space is formed between the second surface 422 and the second surface 422.

  Accordingly, if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the adjustment arm 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is maintained in the first position state. The adjustment arm portion 345a disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 is maintained until the space between the first position state and the second surface 422 is filled (the adjustment arm portion 345 and the second surface 422 are disposed). Rotate until contacted.

  The opening / closing member 340 on which the adjustment arm portion 345a after rotation is disposed is lifted up to the first surface 421 by the adjustment arm portion 345 sliding on the adjustment step portion 420 as the main body ring portion 410 rotates. As a result, the first position state is restored. For example, by rotating the main body ring portion 410 counterclockwise as viewed from above, the other adjustment arm portion 345 can reach the position where the cutting line θL0 is drawn (the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the left in FIG. 10). The adjusting arm 345a can be lifted up to the first surface 421. Further, since the connecting surface between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 is formed to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being overloaded.

  Hereinafter, the opening / closing member 340 provided with the adjustment arm 345a is also referred to as an opening / closing member 340a, and the opening / closing member 340 provided with the adjustment arm 345b is also referred to as an opening / closing member 340b.

  Next, a case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where the virtual line BK2 is drawn will be described. This state corresponds to the state in which the main body ring portion 410 of the switching device 400 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  In a state where the adjustment arm part 345 can contact the point where the virtual line BK2 is drawn (second effect state), the adjustment arm part 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is also the cutting line θL0. And the adjustment arm portion 345a arranged between the cutting line θL1 and the second surface 422, and a space is formed between the adjustment arm portion 345a and the second surface 422.

  Therefore, if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the adjustment arm portion 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is also between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1. The adjustment arm portion 345a disposed in the position also rotates until the space between the first position state and the second surface 422 is filled (until the adjustment arm portion 345 and the second surface 422 come into contact with each other). In addition, the opening / closing member 340 after the rotation is moved to the first position state by the adjustment arm portion 345 sliding on the adjustment step portion 420 and being lifted to the first surface 421 as the main body ring portion 410 rotates. Return. Further, since the connecting surface between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 is formed to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being overloaded.

  Here, from the second effect state, the return mode of the pair of opening and closing members 340 can be changed by switching the rotation direction of the main body ring portion 410 forward and backward. For example, when the main body ring portion 410 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above (when the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the left in FIG. 10), the opening / closing disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 When the member 340b returns to the first position state earlier than the opening / closing member 340a, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated clockwise as viewed from above (the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the right in FIG. 10). ), The opening / closing member 340b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 returns to the first position state later than the opening / closing member 340a.

  Accordingly, by changing the direction in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated after the operation member 310 is operated by the player in relation to the expected degree of variation occurring at that time, the difference in the return mode of the opening / closing member 340 Therefore, the degree of attention to the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

  Next, a case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where the virtual line BK3 is drawn will be described. This state corresponds to a state in which the main body ring portion 410 of the switching device 400 is rotated 67.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  In a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 can contact the point where the virtual line BK3 is drawn (third effect state), the adjustment arm portion 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is the second surface. The adjustment arm portion 345a disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 is formed on the first surface of the adjustment step portion 420 while facing the 422 and forming a space between the second surface 422. 421 abuts.

  Therefore, if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the adjustment arm portion 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is moved from the first position to the second surface 422. The adjustment arm 345a disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 is rotated until the space between the adjustment arm 345 and the second surface 422 comes into contact with each other. Maintained in the first position state.

  In addition, the opening / closing member 340a after the rotation moves to the first position state by the adjustment arm portion 345 sliding on the adjustment step portion 420 and being lifted up to the first surface 421 as the main body ring portion 410 rotates. Return. For example, by rotating the main body ring portion 410 clockwise as viewed from above, the adjustment arm portion 345b can reach the position where the cutting line θL3 is drawn (the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the right in FIG. 10). The adjustment arm 345b can be lifted up to the first surface 421. Further, since the connecting surface between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 is formed to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being overloaded.

  As described above, rotating the main body ring portion 410 clockwise corresponds to moving the adjustment arm portion 345 rightward in FIG. 10 (illustrated by an arrow CW in FIG. 10). . Conversely, rotating the main body ring portion 410 counterclockwise when viewed from above corresponds to moving the adjustment arm portion 345 leftward in FIG. 10 (illustrated by an arrow CCW in FIG. 10).

  Note that, in a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 can contact the third step 423 of the adjustment step portion 420 (fourth effect state), the opening / closing member 340 rotates at the maximum rotation angle from the first position state. In this case, the surface of the opening / closing member 340 facing the operation member 310 is configured to come into contact with the operation member 310, and details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, a state in which the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 410 is in the initial state will be described. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 6, and FIG. 12 is a top view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XII in FIG.

  In FIG. 11, the operation member 310 before being pushed in is illustrated by an imaginary line. In FIG. 12, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not illustrated for easy understanding. The In FIG. 12, the main body annular portion 410 passes through the cutting line θL0 so that a straight line (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 12) passing through the center of the main body annular portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening / closing members 340 passes. The posture is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by being pressed against the protruding portion 312. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, but the rotation of the adjustment arm portion 345 is regulated by the adjustment step portion 420. The operation of 340 is restricted.

  Therefore, the state of the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state before and after the player operates the operation member 310 (see FIG. 12). In this way, in the initial state, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state regardless of whether or not the operation member 310 is operated. Therefore, an effect of instructing to push the operation member 310 (third symbol display) The opening / closing member 340 can be prevented from opening / closing when the player pushes the operating member 310 even though the device 81, other liquid crystal screen, sound, and lamp effects are not generated. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, a state where the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 410 is in the second effect state will be described. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 6, and FIG. 14 is a top view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XIV in FIG.

  In FIG. 13, the operation member 310 before being pushed is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 14, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not illustrated for easy understanding. The Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the main body annular ring so that a straight line (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 14) passing through the center of the main body ring portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening and closing members 340 passes through the virtual line BK2. The portion 410 is determined in posture. That is, FIG. 14 shows a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by being pressed against the projecting portion 312. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate in directions away from each other. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340 is stopped in a posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 420.

  Therefore, before and after the player operates the operation member 310, the state of the opening and closing member 340 changes from the first position state to the second position state (see FIG. 14). Therefore, since the content of the operation device 300 can be added as information to be given to the player, the attention of the operation device 300 can be improved. For example, by controlling the drive motor 490 so that the difference in expectation degree of jackpot can be identified depending on whether or not the state of the opening / closing member 340 changes, a pre-reading effect can be performed by changing the state of the opening / closing member 340. .

  The direction in which the engaging claws 343 of the opening / closing member 340 arranged in the first position state move (left and right, at the intersection of a circle centered on the shaft portion 323 in FIG. 13 and a line drawn vertically through the shaft portion 323. The direction of the tangent drawn to the circle) and the moving direction (vertical direction) of the clutch member 330 intersect at right angles. Therefore, when the operating member 310 is pushed in and the extending portion 333 of the clutch member 330 is lowered. The load generated between the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 can be reduced. Thereby, the case where the opening / closing member 340 is arranged in the first position state (see FIG. 13, illustrated by an imaginary line) and the case where the opening / closing member 340 is arranged in the second position state (see FIG. 13, shown by a solid line). Thus, the reaction force applied to the player via the operation member 310 can be made equal.

  That is, the reaction force applied to the player via the operation member 310 when the player operates the operation member 310 is mainly constituted by the spring SP1 and the urging force of the spring SP2 included in the clutch member 330. The reaction force does not change greatly depending on whether the opening / closing member 340 is in the first position state or the second position state.

  Thereby, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced by changing the reaction force from the operation member 310. In addition, since it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the opening / closing member 340 from the reaction force, it can be directed to pay attention to the state of the opening / closing member 340, and the attention of the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

  In addition, since an effect is produced by a change in the state of the operation device 300, a lighting device such as an LED is not necessarily required, and cost reduction by reducing the number of LEDs and space saving by omitting LED wiring are achieved. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 is easily prevented from rotating due to an increase in the load applied to the opening / closing member 340 even though the operation member 310 is not operated. The This will be described below.

  In a state where the operation member 310 is not operated, the opening / closing member 340 may unintentionally shake violently due to an impact given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player, vibrations transmitted from other operation members, or the like. In this case, when the load applied to the clutch member 330 from the opening / closing member 340 increases and the extension portion 333 is pushed down by the load from the opening / closing member 340, the engagement between the extension portion 333 and the engaging claw 343 is engaged. The opening / closing member 340 may be erroneously rotated from the first position state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the engaging claw 343 is protruded toward the shaft portion 323 which is the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 340, the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 are engaged (see FIG. 9). When the opening / closing member 340 starts to rotate, the extension portion 333 is pushed downward (on the shaft portion 323 side) due to interference with the protruding tip of the engagement claw 343. In this case, since the E-ring 335 is also moved downward at the same time, the spring SP2 is contracted. Therefore, a force for maintaining the opening / closing member 340 in the first position (the attachment of the spring SP2 that pushes up the E-ring 335) is applied. (Power) increases. Therefore, the clutch member 330 is pushed down by the opening / closing member 340, and it is possible to easily prevent a malfunction in which the opening / closing member 340 rotates.

  This mechanism for preventing malfunction is not based on controlling a solenoid or the like, but is constituted by a mechanical engagement relationship between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340. Therefore, it is possible to reliably cope with unexpected impacts and vibrations, and to improve the reliability of the operation of the operation member 300 (suppressing malfunction).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the return operation of the opening and closing member 340 will be described. 15 and 16 are top views of the operation device 300. FIG. 15 illustrates a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. 16 illustrates the main body ring portion 410 from the state illustrated in FIG. A state in which is rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 15, when the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 14, the adjustment member 345 a moves to the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 420. Thus, the opening / closing member 340a (the member on the upper side of FIG. 15, the member disposed on the back side) rotates to the first position state, while the opening / closing member 340b is maintained in the second position state. In FIGS. 22 and 23 described later, the return mode shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 16, when the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the top from the state shown in FIG. 14, the adjustment member 345 b moves to the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 420. Thus, the opening / closing member 340b (the lower member in FIG. 16, a member disposed on the front side) rotates to the first position state, while the opening / closing member 340a is maintained in the second position state. That is, the state of the opening / closing member 340 after rotating the main body ring portion 410 is upside down as compared with FIG. In FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 described later, the return mode shown in FIG.

  Therefore, the return mode of the opening / closing member 340 after the player has operated the operation member 310 to reach the state shown in FIG. 14 can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the main body ring portion 410. To increase attention to the operation device 300 after the operation by configuring the difference as an effect related to a sense of expectation for the occurrence of a special game state such as a jackpot game state (hereinafter referred to as “a jackpot expectation”). Can do.

  Conventionally, the difference in jackpot expectation is, for example, a difference in sound output from a sound output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 (see FIG. 4), a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, or the like). ) 227 (see FIG. 1 and FIG. 4), the player was informed by the difference in the output mode of turning on and off, the difference in emission color, and the like.

  However, there is a risk that the voice notification may be drowned out by a loud sound emitted from other gaming machines, etc., and there is a limit to the easily distinguishable color difference and output mode change in the light notification. There is a problem that the game tends to be monotonous because the number of jackpot expectations is limited to a small number (for example, four types). In addition, in the light notification, the part to be turned on or off may be changed depending on the degree of expectation, but also in this case, a space is required and the player needs to move the line of sight following the light. Eventually, there was a problem that players were not attracting attention.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as will be described later, at least eight types of operation modes of the opening / closing member 340 accompanying the operation of the operation member 310 can be formed. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree classified into at least eight types can be notified by the operation mode of the opening and closing member 340. Further, since the player only needs to pay attention to the opening / closing member 340, it is not necessary to move the line of sight to a plurality of locations, so that attention to the opening / closing member 340 can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the adjustment arm 345 b is moved to the first surface 421 of the adjustment step 420 by further rotating 22.5 degrees clockwise (in the same direction) from the state shown in FIG. 15. Since it can be moved, the state which returned a pair of opening-and-closing member 340 to the 1st position state can be formed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the adjustment arm 345a is further rotated by 22.5 degrees counterclockwise (in the same direction) from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to form a state in which the pair of opening / closing members 340 are returned to the first position state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19, the case where the main body ring portion 410 is set to the first effect state will be described. 17 is a top view of the operation device 300, FIG. 18 is a top view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XIX-XIX in FIG.

  In FIGS. 17 and 18, the outer wall member 301, the stacking member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown for easy understanding, and in FIG. 19, the opening / closing member 340a after the rotating operation is shown by an imaginary line. Is done.

  17 shows a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 12, and FIGS. 18 and 19 show the main body ring portion 410 from the state shown in FIG. A state rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise is shown. That is, in FIG. 18, the main body annular portion 410 passes through the virtual line BK1 so that a straight line (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 18) passing through the center of the main body annular portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening and closing members 340 passes. The posture is determined.

  In the state shown in FIG. 19, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by being brought into contact with and pushed into the projecting portion 312. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and only the opening / closing member 340a (right side in FIG. 19) of the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotates. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340a stops when the adjustment arm 345a is in contact with the second surface 422 of the adjustment step 420. After the operation member 310 is operated, the main body ring portion 410 is further rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above, so that the main body ring portion 410 can be returned to the state shown in FIG. The opening / closing member 340a can be returned to the first position state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the case where the main body ring portion 410 is set to the third effect state will be described. 20 is a top view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXI-XXI in FIG. Note that FIG. 17 is referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS.

  In FIG. 20, the outer wall member 301, the stacking member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown for easy understanding, and in FIG. 21, the opening / closing member 340b after the rotating operation is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  20 and FIG. 21, a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise as viewed from above is illustrated from the state shown in FIG. That is, in FIG. 20, the main body ring portion 410 passes through the virtual line BK3 so that a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of opening / closing members 340 (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 20) passes through the virtual line BK3. The posture is determined.

  In the state shown in FIG. 21, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by abutting and pushing the operation member 310. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and only the opening / closing member 340b (left side in FIG. 21) of the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotates. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340b stops in a posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345b contacts the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 420.

  In addition, after the operation member 310 is operated, the main body ring portion 410 is further rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise as viewed from above, so that a straight line passing through the center of the main body ring portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening and closing members 340 is connected. (A line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 20) can pass through the cutting line θL1, so that the adjustment arm 345b can reach the first surface 421 (see FIG. 10), and the opening / closing member 340b is moved to the first position. It can be returned to the position state.

  Therefore, when the player operates the operation member 310, a change occurring in the opening / closing member 340 is changed in advance by changing the state of the main body ring portion 410, so that a plurality of types (at least the mode shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 19 and the embodiment shown in FIGS. 20 and 21).

  Therefore, since the difference in the type of change in the contents of the operation device 300 can be added as information given to the player, the attention of the operation device 300 can be improved. For example, by controlling the drive motor 490 so that the difference in expectation level of jackpots can be identified according to the type of state change of the opening / closing member 340, a pre-reading effect can be performed with the type of state change of the opening / closing member 340. .

  Here, for example, in FIG. 18, even if the main body ring portion 410 is rotated after the opening / closing member 340a is rotated, the state of the opening / closing member 340b does not change. By utilizing this, the state of the opening / closing members 340a and 340b is rotated while the main body ring portion 410 is rotated by rotating the main body ring portion 410 by 22.5 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. When the operation member 310 is pushed in again, the opening / closing member 340b can be rotated, and as a result, the pair of opening / closing members 340 can be brought into the second position state. The same thing can be performed by rotating the main body ring portion 410 by 22.5 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top in the state shown in FIG.

  Therefore, by controlling the main body ring portion 410 in a manner that associates the difference in whether the state of the opening / closing member 340 changes due to the re-pushing operation after the push-in operation of the operation member 310 with the difference in the jackpot expectation. The attention of the operation device 300 after operating the operation member 310 once can be improved. Further, since the degree of expectation of jackpot changes depending on whether or not the state of the opening / closing member 340 changes due to the re-pushing operation, the operation device 300 can be focused even after the re-pushing operation.

  Since the rotation angle is the same at 22.5 degrees, a period for rotating the drive motor 490 at a predetermined first speed in order to operate the main body ring portion 410 from the state shown in FIG. 17 to the state shown in FIG. The period during which the drive motor 490 is rotated at a predetermined first speed to operate the main body ring portion 410 from the state shown in FIG. 17 to the state shown in FIG. 20 is the same. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the state of the main body ring portion 410 from the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 490.

  After the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate, as described above with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, which of the pair of opening / closing members 340 is to be returned from which opening / closing member 340 a, 340 b is determined. It can be changed according to the rotation direction of 410. Accordingly, by combining the mode in which the opening / closing member 340 rotates and the mode in which the opening / closing member 340 returns, it is possible to perform movements corresponding to a plurality of types of jackpot expectations. Thereby, the attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  FIG. 22A to FIG. 22D and FIG. 23A to FIG. 23D are model diagrams of the opening / closing member 340. In FIGS. 22A to 22D and FIGS. 23A to 23D, different patterns of the rotation operation of the opening / closing member 340 are illustrated in time series. Here, in FIGS. 22 and 23, the opening / closing member 340b is illustrated on the left side, and the opening / closing member 340a is illustrated on the right side.

  The timing for prompting the player to push in the operation member 310 by being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like is indicated by “push”. In addition, a time-series change in the state of the switching device 400 is illustrated as a horizontally long bar. Here, the display of “preparation of BK1” means that the virtual line BK1 and the adjustment arm portion 345 are arranged to face each other at the timing of the right end of the frame. The display “BK2 preparation” means that the virtual line BK2 and the adjustment arm 345 are arranged, and the display “BK3 preparation” means that the virtual line BK3 and the adjustment arm 345 are arranged opposite to each other. This is the same in FIGS. 24 and 25.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, at least eight types of rotation modes of the opening / closing member 340 can be formed. For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player pushes the operation member 310 into the second effect state (see FIG. 13). ), A first operation pattern for returning the opening / closing member 340 can be formed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player pushes the operation member 310 into the second effect state (see FIG. 13). 15), the second operation pattern for returning the opening / closing member 340 can be formed.

  By controlling the posture of the main body ring portion 410 so that the degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on whether it is the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, a pair of opening and closing is performed by pushing the operation member 310 It is possible to improve attention to the returning operation of the opening / closing member 340 after both the members 340 are rotated.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (c), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state (see FIG. 18), the player pushes the operation member 310, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned. A third operation pattern can be formed.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (d), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the third effect state (see FIG. 20), the player pushes the operation member 310, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned. A fourth operation pattern can be formed.

  The opening / closing member 340 when the operation member 310 is pushed in is controlled by controlling the posture of the main body ring portion 410 so that the degree of expectation of jackpot depends on whether it is the third operation pattern or the fourth operation pattern. It is possible to improve attention to the rotational movement of the.

  When the switching device 400 is arranged at the initial position, it is necessary when the switching device 400 is in the third effect state as compared with the rotation angle of the main body ring portion 410 required when the switching device 400 is in the first effect state. The angle of rotation becomes larger. Accordingly, the player may be able to predict the state of the main body ring portion 410 by making the player easily grasp the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 490.

  In this case, on the assumption that the operation speed of the drive motor 490 is constant, if the operation sound of the drive motor 490 continues for a long time, the player is expected to operate in the fourth operation pattern. Can do. Therefore, if the jackpot expectation level when operating in the fourth motion pattern is set high, the player's interest can be improved.

  Here, the adjustment arm 345 is supported not at the initial position but at a position where the switching device 400 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position (position where the adjustment arm 345a coincides with the cutting line θL1). The second initial state may also be set to be possible. In this case, from the second initial state, even if the operation sound is short (when rotated by 22.5 degrees), the switching device 400 can be in the third effect state, and even if the operation sound is long, The switching device 400 can be set to the first effect state. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the relationship between the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 490 and the big hit expectation.

  The operation timing of the main body ring portion 410 is exemplified when, for example, a reach effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the rotational speed of the drive motor 490 is a constant speed. Therefore, an operation with a large rotation angle is performed during the long reach, and an operation with a small rotation angle is performed during the short reach so that a sufficient period can be prepared when the rotation angle of the main body ring portion 410 increases. For example, the third operation pattern is used for short reach, and the first, second, and fourth operation patterns are used for long reach.

  When returning to the initial state after the switching device 400 is in the second initial state, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from above. Thereby, even if the player pushes the operation member 310 during the return operation, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 340 from operating in the first to eighth operation patterns and confusing the player. Further, by utilizing a range in which the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 420 is maintained long in the circumferential direction, the state in which the adjustment arm portion 345 is maintained at the upper end position of the movement range (opening / closing member) during most of the return operation. 340 can be maintained in the first position state). Further, this return operation is performed outside the period during which the reach effect is performed. Thereby, it is possible to return the main body ring portion 410 to the initial position in a state where the player's attention is diverted.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state (see FIG. 18), the player pushes the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the front-to-back return mode (see FIG. 16). Five operation patterns can be formed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23B, when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state (see FIG. 18), the player pushes the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the rearward return mode (see FIG. 15). Six operation patterns can be formed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the third effect state (see FIG. 20), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the front-to-back return mode (see FIG. 16). Seven operation patterns can be formed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (d), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the third effect state (see FIG. 20), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the rearward return mode (see FIG. 15). Eight operation patterns can be formed.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the fifth operation pattern to the eighth operation pattern, the members on one side of the pair of opening / closing members 340 operate before and after the player pushes the operation member 310 (performs the second operation). . You may make it express the difference in jackpot expectation degree by the combination of the operation modes of this one side member.

  In this case, for example, “when the opening / closing member 340 that is rotated by the first pushing operation is maintained in the rotating state (second position state) longer than the opening / closing member 340 on the opposite side after the second operation. When the control is performed such that the expectation level for jackpot is high, the expectation degree for jackpot is higher in the fifth operation pattern and the eighth operation pattern than in the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern.

  If controlled in this way, the gameability for knowing the jackpot expectation degree by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 for a certain period is added to the gameability for knowing the expectation degree of the jackpot from the state (operation mode) of the opening / closing member 340 at a certain point. can do.

  Therefore, the opening / closing member 340 is in the second position state at the time of the second push operation and after the second push operation, as compared with the case where all the information about the jackpot expectation is obtained by the push operation of the first operation member 310. In the meantime, the player's attention to the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

  In addition, the combination of the operation modes of the members on one side is not limited to those described above, and various modes are exemplified. For example, if the opening / closing member 340 that is rotated by the first pressing operation returns to the initial state (first position state) earlier than the opening / closing member 340 on the opposite side after the second operation, the jackpot expectation is You may make it control so that it is high. In this case, the big hit expectation is lower in the fifth operation pattern and the eighth operation pattern than in the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern.

  In addition, for example, “the first opening operation causes the opening / closing member 340a on the back side to rotate, and the expectation degree of jackpot is higher than the case where the opening / closing member 340b on the front side rotates,” the second pressing operation. The return order from the front opening / closing member 340b may be controlled such that the return operation from the front side opening / closing member 340b has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the return operation from the rear side opening / closing member 340a. In this case, among the fifth operation pattern to the eighth operation pattern, the fifth operation pattern has the highest jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation decreases in order as the sixth, seventh, and eighth.

  In addition, from the number of operation stages, the operation patterns (fifth operation pattern to eighth operation pattern) shown in FIG. 23 are compared with the operation patterns (first operation pattern to fourth operation pattern) shown in FIG. Although the operation is longer, the correspondence of the expectation level to the operation length is not limited. For example, the operation pattern shown in FIG. 22 may be controlled to have a higher jackpot expectation than the operation pattern shown in FIG. 23, or vice versa. Further, for example, the first operation pattern to the eighth operation pattern may be randomly ordered, and control may be performed so that the jackpot expectation is increased in that order.

  Note that, as a control method related to the effect, in the third operation pattern or the fourth operation pattern, before the opening / closing member 340 performs the return operation, a re-pushing instruction may be issued. In this case, even if the operation member 310 is pushed in accordance with the push-in instruction, the opening / closing member 340 arranged in the first position state does not rotate, and an effect of maintaining the posture (so-called “gase effect”) can be performed. Therefore, the fact that the main body ring portion 410 is operating in any one of the fifth to eighth operation patterns can be prevented from being determined even when the second pressing instruction is issued. It is possible to increase the player's feeling of tension when the operation member 310 is pushed in.

  In addition, as a control method related to the effect, in the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, a re-pushing instruction may be issued before the opening / closing member 340 returns. In this case, even if the operation member 310 is pushed in accordance with the push-in instruction, when the opening / closing member 340 is arranged in the second position state, only the posture is maintained, and the player ignores the first operation instruction. The pair of opening / closing members 340 is in the second position state. Therefore, the fact that the main body ring portion 410 is operating in any one of the fifth to eighth operation patterns can be prevented from being determined even if the second push instruction is issued. .

  As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of tension when pushing the operating member 310, and at the same time, the first operation instruction is determined to have a low expectation level and is ignored, and the second time is expected to have a high expectation level. A unique mode of operation can be formed for an operation method in which a push-in operation is performed only in response to the operation instruction. This will be described below.

  24A and 24B are model diagrams of the opening / closing member 340. FIG. In FIG. 24A, the operation pattern of the opening / closing member 340 when the main body ring portion 410 operates so that the opening / closing member 340 can operate in the first operation pattern is shown in FIG. The operation patterns of the opening / closing member 340 when the main body ring portion 410 operates so that the member 340 can operate in the fifth operation pattern (or the seventh operation pattern) are illustrated in time series. In addition, in the first operation pattern shown in FIG. 24A, the effect control is performed in such a manner that a second operation instruction is generated. 24A and 24B illustrate a case where the player ignores the first operation instruction and does not push the operation member 310.

  As shown in FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B, when the first operation instruction is ignored and only the second operation instruction is followed, the opening / closing member 340 changes the posture of the main body ring portion 410. Although the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is the same regardless of the operation pattern to be performed, the player determines in which operation pattern the opening / closing member 340 is rotating. It is impossible to read the jackpot expectation degree from the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340.

  Therefore, the main body ring portion 410 that enables the opening / closing member 340 to operate in a plurality of operation patterns is combined with the timing (time and number of times) at which an operation instruction for the operation member 310 that triggers the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 is input. When the player ignores a part of the operation instructions of the operation member 310 and operates the operation member 310 only according to the remaining part of the operation instructions by performing the production, in which operation pattern the opening / closing member 340 is operated. By making it impossible to grasp whether it is operating, it is possible to produce an effect that stirs up the player's imagination. Thus, it is possible to satisfy a request from a player who wants to operate the operation unit 310 but does not want to grasp the degree of expectation of jackpot from the state of the operation unit 310 (a request to prefer a so-called “one-shot notification”). it can.

  Further, for example, when the operation member 310 is pushed at a timing when there is no operation instruction, the expected operation pattern is destroyed, and the big hit expectation degree may not be read from the operation mode of the opening and closing member 340. By configuring the ring portion 410, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the operation member 310 at a timing when there is no operation instruction. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly operating the operation member 310 at unnecessary timing, and the durability of the operation device 300 can be improved. Hereinafter, this will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a model diagram of the opening / closing member 340. In FIG. 25, the operation pattern of the opening / closing member 340 when the main body ring portion 410 operates so that the opening / closing member 340 can operate in the first operation pattern is illustrated in time series. FIG. 25 illustrates a case where the player performs an unnecessary operation before the first operation instruction is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 25, due to the structure of the main body ring portion 410 in this embodiment, the posture of the main body ring portion 410 is changed from the initial state to the second effect state in order to form the first operation pattern of the opening / closing member 340. On the way, there is a case of going through the first effect state.

  If the operation member 310 is pushed unnecessarily when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state, the opening / closing member 340a rotates. Thereafter, the main body ring portion 410 enters the second effect state, and when a push-in instruction is given by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, and the player pushes in accordingly, the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate.

  This operation mode is the same operation sequence as the fifth operation pattern described above with reference to FIG. 23A, but the main body annular portion 410 operates in a mode that allows the opening / closing member 340 to operate according to the first operation pattern. Since it is controlled, the jackpot expectation that can be read by the operation of the opening / closing member 340 is the jackpot expectation corresponding to the first operation pattern.

  Therefore, the occurrence of an unnecessary pushing operation at a timing when there is no pushing instruction can cause a difference between the jackpot expectation expressed in the performance and the jackpot expectation actually recognized by the player.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot expectation correctly by performing an unnecessary push-in operation, and to suppress the player's unnecessary push-in operation (for example, repeated hitting operation). it can. Thereby, durability of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, a state after the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 410 is in the fourth effect state will be described. 26 is a top view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG.

  In FIG. 26, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown for easy understanding, and in FIG. 27, the operation member 310 and the opening / closing member 340 before being pushed in are imagined. Illustrated with lines.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 26, the main body circle is such that a straight line (line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 26) passing through the center of the main body ring portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening / closing members 340 passes through the third surface 423. The ring portion 410 is determined in posture. That is, FIG. 26 shows a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated about 110 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by abutting and pushing the operation member 310. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate in directions away from each other. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340 stops with the posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the third surface 423 of the adjustment step portion 420.

  The opening / closing member 340 comes into contact with the inner surface of the operation member 310 in the rotated state. Therefore, the operating member 310 receives a load from the opening / closing member 340, and in this embodiment, the elastic coefficient of the spring SP1 is selected so that the vertical movement of the operating member 310 is stopped by the load. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 27, the operation member 310 is maintained without being raised.

  Thereby, for example, the player's interest in the operation of the operation member 310 can be improved by controlling the drive motor 490 so that the state in which the operation member 310 is maintained without being raised is a state in which the degree of big hit expectation is high. it can.

  For example, when the player is hitting the operation member 310 repeatedly, the player is pushing and applying a load to the operation member 310 that is moved upward by the elastic force of the spring SP1, and suddenly the fourth effect state shown in FIG. By inserting, the upward load applied to the player through the operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player can feel uncomfortable. By giving the player a sense of incongruity, attention to the operation device 300 that is the cause (target) can be improved.

  In addition, since the opening / closing member 340 is changed to the second position state in the state of giving a sense of incongruity, if the feeling of incongruity is given, the state of the opening / closing member 340 on the back side of the operation member 310 is visually recognized, and the big hit expectation It is possible to provide the player with a new game mode of grasping the game.

  In the fourth effect state, the operation of pushing the operation member 310 to rotate the pair of opening / closing members 340 is not different from the second effect state, but in the present embodiment, the difference is determined for the player. It is formed from a difficult mode (a mode in which the rotation angle of the opening and closing member 340 in the second effect state is similar to the rotation angle of the opening and closing member 340 in the fourth effect state, see FIGS. 14 and 26).

  Accordingly, it is possible to configure a game property in which the player can release his hand from the operation member 310 and can recognize whether the operation state is the second effect state or the fourth effect state depending on whether the operation member 310 is raised. . Therefore, attention to the operation device 300 can be maintained not only when the operation member 310 is pushed in but also when the hand is released from the operation member 310.

  26 and 27, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated clockwise as viewed from above (in FIG. 10, the main body ring portion 410 is moved to the left with respect to the opening / closing member 340). The adjustment arm 345 can reach the first surface 421 of the adjustment step 420, and the opening / closing member 340 can be returned to the first position. When the opening / closing member 340 returns, the load applied from the opening / closing member 340 to the operation member 310 is released, and the operation member 310 can be returned to the initial position (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 27). In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 10, the shape of the adjustment step 420 from the cutting line θL1 to the cutting line θL2 is the same as the shape of the adjustment step 420 from the cutting line θL3 to the cutting line θL0. Therefore, the pair of opening / closing members 340 return in the same operation mode.

  In the present embodiment, from the state shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the main body ring portion 410 is controlled to be prohibited from rotating counterclockwise as viewed from above. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, even if the connecting surface on the left side of the third surface 423 (clockwise in the top view of the main body ring portion 410) is formed along the vertical direction, It is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the displacement of the operation member 310 is disposed inside the outer periphery of the outer wall member 301 and outside the outer periphery of the operation member 310. A portion (not shown) that protrudes radially outward of the operating member 310 from below the inner extending portion 315 of the operating member 310 is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor, so that the displacement of the operating member 310 is reduced. It is detected and it is determined that there is an operation by the player.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the operation device 300 includes a pair of opening / closing members 340. However, the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment includes two pairs (four) of opening / closing members 2340, which are the second It shifts in order from the position state to the first position state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 2320, the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 2340, and the switching device 2400. In FIG. 28, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  The base member 2320 is formed from a mode in which a pair of shaft portions 323 is added to the base member 320 of the first embodiment. That is, the shaft portions 323 are arranged at equal intervals on four sides (front and rear, left and right) of the recessed portion 322.

  The opening / closing member 2340 is formed from a mode in which a pair of opening / closing members 340 is added to the opening / closing member 340 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the first opening / closing member 2340a, the second opening / closing member 2340b, the third opening / closing member 2340c, the fourth, in order from the member arranged on the drive motor 490 side of the switching device 2400, clockwise from the top. The opening / closing member 2340d is used.

  In the switching device 2400, the adjustment step portion 2420 has a first surface 2421 in which the highest step h0 is the highest, a second surface 2422 in which the adjustment step portion 2420 is an intermediate step h1 that is one step lower than the first surface 2421, and the circumference of each of these surfaces. It is formed only from each connecting surface that connects the direction end portions, and the switching interval between each surface is different from that of the adjustment stepped portion 420 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, this will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 30 is a top view of the operation device 2300. In FIG. 30, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. FIG. 30 illustrates an initial state (waiting for instructions) of the main body ring portion 2410 in which the adjustment arm portions 345 of all the opening / closing members 2340 are opposed to the first surface 2421. Further, in FIG. 30, for easy understanding, a schematic diagram showing a change in the height of the adjustment step portion 2420 is shown in an annular shape with an imaginary line.

  In the schematic view, a side view of the adjustment step portion 2420 is schematically shown in an annular shape. The closer to the center (position of the contact portion 332), the higher the step.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the first surface 2421 of the adjustment step portion 2420 has only a short surface 2421a having a short left-right width (in this embodiment, a center angle of about 6 degrees), and an upper surface based on the short surface 2421a. It mainly includes a first width-long surface 2421b, a second width-long surface 2421c, and a third width-long surface 2421d that are sequentially arranged in a clockwise direction. Note that, in the initial state, the width short surface 2421a has a mode in which the center of the opposing opening / closing member 2340 (first opening / closing member 2340a in FIG. 30) coincides with the center of the width length.

  The first width-long surface 2421b, the second width-long surface 2421c, and the third width-long surface 2421d are surfaces formed with a width of a center angle of about 50 degrees, respectively, and in the initial state, the positions with the opposing opening / closing member 2340 The relationship is different.

  That is, the opening / closing member 2340 (the second opening / closing member 2340b in FIG. 30) arranged to face the first width-long surface 2421b has a first width length that divides the width of the first width-long surface 2421b by an equal uniform width Hf. It is arranged at a position shifted from the center of the surface 2421b by the first shift angle θ21 in the clockwise direction when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the first deviation angle θ21 is about 11 degrees (θ21 = 11 degrees).

  In addition, the opening / closing member 2340 (the third opening / closing member 2340c in FIG. 30) disposed to face the second width-long surface 2421c is a second width length that divides the width length of the second width-long surface 2421c by an equal uniform width Hf. It is disposed at a position equivalent to the center position of the surface 2421c.

  In addition, the opening / closing member 2340 (the fourth opening / closing member 2340d in FIG. 30) disposed to face the third width long surface 2421d is a third width length that divides the width of the third width long surface 2421d by the uniform equal width Hf. It is arranged at a position shifted from the center of the surface 2421d by the first shift angle θ21 counterclockwise when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the first deviation angle θ21 is about 11 degrees (θ21 = 11 degrees).

  As described above, each of the surfaces 2421a to 2421d forming the first surface 2421 is arranged in a different manner with respect to a line (each opening and closing member 2340) that divides the circle into four equal parts. The mode of opening and closing can be varied. This will be described below.

  FIG. 31 is a top view of the operation device 2300. In FIG. 31, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. Further, FIG. 31 illustrates a posture in which the adjustment arm portions 345 of all the opening / closing members 2340 are opposed to the second surface 2422, and illustrates a state in which all the opening / closing members 2340 are in the second position state. The Further, in FIG. 30, for easy understanding, a schematic diagram showing a change in the height of the adjustment step portion 2420 is shown in an annular shape with an imaginary line.

  In the schematic view, a side view of the adjustment step portion 2420 is schematically shown in an annular shape. The closer to the center (position of the contact portion 332), the higher the step.

  FIG. 31 illustrates a state (posture A) in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above, from the initial state of the main body ring portion 2410 illustrated in FIG. 30. In the present embodiment, in the posture A shown in FIG. 31, the positional relationship between the open / close members 2340a to 2340d and the second surface 2422 is different.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 31, the first opening / closing member 2340a is shifted from the end of the short width surface 2421a by an angle J24 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top (counterclockwise when viewed from the end of the first long surface 2421b). At a position shifted by an angle J21) from the second surface 2422.

  Further, the second opening / closing member 2340b is shifted by an angle J23 from the end of the first width-long surface 2421b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top (angle J22 from the end of the second width-long surface 2421c counterclockwise as viewed from the top). The second surface 2422 is opposed to the second surface 2422 at a shifted position.

  Further, the third opening / closing member 2340c is shifted from the end of the second width long surface 2421c by an angle J22 clockwise as viewed from above (angle from the end of the third width long surface 2421d by angle J23 counterclockwise as viewed from above). The second surface 2422 is opposed to the second surface 2422 at a shifted position.

  Further, the fourth opening / closing member 2340d is shifted by an angle J21 clockwise from the end of the third width long surface 2421d (viewed from the end of the short width surface 2421a by an angle J24 counterclockwise from the top). The second surface 2422 is disposed at a position).

  In this embodiment, the angle J21 is set to 9 degrees, the angle J22 is set to 20 degrees, the angle J23 is set to 31 degrees, and the angle J24 is set to 42 degrees (angle J21 <angle J22 <angle J23 <angle J24, (angle J22 -Angle J21) = (Angle J23-Angle J22) = (Angle J24-Angle J23) = 11 degrees).

  Therefore, by rotating the main body ring portion 2410 from the state shown in FIG. 31, the adjustment arm portion 345 of each opening / closing member 2340 is lifted to the first surface 2421 of the adjustment step portion 2420 to be in the first position state ( The period until (see FIG. 30) is different for each opening / closing member 2340. In this regard, the state shown in FIG. 31 is divided into a case where the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 45 degrees clockwise when viewed from above and a case where the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. This will be described below.

  FIG. 32A is a diagram showing a change in time of the state of each opening / closing member 2340. In FIG. 32 (a), the time change of the posture of each opening / closing member 2340 when the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the top from the state (posture A) shown in FIG. The line is set to the second position state of the opening / closing member 2340 (shown as “inverted” in FIG. 32A), and the upper line is set to the first position state of the opening / closing member 2340 (“rise” in FIG. 32A). It is shown as four line graphs shown as).

  In FIG. 32A, the posture change modes of the first opening / closing member 2340 a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340 d are illustrated in order from the top, and the horizontal axis of each graph indicates the time from the start of the operation of the switching device 2400. It is shown as a time axis, and a numerical value when the switching device 2400 is rotationally driven at a speed of 10 degrees per second is described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are illustrated in the vicinity of each graph.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the main body ring portion 2410 starts to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from above, the first opening / closing member is turned when the rotation angle becomes 9 degrees (angle J21) 0.9 seconds after the start. 2340a is in the first position state, and when the second opening / closing member 2340b is in the first position state after 1.1 seconds (2.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of rotation) and the rotation angle reaches 20 degrees (angle J22). Then, when 1.1 seconds have passed (3.1 seconds have passed since the start of rotation) and the rotation angle has reached 31 degrees (angle J23), the third opening / closing member 2340c is brought into the first position state, and further 1.1 seconds. After a lapse of time (4.2 seconds from the start of rotation) and the rotation angle becomes 42 degrees (angle J24), the fourth opening / closing member 2340d is brought into the first position state.

  That is, each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d operates in such a manner that the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d are sequentially raised from the first opening / closing member 2340a in a clockwise direction as viewed from above. Further, the operation timing is generated every time the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 11 degrees ((angle J22−angle J21) = (angle J23−angle J22) = (angle J24−angle J23) = 11 degrees). By operating the main body ring portion 2410 to rotate at a constant speed, the operation timing of each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d can be set at equal intervals.

  FIG. 33A is a diagram showing a change in time of the state of each opening / closing member 2340. In FIG. 33A, the change in time of each opening / closing member 2340 when the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 31 (posture A) opens and closes the lower line. The member 2340 is in the second position state (shown as “falling” in FIG. 33A), and the upper line is shown in the first position state of the opening / closing member 2340 (in FIG. 33A, “starting”). ) As four line graphs.

  In FIG. 33A, the posture change modes of the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are illustrated in order from the top, and the horizontal axis of each graph indicates the time from the start of the operation of the switching device 2400. A numerical value when the switching device 2400 is rotationally driven at a speed of 10 degrees per second is described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are illustrated in the vicinity of each graph.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the main body ring portion 2410 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from above, the fourth opening / closing member 2340d becomes a position when the rotation angle becomes 9 degrees (angle J21) 0.9 seconds after the start. Is in the first position state, and when 1.1 seconds have passed (2.0 seconds have passed since the start of rotation) and the rotation angle has become 20 degrees (angle J22), the third opening / closing member 2340c is placed in the first position state. Furthermore, when 1.1 seconds have passed (3.1 seconds have passed since the start of rotation) and the rotation angle has become 31 degrees (angle J23), the second opening / closing member 2340b is set to the first position state, and 1.1 seconds have passed. The first opening / closing member 2340a is set to the first position when the rotation angle reaches 42 degrees (angle J24) after 4.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of rotation.

  That is, each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d operates in such a manner that the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d are sequentially raised from the fourth opening / closing member 2340d counterclockwise as viewed from above. Further, the operation timing is generated every time the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 11 degrees ((angle J22−angle J21) = (angle J23−angle J22) = (angle J24−angle J23) = 11 degrees). By operating the main body ring portion 2410 to rotate at a constant speed, the operation timing of each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d can be set at equal intervals.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32A and FIG. 33A, by changing the operation mode of the main body ring portion 2410 as shown in the example in which the operation order of the opening and closing members 2340 is reversed in top view. The operation mode of each opening / closing member 2340 can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, the opening / closing member 2340 is moved in the state in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above, based on the positional relationship between the short width surface 2421a and the first opening / closing member 2340a. Although the two-position state and the return to the first position state from the state have been described, the posture of the main body ring portion 2410 that can set the opening / closing member 2340 to the second position state is not limited to this, and at least this posture A posture (posture B, posture C, and posture D, which will be described later) in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated by 90 degrees in a top view from the posture shown in FIG. 31 is also possible.

  Therefore, the order of the operation timing of the opening / closing member 2340 is not limited to that described with reference to FIGS. 32A and 33A. For example, the second opening / closing member 2340b first returns to the first position state. Various aspects (at least six different aspects) can be formed in the present embodiment, such as the aspect of the third opening / closing member 2340c first returning to the first state.

  In addition, the change of each aspect can be easily understood by rereading a structure by the table | surface relationship shown in FIG.32 (b) and FIG.33 (b). FIGS. 32B and 33B are tables illustrating how to replace the configuration of the open / close members 2340a to 2340d. 32 (a) and 33 (b), there is a way to replace the opening / closing member 2340 in order to utilize FIGS. 32 (a) and 33 (b) corresponding to the stop posture of the main body ring portion 2410. Illustrated.

  32 (b) and 33 (b), the main body ring portion 2410 is stopped in the posture B in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the opening / closing member 2340 is in the second position after the rotation, the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from above, for example, so that the leftmost column in the table shown in FIG. The opening / closing member 2340 changes its state in the order described from the top to the bottom (corresponding to FIG. 32A). On the other hand, by rotating the main body ring portion 2410 clockwise, for example, as viewed from above, FIG. The state of the opening / closing member 2340 changes in the order described from the bottom to the top of the leftmost column of the table (corresponding to FIG. 33A). In FIGS. 32B and 33B, the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are abbreviated as a to d.

  In addition, after stopping the main body ring part 2410 in the posture C that is the state in which the main body ring part 2410 is rotated clockwise by 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31, the opening / closing member 2340 is set to the second position state. In this case, the center column of the table shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 33 (b) is associated, and the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 270 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the opening / closing member 2340 is brought into the second position state after the main body ring portion 2410 is stopped in the posture D, the rightmost columns in the tables shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 33 (b) correspond. Thus, FIG. 32A and FIG. 33A illustrating the case where the switching device 2400 is rotated from the posture A can be easily converted when the switching device 2400 is rotated from each posture B to D. it can.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the posture of the main body ring portion 2410 when the opening / closing member 2340 is in the second position state can be selected from at least four ways, and the opening / closing member 2340 in the second position state can be selected. Since the return mode to the 1-position state can be selected from two ways of rotating the main body ring portion 2410 forward or reverse, the return mode of the opening / closing member 2340 is selected from at least eight ways. Can be controlled.

  Thereby, for example, when the return mode of the opening / closing member 2340 is controlled in correspondence with the jackpot expectation level, the jackpot expectation level can be shown in eight stages for the return operation of the opening / closing member 2340. The jackpot expectation is information that is highly noticeable to the player. Since the return operation of the opening / closing member 2340 is an operation that can be visually recognized by the player after the player operates the operation member 310 (see FIG. 5) of the operation device 2300, the operation device 2300 after the operation member 310 is pushed into the operation device 2300. You can improve your attention.

  In addition, when the player keeps his / her hand on the operation member 310, the hand is in the way, and the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2340 is difficult to see (the upper surface which is the push-in portion of the operation member 310 is made of a translucent material. And the player can visually recognize the opening / closing member 2340 through its upper surface). It is possible to suppress a game in which a hand is left on. Therefore, an appropriate operation as instructed can be performed, and the durability of the operation device 2300 can be improved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, in the case where there is a gap between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 420, the case where the opening / closing member 340 rotates as long as the operation member 310 is pressed has been described. The operation device 3300 according to the embodiment can form a case where the opening / closing member 340 rotates and a case where the opening / closing member 340 does not rotate depending on the manner in which the operation member 310 is pushed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 320, the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 340, and the switching device 3400, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a top view of an annular part 3410 and an adjustment step part 3420. In FIG. 34, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  The switching device 3400 includes a main body ring part 3410 that is rotatably supported by the base member 320, an adjustment step part 3420 formed on the upper surface of the main body ring part 3410, and a periphery of the main body ring part 3410. Gear teeth 430 that are formed, a drive motor 490 that generates a driving force transmitted to the main body ring portion 3410 via the gear teeth 430, and a first ring that is disposed on the main body ring portion 3410 and is operatively formed. The first operating device 3440 and the second operating device 3450 that is disposed in the main body ring portion 3410 and can be operated in the reverse mode of the first operating device 3440 like the first operating device 3440 are mainly provided. .

  The main body ring portion 3410 is a pair of first housing portions 3411 disposed on the cutting line θL0, θL2 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top, and a position back from the first housing portion 3411 to the cutting lines θL0, θL2 side. It mainly includes a pair of second accommodating portions 3412 to be disposed. It should be noted that the pair of first housing parts 3411 and the pair of second housing parts 3412 are located at opposite positions (180 ° angular deviation) across the central axis of the main body ring part 3410, like the pair of opening / closing members 340. Arranged).

  The shapes of the main body ring portion 3410 and the adjustment step portion 3420 are substantially the same as the shapes of the main body ring portion 410 and the adjustment step portion 420 in the first embodiment except for the first storage portion 3411 and the second storage portion 3412. The shape is equivalent.

  The first accommodating portion 3411 is a portion that accommodates the first operating device 3440 that is disposed so as to be able to face the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340, and from the upper surface inside the width of the annular portion of the main body annular portion 3410. A receiving recess 3411a that is recessed downward, and a rectangular shape that is vertically long from the receiving recess 3411a toward the outer diameter side, and has a horizontal length shorter than the outer peripheral length of the receiving recess 3411a. The communication hole 3411b is extended in the outer diameter direction of the main body annular portion 3410 along the side surface of the communication hole 3411b, and is bent and formed in an L-shape when viewed from above on the side surrounding the communication hole 3411b at the extended tip. An extended wall portion 3411c, a support convex portion 3411d protruding from the extended wall portion 3411c in a direction along the bending direction of the extended wall portion 3411c, and a lid on the bent side of the extended wall portion 3411c. And a pair of support recesses 3411f formed to be recessed in both directions orthogonal to the extending direction of the extending wall portion 3411c in a top view when the cover member 3411e is assembled. Prepare mainly.

  The housing recess 3411a has a shape surrounded by a pair of arcs around the central axis of the main body ring portion 3410 and a pair of straight lines extending radially from the central axis of the main body ring portion 3410 in a top view. Formed from. Thereby, since the limited area inside the width of the main body ring portion 3410 can be effectively used to secure a large cross-sectional area of the housing recess 3411a, the first motion member 3440 that is the object to be housed can be secured. The cross-sectional area can be increased, and the durability can be improved.

  The housing recess 3411a includes an inclined surface 3411a1 that slopes upward on the side surface on the counterclockwise side when viewed from above (the second housing portion 3412 side). In the present embodiment, when the adjustment arm 345 of the opening / closing member 340 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 3411a (see FIG. 41), thereafter, the main body ring portion 3410 is controlled to rotate clockwise as viewed from above. . As a result, the adjustment arm 345 moves upward along the inclined surface 3411a1, and the opening / closing member 340 can be returned to the first position state.

  In the present embodiment, after the main body ring portion 3410 rotates from the initial position and reaches the posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345 and the first housing portion 3411 are arranged to face each other, the main body ring portion 3410 is exclusively used. Is controlled to rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from above and return to the initial position. As a result, the main body ring portion 3410 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from above, and the adjustment arm portion 345 comes into contact with and breaks the side surface (surface extending in the vertical direction) opposed to the inclined surface 3411a1 of the housing recess 3411a. This can be prevented.

  The second accommodating portion 3412 is a portion that accommodates the second operating device 3450 that is disposed so as to face the adjusting arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340, and has substantially the same cross-sectional shape as the accommodating concave portion 3411 a of the first accommodating portion 3411. And a communication hole 3412b that is formed to penetrate the storage recess 3412a in the same manner as the communication hole 3411b.

  The first operating device 3440 includes an intermediate gear 3441 that is pivotally supported by the support convex portion 3411d of the first housing portion 3411 and gear teeth 3442a that are meshed with the intermediate gear 3441, and a housing recess portion of the first housing portion 3411. 3411a has an engaging member 3442 in which the main body portion 3442b is accommodated and a gear tooth 3443a which is disposed on the opposite side of the engaging member 3442 with the support convex portion 3411d interposed therebetween and meshed with the intermediate gear 3441 and has a support concave portion 3411f. And a contact member 3443 housed in the main body.

  The engaging member 3442 mainly includes the gear teeth 3442a, the main body portion 3442b, and a connecting portion 3442c that connects the gear teeth 3442a and the communication hole 3411b. Here, in accordance with the relationship of the communication hole 3411b with respect to the housing recess 3411a, in comparison with the outer peripheral length of the main body portion 3442b of the engagement member 3442 and the length of the gear teeth 3442a in the same direction in the top view. The length (thickness) in the same direction of 3442c is shortened.

  This prevents the main body portion 3442b and the gear teeth 3442a of the engagement member 3442 from penetrating the communication hole 3411b, so that the engagement member 3442 is positioned in the radial direction of the main body ring portion 3410 with respect to the communication hole 3411b. Can be positioned.

  The contact member 3443 meshes the gear teeth 3443a with the intermediate gear 3441, and a rectangular portion extending in the tooth thickness direction is fitted in the support recess 3411f, so that the contact member 3443 is accurately moved in the vertical direction. It can be arranged to be slidable.

  Note that the engaging member 3442 and the abutting member 3443 are arranged in a positional relationship with the intermediate gear 3441 interposed therebetween, so that when one moves up, the other moves down. Further, as will be described later, the contact member 3443 is disposed at a position where it can contact the operation member 310. Further, since the engaging member 3442 is configured to be heavier than the abutting member 3443, the engaging member 3442 is disposed at the lower end of the movement range in the initial state where the operating member 310 is not operated. The abutting member 3443 is disposed at the upper end of the moving range (see FIG. 40).

  Further, in a state where the engaging member 3442 is disposed at the upper end of the movement range, the upper surface position of the engaging member 3442 is formed in a manner that coincides with the lower end position of the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 in the first position state. The Therefore, when the adjustment arm 345 is pushed up on the upper surface of the engagement member 3442, the state of the opening / closing member 340 is changed to the first position state by the engagement member 3442 moving to the upper end of the movement range.

  The second motion device 3450 is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 3442b of the first motion member 3440 and is housed in the housing recess 3412a of the main body ring portion 3410, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 3451 Are connected in the same manner as the connecting portion 3442c of the first operating member 3440 and are connected to the connecting hole 3411b of the main body ring portion 3410, and the opposite side of the main body portion 3451 through the connecting portion 3452. A contact portion 3453 extending along the radial direction of the main body ring portion 3410 and a spring SP31 disposed between the main body ring portion 3410 below the main body portion 3451 Is mainly provided.

  Note that the abutting portion 3453 is disposed at a position where it can abut on the operation member 310. Further, in a state where the abutting portion 3453 is not pushed in by the operation member 310, the upper surface of the main body portion 3451 is formed in a manner that coincides with the lower end position of the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 in the first position state.

  In the present embodiment, the spring SP31 and the spring SP31 and the spring SP31 and the spring SP31 so as to generate an urging force (elastic force) large enough to push back the opening / closing member 340 to the first position. The spring coefficient of the torsion spring NB1 is set.

  The operation of the switching device 3400 will be described. 37 is a top view of the operation device 3300, and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In FIG. 37, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  In the present embodiment, in the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410, the main body ring portion 3410 is maintained in a posture in which the adjustment arm portions 345 of the pair of opening / closing members 340 face the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 3420.

  37 and 38, the main body ring portion 3410 is rotated from the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410 until the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 3420 faces the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340. The state is shown.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, since a space is made between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 3420 of the opening / closing member 340 in the first position state, by pushing the operation member 310, The opening / closing member 340 rotates. At this time, the pushing mode of the operation member 310 is not limited, and the opening / closing member 340 rotates as long as the clutch member 330 is lowered.

  39 is a top view of the operation device 3300, and FIGS. 40, 41, and 42 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 along the line XL-XL in FIG. In FIG. 39, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  39 to 42, the center position in the circumferential direction of the first operating device 3440 accommodated in the switching device 3400 is opposed to the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 from the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410 (adjustment arm portion). A state in which the main body ring portion 3410 is rotated until it reaches a state in which the center axis of 345 coincides in the vertical direction) is illustrated.

  In FIG. 40, the state before the operation member 310 is pushed is shown in FIG. 41. The operation member 310 is weak (the clutch member 330 is lowered, while the lower end of the operation member 310 is in contact with the contact member 3443 and the first housing. FIG. 42 shows a state where the operation member 310 is pushed in strongly (to the lower end of the movable width).

  As shown in FIG. 40, in a state before the operation member 310 is pushed in, a space is formed between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 3420 of the opening / closing member 340. When the engagement between the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 is released by lowering the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 35).

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the operation member 310 is pressed weakly, the posture of the opening / closing member 340 after the rotating operation is maintained.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, when the operation member 310 is strongly pressed, the inner extending portion 315 of the operation member 310 and the contact member 3443 come into contact with each other, and the contact member 3443 moves downward. The engaging member 3442 moves up. In the process of the ascending operation of the engaging member 3442, the upper surface of the engaging member 3442 and the adjustment arm 345 come into contact with each other, the opening / closing member 340 rotates, and the opening / closing member 340 changes to the first position state.

  That is, when the main body ring portion 3410 is in the posture shown in FIG. 39, the operation mode of the subsequent opening / closing member 340 can be changed depending on whether the operation member 310 is pressed weakly or strongly. By utilizing this change in the operation mode, the player can easily operate the operation member 310 in an appropriate operation mode.

  For example, in a gaming machine that produces an effect that the big hit expectation is high when the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by a pressing operation of the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by pushing the operation member 310 as instructed. It is possible to add the playability that can be done.

  That is, for example, an effect method of instructing the player how to press the operation member 310 by displaying “weakly pressed” on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is exemplified. . In this case, if the operating member 310 is pressed weakly as instructed, the opening / closing member 340 rotates (see FIG. 41), and if the operating member 310 is pressed strongly against the instruction, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 340 is the first operating device. 3440 (returns to the first position state). Therefore, it is possible to direct a player who wants to know whether or not the expectation degree of jackpot is high to push the operation member 310 weakly.

  43 is a top view of the operation device 3300, and FIGS. 44, 45, and 46 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 along the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. In FIG. 43, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  43 to 46, the center position in the circumferential direction of the second motion device 3450 accommodated in the switching device 3400 is opposed to the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 from the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410 (adjustment arm portion). A state in which the main body ring portion 3410 is rotated until it reaches a state in which the center axis of 345 coincides in the vertical direction) is illustrated.

  44, the state before the operation member 310 is pushed is shown in FIG. 45, and the operation member 310 is weak (the clutch member 330 is lowered, while the lower end of the operation member 310 is in contact with the contact member 3443 and the first housing). FIG. 46 shows a state where the operation member 310 is pushed in strongly (to the lower end of the movable width).

  As shown in FIG. 44, in a state before the operation member 310 is pushed in, the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 and the adjustment step portion 3420 (the upper surface of the second operation device 3450) are in contact with each other. Even if the opening / closing member 340 is moved downward by the pushing operation to release the engagement between the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 and the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 35), As long as the operation member 310 is operated weakly, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state by the biasing force of the spring SP31 (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the operation member 310 is pressed strongly, the inner extension portion 315 and the contact portion 3453 of the operation member 310 are in contact with each other, and then facing the biasing force of the spring SP31. When the force is applied, the abutting portion 3453 and the main body portion 3451 are moved downward. Thereby, a clearance gap is formed between the adjustment arm part 345 and the contact part 3453, and the opening / closing member 340 rotates in a manner to fill the clearance. When the load on the operation member 310 is released, the second operation device 3450 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring SP31, and the opening / closing member 340 is moved to the main body portion 3451 of the second operation device 3450 in the first position state. To change.

  That is, when the main body ring portion 3410 is in the posture shown in FIG. 43, the operation mode of the subsequent opening / closing member 340 can be changed depending on whether the operation member 310 is pressed weakly or strongly. By utilizing this change in the operation mode, the player can easily operate the operation member 310 in an appropriate operation mode.

  For example, in a gaming machine that produces an effect that the big hit expectation is high when the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by a pressing operation of the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by pushing the operation member 310 as instructed. It is possible to add the playability that can be done.

  That is, for example, an effect method of instructing the player how to press the operation member 310 by displaying “strong press” on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is exemplified. . In this case, if the operating member 310 is pressed strongly according to the instruction, the opening / closing member 340 rotates (see FIG. 46). If the operating member 310 is pressed weakly against the instruction, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 340 is performed by the second operating device. 3450 is suppressed (maintained in the first position state). Therefore, the player who wants to know whether or not the jackpot expectation is high can be directed to push the operation member 310 strongly.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the opening / closing member 340 rotates when pressed weakly while the opening / closing member 340 does not rotate when pressed hard, and the opening / closing member 340 does not rotate when pressed weakly when pressed hard. The state in which the opening / closing member 340 is rotated can be formed by changing the posture of the main body ring portion 3410 in advance by the drive motor 490.

  Thereby, by fixing the operation mode instructed to the player, it is possible to prevent the player's operation from becoming ruined, and to change the variation of the operation mode by the single drive motor 490. it can.

  Further, when the operation mode of the operation member 310 is detected and the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is changed (for example, a drive motor for operating the opening / closing member 340 is provided, and driving and stopping are performed depending on a difference in operation mode of the operation member 310 The number of sensors that detect whether or not the operation member 310 is pushed in at the position of the operation member 310 can be reduced (single) compared to the case of switching), and the opening / closing member 340 and each of the operating devices 3440 and 3450 can be reduced. Since the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is switched by contact, the sense of unity of the operation of the operation member 310 and the opening / closing member 340 can be increased, and the reliability of the operation of the opening / closing member 340 can be increased.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the switching device 3400 is in a predetermined posture, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is changed depending on whether the operation member 310 is operated by “weakly pressing” or “strongly pressing”. It is configured to be possible, and it is not necessary to detect whether the operation member 310 is operated by “weakly press” or “strongly press”. Therefore, a drive motor for operating the opening / closing member 340 is provided, and the number of sensors for detecting the position of the operation member 310 is reduced as compared with a case where driving and stopping are switched depending on the operation mode of the operation member 310. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the boundary between “weak press” and “strong press” can be determined as a change in the load felt by the player. That is, the range of “weak press” described above is a range in which the operation member 310 does not contact the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device 3450, and the operation member 310 has the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device 3450. No load from device 3450.

  On the other hand, the range of “strong pressing” described above is a range where the operation member 310 is in contact with the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device 3450, and the operation member 310 is in the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device. An upward load is received from device 3450. Therefore, the player can determine the position where the upward load applied to the operation member 310 starts to increase (position where the increase width starts to change) as the boundary between “weakly pressed” and “strongly pressed”.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the player is operating the operation member 310 by “weakly pressing” or “strongly pressing”, the player is able to perform an intuitive operation. Can be done.

  The movement trajectories of the contact member 3443 of the first motion device 3440 and the contact portion 3453 of the second motion device 3450, which are parts that apply a load to the operation member 310, are circular with the rotation axis of the main body ring portion 3410 as the center. Configure. Therefore, when the rotation axis of the main body ring portion 3410 coincides with the center of the protruding portion 312 of the operation member 310 (see FIG. 38), the inner extension portion of the operation member 310 depends on the posture of the main body ring portion 3410. There is no change in the manner of contact between 315 and the contact member 3443 and the contact portion 3453 (whether contact is made or not).

  Therefore, the upward load (reaction force felt by the player) applied to the operation member 310 from the first operation member 3440 and the second operation member 3450 does not depend on the posture of the main body ring portion 3410, and the push-in depth of the operation member 310 is increased. Therefore, the player cannot determine the posture of the main body ring portion 3410 due to the difference in the upward load applied to the operation member 310.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the posture of the main body ring portion 3410 from being determined based on the feeling when operating the operation member 310, and the player can be directed to visually recognize the opening / closing member 340. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the state inside (opening / closing member 340 disposed in) the operation device 3300.

  In the present embodiment, the return operation of the opening / closing member 340 (the operation of returning to the first position state) is performed by driving the switching device 3400 so that it is independent of the player's operation. For example, the opening / closing member 340 can be returned to the first position state by rotating the main body ring portion 3410 at most once. Thereby, regardless of whether or not the player operates the operation member 310 in the state shown in FIG. 39 or FIG. 43, the opening / closing member 340 inside the operation device 3300 is returned to the first position state (see FIG. 34). (Maintain).

  When the main body ring portion 3410 is in an intermediate position between the state shown in FIG. 39 and the state shown in FIG. 43, the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 3420 is disposed to face the adjustment arm portion 345, so that the opening / closing member The rotation of 340 is suppressed. Therefore, as a preliminary arrangement of the state shown in FIG. 39 or the state shown in FIG. 43, the main body ring portion 3410 is set to an intermediate posture between the state shown in FIG. 39 and the state shown in FIG. It can be prevented that the annular portion 3410 is in the state shown in FIG. 39 or is in the state shown in FIG. 43 from the operating sound of the drive motor 490. Thereby, attention to the operation device 3300 can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 3411a1 of the first housing portion 3411 is disposed on the side close to the second housing portion 3412, the main body ring portion 3410 is in the state shown in FIG. 39 and the state shown in FIG. Can be operated from a posture in which the first housing portion 3411 and the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 are arranged to face each other (rotating operation counterclockwise when viewed from above). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotation direction of the main body ring part 3410 from being limited.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 59. In the first embodiment, the case where the biasing force applied to the opening / closing member 340 of the operation device 300 is directed in the direction in which the opening / closing member 340 is tilted is described. However, in the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment, the opening / closing member 4340 is raised. Biased in the direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  47 is a top view of the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 taken along the line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. In FIG. 47, the outer wall member 4301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 4310 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 47, the first state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated, and in FIG. 48, the first position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated. In FIG. 48, the second return member 4540 (the portion protruding from the first return member 4530) is not shown.

  Note that the description of the first state of the switching device 4500 represents one arrangement of the slide member 4520 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340. Here, in the first state, the slide member 4520 is configured such that the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530 are opposed to each other.

  The operation device 4300 has a function of giving an effect to the operation device 4300 itself by visually recognizing a part of the internal mechanism. The operation device 4300 is formed with an opening 301a at the center of the bottom of the inverted cup and is also a front surface. Formed from an outer wall member 4301 fixed to the front frame 14 in such a manner that an operating device such as the switching device 4500 is accommodated between the frame 14 (see FIG. 5) and a shape in which the width in the height direction of the outer wall member 4301 is shortened. And an opening 302a that is coaxial with the opening 301a and has a slightly larger diameter at the center of the bottom, and is overlapped and fixed in such a manner that an internal space is formed between the outer wall member 4301 and the openings 301a and 302a. A dish-shaped member made of a light-transmitting material, the member of which movement is restricted by an internal space formed by the outer wall member 4301 and the overlapping member 302. An operation member 4310, a pair of opening / closing members 4340 supported by the outer wall member 4301 and configured to be tiltable in conjunction with the operation amount of the operation member 4310, and disposed below the opening / closing member 4340, and the opening / closing member 4340 A switching device 4500 configured to be able to switch between a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is urged by abutting and a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is not in contact with the opening / closing member 4340, and a drive gear 4591 for operating the switching device 4500. And a drive motor 4590 for generating a drive force.

  The outer wall member 4301 extends in the front-rear direction from the position that intersects the straight line extending in the front-rear direction passing through the center of the opening 301 a in the inner surface of the opening 301 a, the recessed portion 301 b, and the opening 301 a toward the center of the opening 301 a. A pair of extending support arms 4301c and an inner surface of the opening 301a, extending from the position intersecting with a straight line passing through the center of the opening 301a and extending in the left-right direction toward the center of the opening 301a. And an anti-tilt arm portion 4301d.

  The recessed portion 301b is arranged so as to overlap the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 4310 in the vertical direction, and houses the lower end portion of the spring SP1 that returns the operation member 4310 upward (see FIG. 48).

  The support arm portion 4301c extends downward from the side surface of the opening 301a, and is formed in a bifurcated shape that sandwiches the opening / closing member 4340 from the left and right at the extending tip, and the opening / closing member 4340 is pivoted at the extending tip. It is comprised in the aspect which supports the column-shaped axial part 4301c1 to support.

  The tilt prevention arm portion 4301d contacts the inner side surfaces of the pair of opening / closing members 4340 in the first position state (see FIG. 48). Therefore, since the rotation of the opening / closing member 4340 is restricted by the tilt prevention arm portion 4301d, the posture of the opening / closing member 4340 after the return operation can be stabilized.

  The operation member 4310 differs from the operation member 310 of the first embodiment only in the lower surface shape of the upper bottom portion and the lower end shape of the main body portion 311. That is, the operation member 4310 is swelled on the lower surface of the upper bottom portion of the operation member 4310 so that the operation member 4310 can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member 4340 when the main body portion 311, the outer extending portion 313, and the operation member 4310 are pushed. And an output part 4312.

  The bulging portion 4312 has a substantially conical shape whose lower surface is inclined upward with increasing distance from the central axis, with the lower end being a portion disposed on the central axis of the main body 311. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, it is set as the aspect which the degree of a raise inclination becomes low, so that it distances from a central axis.

  The opening / closing member 4340 is a long member that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 4301c1 of the support arm portion 4301c, and has the same configuration as the opening / closing member 340 of the first embodiment. That is, the opening / closing member 4340 includes a main body plate portion 341 formed in a long plate shape when viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 48), a support hole 342, and a convex receiving portion 344 (see FIG. 8). The extension part 4343 extending along the front-rear direction toward the other opening / closing member 4340 at the upper end part of the main body plate part 341, and the side facing the tilt prevention arm part 4301d at the lower end part of the main body plate part 341 And an urging force that is wound around the shaft portion 4301c1 and is locked by the convex receiving portion 344 to rotate the opening / closing member 4340 to the inward side position. And a generated torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8).

  Note that the direction of the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 in the present embodiment is the opposite direction of the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 in the first embodiment. That is, in the state of FIG. 48, the opening / closing member 4340 is pressed against the tilt prevention arm portion 4301d by the biasing force of the spring NB1, and the rotation is restricted by the tilt prevention arm portion 4301d.

  The extended portion 4343 includes a chamfered portion 4343a that is a portion that comes into contact with the lower surface of the upper bottom portion of the operation member 4310 and is chamfered at an upper portion of the extended tip (a portion that comes into contact with the central portion of the bulging portion 4312). The chamfered portion 4343a can prevent the tip of the bulging portion 4312 from contacting the extended portion 4343 at a point, and even if the tip of the bulging portion 4312 is sharply configured, the bulging portion Damage to the tip of 4312 can be suppressed.

  The adjustment arm portion 4345 mainly includes a contact surface 4345a disposed on the lower surface of the extended distal end portion and a rotation restricting surface 4345b intersecting with the extending direction.

  The contact surface 4345a is a surface that contacts the return members 4530 and 4540 of the switching device 4500 and presses the return members 4530 and 4540 by the rotation of the opening and closing member 4340.

  The rotation restricting surface 4345b is a surface constituted by a curved shape that is recessed toward the shaft portion 4301c1 side. In the second position state shown in FIG. 54, the first return member 4530 of the switching device 4500 has a shape that matches the arc shape centered on the pivot center J41.

  Next, the switching device 4500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. In the description of the switching device 4500, FIGS. 47 and 48 are referred to as appropriate. 49A is a side view of the switching device 4500, and FIG. 49B is a top view of the switching device 4500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIXb in FIG. 49A. In FIG. 49, illustration of the drive motor 4590, the drive gear 4591, and the base member 4510 is omitted.

  50 (a) is a front view of one first return member 4530, and FIG. 50 (b) is a top view of the first return member 4530 as viewed in the direction of arrow Lb in FIG. 50 (a). 50 (c) is a side view of the first return member 4530 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Lc in FIG. 50 (a). 51 (a) is a front view of one second return member 4540, and FIG. 51 (b) is a top view of the second return member 4540 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIb in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 51C is a side view of the second return member 4540 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIc in FIG.

  The switching device 4500 includes a base member 4510 having a slide rail 4511 extending to the left and right, a slide member 4520 disposed on the base member 4510 in a state operable along the slide rail 4511, and the slide member 4520. A plurality of return members 4530 and 4540 that are pivotally supported by a support member 4523 disposed on the upper surface, a drive motor 4590, and a drive gear 4591 are mainly provided.

  The slide rail 4511 is formed from the same cross-sectional shape in the left-right direction. Therefore, by inserting the slide member 4520 into the slide rail 4511 from the left and right directions, the slide member 4520 can be coupled to the slide rail 4511 in a slidable state.

  The slide member 4520 includes a main body plate portion 4521 formed from a plate-like member having a rectangular shape when viewed from above, gear teeth 4522 engraved on the front side surface of the main body plate portion 4521, and each corner near the upper surface of the main body plate portion 4521. And a support member 4523 provided in parallel at a position.

  As for the main body plate part 4521, a dent directed inward from the front and rear side surfaces is provided in the left-right direction, and the recessed part is fitted to the slide rail 4511. The gear teeth 4522 mesh with the drive gear 4591 (see FIG. 47), and the slide member 4520 operates in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 47) in conjunction with the operation of the drive motor 4590.

  Each pair of support members 4523 mainly includes a support hole 4523a formed coaxially in the left-right direction and a shaft member 4523b inserted and fixed in the support hole 4523a.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the first return member 4530 is formed of a long rectangular plate shape, and a main body portion 4531 in which a through hole that is pivotally supported by the shaft member 4523b is formed at the end, and the main body portion. A rotation restricting portion 4532 extending along the radial direction of the through hole from the end portion on the side where the through hole 4531 is formed, and the main body portion at the end opposite to the side where the rotation restricting portion 4532 is formed And an inclined surface portion 4533 formed at 4531.

  The main body 4531 is provided with an arc-shaped curved surface 4531a centered on the pivot support center J41 at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end.

  The rotation restricting portion 4532 is inclined and extended with respect to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 4531. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is formed at about 50 degrees.

  The inclined surface portion 4533 prevents the first return member 4530 and the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 from colliding with each other on the surfaces orthogonal to the operation direction and being damaged when the slide member 4520 slides. The inclined surface is formed at least from the end of the main body 4531 so as to contact the adjusting arm 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the second return member 4540 is formed of a long rectangular plate shape, and has a main body portion 4541 in which a through hole that is pivotally supported by the shaft member 4523b is formed at the end portion, and the main body portion. The rotation restricting portion 4542 extending along the radial direction of the through hole from the end portion on the side where the through hole of 4541 is formed, and the main body portion at the end opposite to the side where the rotation restricting portion 4542 is formed And an inclined surface portion 4543 formed on the main surface 4541.

  The main body portion 4541 is formed in a shape extending in a long direction to the opposite side of the main body portion 4531 of the first return member 4530 and the end portion is formed in a planar shape orthogonal to the longitudinal direction.

  The rotation restricting portion 4542 is inclined and extended with respect to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 4541. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is formed at about 50 degrees.

  The inclined surface portion 4543 prevents the second return member 4540 and the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 from colliding with each other at the surfaces orthogonal to the operation direction and being damaged when the slide member 4520 slides. The inclined surface is formed at least from the end portion of the main body portion 4541 so as to be in contact with the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340.

  A torsion spring NB4 is wound around the shaft member 4523b, and the return members 4530 and 4540 are urged in the direction in which the distal ends of the main body portions 4531 and 4541 are raised upward. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the rotation restricting portions 4532 and 4542 function as detents for the return members 4530 and 4540.

  Next, the function of the switching device 4500 when the switching device 4500 forms the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. 52 to 54 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. 52 illustrates a state in which the operation member 4310 is pushed down halfway, FIG. 53 illustrates a state immediately after the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the lower end position of the moving range, and FIG. The state in which the operating member 4310 is raised from the state of FIG. 53 and returned to the upper end position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52, when the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the extent that it does not reach the lower end position of the movement range, the first on the movement locus of the contact surface 4345a of the opening / closing member 4340 that is pushed and expanded by the bulging portion 4312. The main body portion 4531 of the return member 4530 is disposed, and the first return member 4530 is formed so as to tilt against the urging force of the torsion spring NB4 as the operation amount of the opening / closing member 4340 increases.

  Therefore, the reaction force applied from the operation device 4300 to the player who pushes in the operation member 4310 is urged by the reaction force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8) that urges the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530. This is a combined force of the reaction force of the torsion spring NB4. Therefore, the reaction force felt by the player increases as the amount of pushing the operation member 4310 downward increases.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the lower end of the movement range, the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed outside the movement locus of the first return member 4530. Therefore, since the load applied to the first return member 4530 by the opening / closing member 4340 is eliminated (because only the frictional force is applied to the curved surface 4531a), the first return member 4530 is raised and operated by the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 (FIG. 54).

  Therefore, the reaction force applied from the operation device 4300 to the player who pushes the operation member 4310 is greatly changed immediately after the operation member 4310 is pushed to the lower end of the movement range. That is, the urging force of the torsion spring NB4 that urges the first return member 4530 is not given to the player.

  Thereby, the reaction force felt by the player is immediately reduced. Therefore, in the process of operating the operation member 4310 to the lower end of the movement range, the reaction force felt by the player changes in a manner that decreases immediately after reaching the lower end after increasing as the operation amount increases.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the first return member 4530 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340, and the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 applied to the first return member 4530 via the opening / closing member 4340 is increased. Since the rotation restricting portion 4532 of the first return member 4530 is directed in the direction in which the rotation restricting portion 4532 is pressed against the slide member 4520 (the direction in which the rotation is restricted), the return of the opening / closing member 4340 is prevented. Therefore, even after the operation member 4310 is raised after FIG. 53, the opening / closing member 4340 can be maintained in the second position state.

  In this case, since the opening / closing member 4340 and the operation member 4310 do not come into contact with each other when the operation member 4310 moves upward, the biasing force of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 is applied to the operation member 4310 via the opening / closing member 4340 ( Compared to FIG. 58), the return speed of the operation member 4310 can be reduced (the return is delayed).

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the player that the switching device 4500 is in the first state by three different means. That is, the reaction force decreases immediately after the operating member 4310 is pushed to the lower end of the movement range (tactile sense), and the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state even after the player releases the hand from the operating member 4310. (Visual), and that the return operation of the operation member 4310 is slow (visual or tactile sense (operation waiting time)).

  The reason that the tactile notification indicates that the return operation of the operation member 4310 is slow is that the speed of the operation member 4310 is a measure of the continuous hit speed when the player performs the continuous hit operation. That is, in the continuous hitting operation, the player only performs an operation of pushing the operating member 4310 in one direction. However, before the player operates, the operating member 4310 is moved to the initial position (the upper position of the moving range of the operating member 4310). For the first time, the same pushing operation can be continuously performed.

  Therefore, if the return speed of the operation member 4310 is slow, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed at a certain interval (time interval until the operation member 4310 returns to the initial position), the operation member 4310 is pushed at the timing of pushing. Is not returned to the initial position, and it is possible to feel a sense of discomfort tactilely to a player who tries to operate the operation member 4310 repeatedly.

  In this way, by performing a plurality of different notifications, even if the player is not aware of any of the notifications, it is possible to leave the possibility of the player noticing with other notifications, so the switching device The possibility that the player misses that the 4500 is in the first state can be reduced.

  In addition, these notifications are notification methods that are easy for a player who operates the operation device 4300 to recognize, while other players are difficult to recognize, for example, compared to notification by sound, lighting, vibration, or the like. . Therefore, for example, when control is performed to set the switching device 4500 to the first state in a state where the jackpot is confirmed, if the above-described notification can be noticed, the jackpot is confirmed before the jackpot effect is started. Since only the operated player can recognize it, the player can be directed to operate the operation device 4300.

  In the state shown in FIG. 54, even if the operation member 4310 is pushed in, the movement range of the operation member 4310 is limited to the position where the operation member 4310 starts to contact the opening / closing member 4340 (see FIG. 53). Thereby, since the load given to the opening / closing member 4340 from the operation member 4310 can be minimized when the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state, for example, the player is not aware of the notification, and the operation member 4310 Even when the operation is continued, the operation member 4310 or the opening / closing member 4340 can be prevented from being damaged by a load generated between the opening / closing member 4340 and the operation member 4310.

  Next, the state of the switching device 4500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIG. 47 is referred to as appropriate. 55 and 56 are top views of the operation device 4300. FIG. 55 and 56, the outer wall member 4301 and the overlapping member 302 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the operation member 4310 is not illustrated. Also, in FIG. 55, the second state of the switching device 4500 in which the slide member 4520 is disposed at a position where the opening / closing member 4340 does not face any of the return members 4530, 4540 is shown, and the opening / closing member 4340 in the second position state is shown. Illustrated by an imaginary line, FIG. 56 illustrates a third state of the switching device 4500 in which the slide member 4520 is disposed at a position where the opening / closing member 4340 faces the second return member 4540.

  When the slide member 4520 is slid from the state shown in FIG. 54 to the second state shown in FIG. 55, the left-right position of the first return member 4530 is shifted from the left-right direction position of the opening / closing member 4340. The load applied to the opening / closing member 4340 from the member 4530 is released, and the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the first position state.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the second state of the switching device 4500, no reaction force is generated from the switching device 4500 to the opening / closing member 4340. Therefore, compared to the first state and the third state of the switching device 4500, the reaction force applied through the operation member 4310 to the player who operates the operation member 4310 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the third state of the switching device 4500, the horizontal position of the opening / closing member 4340 and the horizontal position of the second return member 4540 are the same. Even when the slide member 4520 is slid in a state where the operation member 4310 is pushed in (when the open / close member 4340 is moved from the first position state), the side surface of the open / close member 4340 is not 2 Since the inclined surface portion 4543 of the return member 4540 contacts and the second return member 4540 is pushed down below the opening / closing member 4340, the second return is achieved by operating the slide member 4520 while operating the operation member 4310. The problem that the member 4540 is damaged can be prevented. Accordingly, the slide member 4520 can be slid at an arbitrary timing.

  57 and 58 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 57 illustrates a state where the operation member 4310 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range, and FIG. 58 illustrates a state where the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the lower end position of the movement range.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, even when the slide member 4520 is in the third state, the urging force of the torsion spring NB4 is applied to the reaction force applied to the player by the pushing operation of the operation member 4310. No change occurs when 4520 is in the first state.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 4520 is in the third state, as shown in FIG. 58, the adjustment of the opening / closing member 4340 on the movement locus of the second return member 4540 is performed even when the operation member 4310 is pushed to the lower end position of the movement range. An arm portion 4345 is disposed. Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 transmitted to the opening / closing member 4340 via the second return member 4540 is continuously applied to the opening / closing member 4340.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a time change of reaction force applied to the player who has pushed the operation member 4310 in the present embodiment. 59, the first state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated by a solid line, the second state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated by a broken line, and the third state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line. The In order to facilitate understanding, the solid line and the alternate long and short dash line are described in parallel with a slight distance as long as the solid line and the alternate long and short dash line overlap each other.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the switching device 4500 is in the third state, the reaction force applied to the player increases to the end and does not decrease halfway, while the switching device 4500 is in the first state. In the case of the state, the reaction force applied to the player is reduced on the way, and the reduced reaction force is maintained.

  In addition, when the switching device 4500 is set to the second state, the increase in the reaction force applied to the player is reduced compared to the first state and the third state, but the operation member 4310 is within the movement range. The reaction force in the state arranged at the lower end is the same in the first state and the second state.

  Therefore, for example, the player can operate the operation member 4310 by informing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) that the “push button is pressed. Can be directed to. That is, by making it possible for the player to grasp the jackpot expectation degree from information that only the operating person can grasp, such as increase or decrease of reaction force, it is possible to give the player a special feeling that only the player can know the result. Therefore, normally, a player who does not push in and operate the operation member 4310 from troublesomeness can enjoy and operate the operation member 4310. In addition, since the operation of gradually pushing in the operation member 4310 is more sensitive to the reaction force change than the operation of hitting the operation member 4310, the operation of hitting the operation member 4310 by the player can be suppressed, and the operation device 4300 can be suppressed. The durability of can be improved.

  In addition, for example, the player can notify the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) that “push down the button. If the reaction force is always smaller, the chance !?” for the same reason as described above. The operating member 4310 can be directed to operate. In this case, in the gameability in which it is advantageous for the player if the reaction force is lower than that in the third state, the change mode of the reaction force when the reaction force applied to the player is finally lower than that in the third state. Two patterns of the first state and the second state can be prepared.

  Accordingly, while the operation member 4310 is being operated, the reaction force is the same as in the third state, but the reaction force is reduced by completing the operation of the operation member 4310 to the lower end of the movement range, and the player's interest The player can grasp that the reaction force is low immediately after the start of the push-in operation of the operation member 4310, and improve the player's interest during the push-in operation. The mode of the reaction force that is advantageous to the player can be switched between the case (second state) and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the operation of the operation member 4310.

  In the present embodiment, when the push-in is notified, the switching device 4500 is set to the first state or the third state with a high probability (99% or more), and the second state is rarely entered. Controlled. As a result, in most cases, it is possible to direct the player to push the operation member 4310 to the lower end position (to the end) and to make the player accustomed to the reaction force in the first state and the third state. Even if the reaction force applied to the player via the member 4310 changes slightly (change due to the second state), the player can easily notice the change.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state even when the operation member 310 is pushed in the initial state of the main body ring portion 410, and the operation of the opening / closing member 340 accompanying the subsequent operation of the operation member 310 is performed. As described above, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment changes the state of the opening / closing member 340 by operating the operation member 310 in the initial state of the main body ring portion 410. The opening / closing member 340 operates in an operation mode different from the case where the operation member 310 is not operated in the initial state of the main body ring portion 410. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 61 is an exploded front perspective view of the switching device 5400. In FIG. 60, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. In FIG. 60, the main body ring portion 5410 is shown in an initial state. In FIG. 61, the drive motor 4590 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the operation device 5300 has the same configuration as the operation device 300 except that a switching device 5400 described below is incorporated instead of the switching device 400 of the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. Prepare.

  Note that the switching device 5400 is configured so that the height of each surface 421 to 423 of the adjustment step portion 5420, the position of switching between the surfaces 421 to 423, and the like are the first when no external force is applied (see FIG. 60). This is the same as the adjustment step 420 in the embodiment. Accordingly, as described in the first embodiment, the first operation is performed by pushing the operating member 310 in a state where the main body ring portion 5410 is stopped in a posture corresponding to the first effect state (see FIG. 18) or the like. The opening / closing member 340 can be made to perform the same operation as that described in the embodiment.

  On the other hand, the switching device 5400 operates relative to the main body ring portion 5410 when an external force is applied, and is divided between the opening / closing member 340 and the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 5420. Members 5450 and 5460 are provided.

  The switching device 5400 is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body portion 321 of the base member 320, so that the periphery of the base member 320 can be relatively rotated, and a donut-shaped main body ring portion 5410 in a top view is formed. And an adjustment step portion 5420 that is formed on the upper surface of the main body ring portion 5410 and stops the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 by contact with the adjustment arm portion 345, and has the same function as the adjustment step portion 5420. However, the first divided ring member 5450 that moves relative to the main body ring portion 5410 in accordance with the rotation of the main body ring portion 5410, and a similar function that is configured in a similar shape to the first divided ring member 5450. A second split ring member 5460 having gears, gear teeth 430 engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body ring portion 5410 in the circumferential direction, and a drive gear 491 meshed with the gear teeth 430. A driving motor 490 to be driven, mainly comprises.

  The main body ring portion 5410 includes a recessed portion 5411 that is recessed in the circumferential direction with respect to the shape of the main body ring portion 410 in the first embodiment for the purpose of accommodating the divided members 5450 and 5460, and the recessed portion. An inclined surface 5412 that is formed so as to be inclined to rise toward the side where the recessed depth increases on the circumferential side surface of the plate portion that covers 5411 from above, and a radially outer side in the vicinity of the outermost diameter portion of the main body ring portion 5410 Detected member 5413 that is housed in a projecting manner, and protrudes outwardly from the outermost diameter portion of main body ring portion 5410 below concave portion 5411 in the vicinity of the base position of detected member 5413. The locking projection 5414 is mainly provided.

  In the recessed portion 5411, the recessed depth at the center of the radial thickness of the main body ring portion 5410 is reduced, and the recessed depth at both ends is increased. Further, the recessed portions at both ends are formed such that the radial side wall has an arc shape centering on the central axis of the main body ring portion 5410.

  By inserting the main body plate portion 5451 and the extended support portion 5453 of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 into the recessed portion 5411 formed in this way, the initial state of the main body annular portion 5410 (see FIG. 60). Is formed. Even when the split ring members 5450 and 5460 protrude from the main body ring portion 5410, the split ring members 5450 and 5460 are disposed on the main body ring portion 5410 in a top view.

  The member to be detected 5413 is disposed at a position opposite to each other (a position shifted by 180 degrees) below each of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460.

  The adjustment step portion 5420 is configured in such a manner that the height of the upper side surface changes for each angular position (phase) with respect to the axis center when the main body ring portion 5410 is viewed in the rotation axis direction. Therefore, the position at which the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 stops depends on which surface of the adjustment step portion 5420 the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts. As will be described later, the upper surfaces of the first divided annular member 5450 and the second divided annular member 5460 have the same functions as the adjustment step portion 5420.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the adjustment step portion 5420 has a first surface 421 whose upper surface is the highest step h <b> 0 and a middle step h <b> 1 that is one step lower than the first surface 421. 2 surface 422, the 3rd surface 423 used as the lowest low step h2, and each connection surface which connects the circumferential direction edge parts of each of these surfaces is mainly provided (the high step h0, the middle step h1, and the low step). For h2, see FIG.

  The first divided annular member 5450 includes a main body plate portion 5451 housed in the recessed portion 5411, a bulky portion 5452 formed to increase from the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451, and a main body plate portion 5451. A pair of extended support portions 5453 that are curved and extended along the radius of curvature of the side surface in the radial direction of the main body plate portion 5451 from the radial end portion of the main plate portion 5451, and the outermost portion on the root side of the main body plate portion 5451 An adjustment portion 5454 extending downward from the diameter portion, and one end of the adjustment portion 5454 is fixed to the adjustment portion 5454 and the other end is fixed to the main body ring portion 5410. And a coil spring SP51 that urges toward the main.

  The main body plate portion 5451 and the bulking portion 5252 are formed of curved noodles whose radial side faces are located on the inner side surface and the outer side surface of the main body ring portion 5410, and the first divided annular member 5450 is formed in the recessed portion 5411. In the accommodated state (see FIG. 60), the tip end portion is formed at the same inclination angle as the connecting portion of the adjustment step portion 5420 and is provided with an inclined surface 5451a that is smoothly connected.

  The bulking portion 5452 is formed on the upper surface of the contact surface 5452a which is a flat surface which is formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 5451a and which is inclined upward as it approaches the inclined surface 5451a along the circumferential direction of the main body annular portion 5410. And a smooth upper surface 5452b.

  The abutting surface 5452 a is a surface that is disposed to face the inclined surface 5412 in the housing of the first divided annular member 5450. As shown in FIG. 60, the inclined surface 5412 rises and tilts away from the contact surface 5452a, so that a recess is formed between the contact surface 5452a and the inclined surface 5412.

  In the smooth upper surface 5452b, the arrangement of the main body ring portion 5410 in the axial direction is the same as that of the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 5420. Therefore, even if the player pushes the operation member 310 (see FIG. 6) in a state where the main body ring portion 5410 rotates and the adjustment arm portion 345 is disposed to face the smooth upper surface 5452b, the opening / closing member 340 is not rotated. The opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state by being restricted by the smooth upper surface 5452b.

  The extension support portion 5453 is formed such that the upper and lower thicknesses are slightly shorter than the vertical length of the gap of the recess portion 5411, and the radial thickness of the extension support portion 5453 is the both end portions in the radial direction of the recess portion 5411. It is made slightly thinner than the thickness of the recessed portion.

  Accordingly, the extended support portion 5453 is positioned in the radial direction and the axial direction of the main body ring portion 5410 with respect to the recessed portion 5411 and is supported so as to be relatively movable in the circumferential direction.

  The adjustment portion 5454 is a portion that regulates the operation of the first divided annular member 5450 by abutting with the locking convex portion 5414 of the main body annular portion 5410.

  In the second divided annular member 5460, the upper end portion of the increased portion 5462 is not formed as a surface like the increased portion 5452 of the first divided annular member 5450, but is formed as a raised upper side 5462b composed of sides. Except for this, the first split annular member 5450 has the same configuration. Accordingly, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

  The push-up upper side 5462b is arranged in the same manner as the first surface 421 of the adjustment step part 5420 in the axial arrangement of the main body ring part 5410. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 340 is in the second position state (see FIG. 13), and then the main body ring portion 5410 is rotated, the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 is pushed up and rides on the upper side 5462b. The opening / closing member 340 can be in the first position state.

  62 (a) and 62 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the main body ring portion 5410 along the line LXIIa-LXIIa in FIG. 62A shows a state in which the tip of the member to be detected 5413 is housed inside the outermost diameter portion of the main body ring portion 5410. FIG. 62B shows the state of the member to be detected 5413. A state in which the tip protrudes outward from the outermost diameter portion of the main body ring portion 5410 is illustrated. 62A shows the adjusting portion 5454 of each of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 in the accommodated state (see FIG. 60). In FIG. 62B, the adjusting portion 5454 is formed on the locking convex portion 5414. The abutted state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the detected member 5413 is rotatably supported by a shaft rod disposed on the main body ring portion 5410, and the main body ring is rotated by a torsion spring NB51. The portion 5410 is biased outward in the radial direction. For example, when the first divided annular member 5450 is in the accommodated state, it is returned radially inward by the adjusting portion 5454 (see FIG. 62A), but the first divided annular member 5450 is out of the accommodated state. When the adjusting portion 5454 is moved close to the shaft rod of the detected member 5413, the tip end portion of the detected member 5413 projects outward in the radial direction of the main body ring portion 5410 (see FIG. 62B).

  Thereby, by detecting the arrangement of the detected member 5413, it is possible to determine whether or not the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 are moving relative to the main body annular portion 5410. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the detected member 5413 is detected by a sensor KC51 described later.

  With reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, an operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410 will be described. 63 and 64 are top views of the operation device 5300, and FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line LXV-LXV in FIG. 63 and 64, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. 63 to 65 show the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410. FIGS. 64 and 65 show the state after the player pushes the operating member 310 from the state of FIG. 63 (opening / closing member 340). Is a state in which the position is deviated from the first position state.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the present embodiment, the detected member 5413 is arranged by projecting inward from the inner wall of the outer wall member 301 so as to face the outer wall of the main body annular portion 5410 and detecting the detected member 5413. A detection sensor KC51 for determining whether or not

  The detection sensor KC51 is arranged such that the member to be detected 5413 can be accommodated in the detection groove in a state where each of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 extends to the end (see FIG. 67). Further, since both of the pair of detected members 5413 are configured to be detectable, in this embodiment, the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 5410 is shifted 180 degrees from the initial state. Even when the member to be detected 5413 protrudes, detection can be performed by the same detection sensor KC51.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, when the opening / closing member 340 rotates out of the first position in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, the adjustment arm portion 345 has each of the divided ring members. It rotates to the intermediate position where it abuts on the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451 of 5450 and 5460 (see FIG. 65).

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 are not in contact with the adjustment arm 345 in contact with the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451. That is, the state of the clutch member does not change between when the opening / closing member 340 is in the first position state and when it is in the intermediate position state. Therefore, the opening / closing member 340 determines the value of the resultant force of the urging force of the spring SP1 and the urging force of the spring SP2 that is a reaction force applied to the player who operates the operating member 310 via the operating member 310 in the first position. It can be made the same in the case of the state and the case of the intermediate position state.

  In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4) and the like do not notify the operation member 310 to be pushed in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410. That is, the state shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 is a result of the player pushing the operation member 310 without permission while the pachinko machine 10 is not informing at all.

  66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial side views of the opening / closing member 340 and the switching device 5400 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. 66 (a) shows the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, and in FIG. 66 (b), the main body ring portion 5410 is clockwise from the initial state as viewed from above (FIG. 66 (b) leftward). The state after a predetermined amount of rotation is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the opening / closing member 340 rotates from the first position state when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state, the adjustment arm portion 345 causes the first split ring member 5450 to abut. It is accommodated in a recess between the contact surface 5542a and the inclined surface 5412 of the main body ring portion 5410. Here, the abutting surface 5452a is inclined upward in the direction away from the depression, but since the degree of the inclination is close to the vertical direction side (close to 90 degrees), the adjustment arm portion 345 and the abutting surface 5452 are 66 (b), when contacting in the left-right direction, a load along the left-right direction in FIG. 66 (b) is applied from the adjustment arm portion 345 to the first divided annular member 5450.

  Accordingly, when the main body ring portion 5410 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 66A in the clockwise direction when viewed from above (leftward in FIG. 66B), the first divided ring member 5450 moves to the adjustment arm portion 345. By being restricted, the first split annular member 5450 relatively moves with respect to the main body annular portion 5410. The same applies to the second divided annular member 5460.

  FIG. 67 is a top view of the operation device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. In FIG. 67, the main body member 340 is in the intermediate position state, and the main body ring portion 5410 rotates until the locking convex portion 5414 comes into contact with the adjustment portion 5454 of the first split ring member 5450. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the fully extended state of the main body ring portion 5410, the detected member 5413 extends outward in the radial direction and is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor KC51. Therefore, by confirming the change in the signal output from the detection sensor KC51, it can be determined whether or not the operation member 310 has been operated when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state.

  In this determination, there is no need to collate the change timing of the sensor signal for detecting the depression of the operation member 310 with the notification timing of the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4), or the like. Incorrect operation of the operation member 310 (operation when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state) can be easily detected. Moreover, the control flow used for the detection can be shortened.

  68 (a) and 68 (b) are partial side views of the opening / closing member 340 and the switching device 5400 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 68 (a) shows a state at the same time as the state shown in FIG. 67, and FIG. 68 (b) shows that the main body ring portion 5410 is rotated clockwise (as viewed from above) from the state shown in FIG. 68 (a). A further rotated state is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the opening / closing member 340 rides on the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451 of the first split annular member 5450 and is in the intermediate position, the second opening / closing member 340 is placed between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 5420. A one-segment annular member 5450 is interposed. Therefore, even if the operation member 310 is pushed again in the first effect state to the third effect state described in the first embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated until the adjustment arm part 345 contacts the adjustment step part 5420. The opening / closing member 340 continues to maintain the intermediate position state. Therefore, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 can be made different from the operation mode described in the first embodiment, and information that is beneficial to the player such as the jackpot expectation can be obtained from the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340. It can be made impossible to read. Thereby, a player who dislikes that he or she cannot read information that is beneficial to the player can be directed not to operate the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state.

  Further, by setting the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 to a halfway state of an intermediate position state, an abnormal atmosphere is produced, and the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is determined for a player who has accidentally operated the operation member 310 unintentionally. This can be used to notify that an erroneous operation has been performed. In this case, for example, as compared with the case where an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the presence or absence of an erroneous operation can be notified without impairing the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the above-described effect of the first divided annular member 5450 is not caused by the operation timing of the main body annular portion 5410 or the switching of the operation direction. That is, it is not necessary to change the operation mode of the main body ring portion 5410 from the operation mode of the main body ring portion 410 of the first embodiment. Accordingly, it is possible to maintain the degree of freedom for setting the operation control of the main body ring portion 5410.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), when the main body ring portion 5410 is further rotated clockwise from the top surface (leftward in FIG. 68 (b)) from the most extended state shown in FIG. Since the relative movement of the first divided annular member 5450 with respect to the main body annular portion 5410 is restricted by the contact between the stop convex portion 5414 and the adjusting portion 5454 of the first divided annular member 5450, the first divided annular member 5450 is pushed by the main body ring portion 5410 and rotates clockwise when viewed from above (FIG. 68 (b) leftward).

  Here, since the opening / closing member 340 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction of the main body annular portion 5410, the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved as the first divided annular member 5450 moves leftward in FIG. 68 (b). The adjustment arm 345 is pushed upward along the inclination of the abutment surface 5452a, and the adjustment arm portion 345 abuts against the smooth upper surface 5452b of the first divided annular member 5450.

  As described above, the smooth upper surface 5452b has the same position as the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 5420 in the axial direction of the main body ring portion 5410. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. It will be in the 1st position state. Therefore, as long as the player does not operate the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state.

  Further, when the contact between the contact surface 5452a of the first divided annular member 5450 and the adjustment arm portion 345 is released, it is counterclockwise when viewed from above (FIG. 68B). ) To the right), the first split annular member 5450 is moved to the depth of the recessed portion 5411 by the restoring force of the coil spring SP51 (see FIG. 60), and the first split annular member 5450 is accommodated. Return to the state (see FIG. 60). Therefore, when the main body annular portion 5410 is in the initial state again, the first divided annular member 5450 is returned to the accommodated state, and therefore a member for returning the first divided annular member 5450 is prepared separately. It can be made unnecessary.

  69 (a) to 69 (c) are side views of the switching device 5400 and the opening / closing member 340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. 69 (a), the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state and the opening / closing member 340 is in the intermediate position. In FIG. 69 (b), the main body ring is changed from the state shown in FIG. 69 (a). The state in which the portion 5410 is rotated counterclockwise in the top view (rightward in FIG. 69 (b)) is shown. In FIG. 69 (c), the main body ring portion 5410 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the top view from the state shown in FIG. A state rotated in the left direction (FIG. 69 (c)) is shown.

  FIG. 69 illustrates drive control for canceling the influence of the operation of the operation member 310 in the initial state. That is, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the adjustment arm portion 345 is inserted into a recess between the inclined surface 5412 of the main body annular portion 5410 and the abutment surface 5452a of the first divided annular portion agent 5450 ( Even when the operation member 310 is pushed in in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410), before the operation of rotating the main body ring portion 5410 clockwise as viewed from above (FIG. 69 (c) leftward), By previously rotating the main body ring portion 5410 counterclockwise when viewed from above (rightward in FIG. 69 (b)) (first driving mode), the adjustment arm portion 345 is lifted to the inclined surface 5412, and the opening / closing member 340 is moved to the first position. Return to position.

  Thereby, when the operation member 310 is operated unintentionally when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state, the third symbol display device has a large jackpot (99% jackpot) effect (for example, “premier effect”). ) Is displayed, the open / close member 340 can prevent a discrepancy in the pachinko machine 10 as a whole, which performs an abnormal operation.

  That is, the behavior at the start of rotation of the main body ring portion 5410 can be changed according to the expectation degree of jackpot of the effect actually performed by the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the operation member 310 is operated in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, the presentation is performed with the first divided ring portion agent 5450 interposed between the opening / closing member 340 and the adjustment step portion 5420. Or the control device can select whether to cancel the intervention.

  When the main body ring portion 5410 is operated in the first drive mode shown in FIG. 69 only when the big hit effect is performed, the opening / closing member 340 in the intermediate position state is in the first position state in the preliminary operation. By confirming that, the player can know in advance that the performance of the jackpot is almost started.

  Therefore, in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, it is possible to provide a game method in which the operation member 310 is intentionally pushed in, the opening / closing member 340 is set in the intermediate state, and the first operation is expected to return to the first position state. . In this case, the player's line of sight can be gathered in the change in the posture of the opening / closing member 340, and the attention of the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

  In addition, the above-described game mode in which the operation member 310 is intentionally pushed in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410 by setting an almost jackpot effect to occur with a very low probability (for example, 1/10000) is long. It is possible to prevent the period from being continued.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state by pushing the operation member 4310 when the switching device 4500 is in the first state has been described. In the operation device 6300, the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state even when the operation member 4310 is pushed in when the switching device 4500 is in the first state according to an operation mode in which the player operates the operation member 4310. It is possible to form a case that is not. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 70, the operation device 6300 includes a movable cover member 6360 that covers the opening / closing member 4340 in the vicinity of the rotation shaft portion of the opening / closing member 4340, and an upper surface of the slide member 4520 of the switching device 6500. Except that the outer push-out member 6550 and the inner push-out member 6560 are disposed, the same configuration as the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is provided. In FIG. 70, only in the vicinity of the rotation shaft portion of the opening / closing member 4340 and the moving cover member 6360, a cross-sectional shape at a position passing through a pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361 of the moving cover member 6360 is illustrated.

  That is, the operation device 6300 generates the driving force of the outer wall member 4301, the overlapping member 302, the operation member 4310, the pair of opening / closing members 4340, and the drive gear 4591 that operates the switching device, as in the fourth embodiment. A drive motor 4590 for moving, a movable cover member 6360 disposed on the opening / closing member 4340 so as to be capable of relative movement with respect to the opening / closing member 4340, and a lower portion of the opening / closing member 4340. It mainly includes a switching device 6500 configured to be able to switch between a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is urged by contact and a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is not in contact with the opening / closing member 4340 by a straight movement.

  As in the fourth embodiment, the switching device 6500 includes a base member 4510, a slide member 4520, a first return member 4530, a second return member 4540, and a torsion spring NB4, and a moving cover. When the opening / closing member 4340 rotates in a state of facing the member 6360, the outer push-out member 6550 that places the moving cover member 6360 at the outer position, and in the state of facing the moving cover member 6360, the opening / closing member 4340 is in the first position state. The inner push-out member 6560 that mainly places the movable cover member 6360 at the inner position as the initial position is provided.

  71 (a) is a side view of the switching device 6500, and FIG. 71 (b) is a top view of the switching device 6500 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a).

  In order to facilitate understanding, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), an imaginary straight line extending along the direction connecting the pair of first return members 4530 is connected to the first return member 4530 and the first return member 4530. 2 are arranged at equal intervals in the direction connecting the return member 4540. In FIG. 71, the base member 4510 is not shown.

  That is, FIG. 71B shows a fixed position line Wr passing through the center of the width of the pair of first return members 4530 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 71B) and the pair of second return members 4540. Of the non-fixed side position line Wn passing through the center of the width length, the return position line Wc disposed between the fixed side position line Wr and the non-fixed side position line Wn, and the fixed side position line Wr and the return position line Wc. A fixed intermediate line Wcr disposed in the middle and a non-fixed intermediate line Wcn disposed in the middle of the non-fixed position line Wn and the return position line Wc are illustrated.

  Each line Wr, Wn, Wc, Wcr, Wcn is illustrated as a reference line in which the center of the width length (dimension in the vertical direction of FIG. 70) of the opening / closing member 4340 is arranged in a top view.

  That is, for example, when the switching device 6500 is in the first state described above in the fourth embodiment, the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed on the fixed-side position line Wr in a top view. In the present embodiment, the slide member 4520 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 forms five types of stop positions arranged on the lines Wr, Wn, Wc, Wcr, Wcn in a top view. The

  The outer extrusion member 6550 is. When viewed from above, the center of the thickness length (length in the vertical direction in FIG. 71 (b)) coincides with the fixed-side intermediate line Wcr and the non-fixed-side intermediate line Wcn, and the width is wide in the front and rear (FIG. 71 (b) left and right). A main body portion 6551 having a T-shape in side view formed from the shape and a chamfered portion 6552 formed by chamfering at the upper end portion of the main body portion 6551 are mainly provided.

  The upper end portion of the main body portion 6551 is a portion that can come into contact with the movable cover member 6360 when the opening / closing member 4340 rotates. Since the chamfered portion 6552 is formed at all corners in a top view and has a substantially elliptical shape, the movable cover member 6360 and the outer push-out member 6550 come into contact with each other while the slide member 4520 is sliding. In addition, since the generated load can be released in a direction in which the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 can move, it is possible to prevent the constituent members from being damaged.

  The outer pushing member 6550 does not come into contact with the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 when the center of the width of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed on the other lines Wr, Wn, Wc in a top view. Formed from.

  The inner pushing member 6560 is formed by a pair of rod-like members arranged before and after the center of the thickness length (length in the vertical direction in FIG. 71 (b)) coincides with the return position line Wc when viewed from above, and has an upper end portion. The main body portion 6561 having an L-shape in side view and extending portions that extend to opposite sides from each other, and a chamfered portion 6562 formed by chamfering at the upper end portion of the main body portion 6561 are mainly provided.

  The upper end portion of the main body portion 6561 is a portion that can come into contact with the movable cover member 6360 when the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed in the first position state. Since the chamfered portion 6562 is formed at all corners at the tip of the extended portion in a top view, and is rounded, the moving cover member 6360 and the inner pushing member 6560 are in the middle of the sliding operation of the sliding member 4520. Even if the contact occurs, the generated load can be released in the direction in which the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 can move, so that the constituent members can be prevented from being damaged.

  The inner pushing member 6560 is in contact with the opening / closing member 4340 and the moving cover member 6360 when the center of the width of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed on the other lines Wr, Wn, Wcr, Wcn in a top view. It is formed from the aspect which does not.

  Details of the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a) is a front view of the opening / closing member 4340, FIG. 72 (b) is a side view of the opening / closing member 4340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 72 (d) is a front view of the movable cover member 6360, FIG. 72 (d) is a side view of the movable cover member 6360 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIId in FIG. 72 (c), and FIG. 72 (e) is FIG. It is a top view of the movable cover member 6360 in the arrow LXXIIe direction view. Note that the opening / closing member 4340 described in the present embodiment and the opening / closing member 4340 described in the fourth embodiment are the same members, but the details will be described here.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the opening / closing member 4340 is formed in a long plate shape as viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 72 (a)), as in the fourth embodiment. A plate portion 341, a support hole 342, and a convex receiving portion 344 (see FIG. 8) are provided, and at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 341, the front-rear direction (see FIG. 72 (a ) An extending portion 4343 extending along the left-right direction), an adjusting arm portion 4345 extending to the opposite side of the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 341 facing the other opening / closing member 4340, and a shaft And a torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8) that is wound around the portion 4301c1 and is engaged with the convex receiving portion 344 to generate an urging force that rotates the opening / closing member 4340 to the inward position.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the end on the support hole 342 side of the main body plate portion 341 is thinner in the axial direction than other portions, and an inclined side surface 4341a is formed at the boundary of the thickness. . The inclined side surface 4341a is formed as a side surface parallel to the contact surface 4345a of the adjustment arm portion 4345.

  The adjustment arm portion 4345 mainly includes a contact surface 4345a disposed on the lower surface of the extended distal end portion and a rotation restricting surface 4345b intersecting with the extending direction.

  The contact surface 4345a is a surface that contacts the return members 4530 and 4540 of the switching device 6500 and presses the return members 4530 and 4540 by the rotation operation of the opening and closing member 4340.

  The rotation restricting surface 4345b is a surface constituted by a curved shape that is recessed toward the shaft portion 4301c1 side. In the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340 (see FIG. 54), the opening / closing member 4340 has a shape that coincides with the arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the return members 4530 and 4540 of the switching device 4500.

  As shown in FIGS. 72C to 72E, the movable cover member 6360 has a main body member 6361 formed in a U-shape when viewed from above and a pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361 having a long hole shape. A pair of adjustment long holes 6362 that are formed so as to penetrate, a connecting portion 6363 that is a part of the main body member 6361 and connects the pair of parallel plates, and extends from the tips of the pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361. Extending arm 6364 mainly.

  The main body member 6361 has a positioning flat surface 6361a formed as a flat surface on the upper surface thereof, in which the distance between the pair of parallel plates is approximately the same as the thickness of the end portion on the support hole 342 side of the opening / closing member 4340.

  A static frictional force is generated between the pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361 and the opening / closing member 4340 in the assembled state (see FIG. 70). Therefore, in order to cause the opening / closing member 4340 and the main body member 6361 to move relative to each other, a load greater than the maximum static frictional force is required.

  In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8) that urges the opening / closing member 4340 toward the side disposed in the second position state causes the opening / closing member 4340 to be in the first position state (see FIG. 70). In the case where the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 is greater than the maximum static friction force described above, and the displacement of the torsion spring NB4 is maximum (see FIG. 77), Thus, the spring constants of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 are set. Thus, when the movable cover 6360 is pressed against the outer push-out member 6550 or the inner push-out member 6560, the movable cover 6360 rubs relative to the opening / closing member 4340 and moves relative to the return member 4530, 4540. Can be prevented from moving relative to the opening / closing member 4340.

  The positioning plane 6361a is a surface that comes into contact with the inclined side surface 4341a in the assembled state (see FIG. 70). When the positioning flat surface 6361a and the inclined side surface 4341a are in surface contact with each other, a displacement of the moving cover member 6360 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340 is prevented.

  The adjustment long hole 6362 is a long hole that extends along a straight line parallel to the positioning plane 6361a and whose length in the short direction is equal to the diameter of the support hole 342. The adjustment long hole 6361a and the inclined side surface 4341a. In a state of surface contact, the support hole 342 is disposed at a position including the support hole 342 as viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 72C).

  Thus, in the assembled state (see FIG. 70), the opening / closing member 4340 and the moving cover member 6360 are supported by the common shaft portion 4301c1, and the moving cover member 6360 is extended from the opening / closing member 4340 by the adjustment long hole 6362. It can be relatively moved along the direction (the extending direction of the inclined side surface 4341a).

  The extended arm portion 6364 is axially disposed when the end portion of the adjustment elongated hole 6362 on the extended arm portion 6364 side and the support hole 342 of the opening / closing member 4340 are disposed at the same position as viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 70). It is formed in such a manner that it has the same outer shape as that of the adjustment arm portion 4345 when viewed. For example, the lower side surface of the extended arm portion 6364 is formed as a plane parallel to the positioning plane 6361 a and the adjustment slot 6362.

  Therefore, for example, when the end of the adjustment elongated hole 6362 on the extending arm portion 6364 side and the support hole 342 of the opening / closing member 4340 are disposed at the same position (see FIG. 70) (see FIG. 70). When the opening / closing member 4340 is rotated to come into contact with the return members 4530 and 4540, the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the open / close member 4340 and the return members 4530 and 4540 come into direct contact with each other. This is different from the mode in which 6360 is interposed. Hereinafter, a case where the moving cover member 6360 is interposed between the opening / closing member 4340 and the return members 4530 and 4540 will be described.

  73 is a top view of the operation device 6300, and FIGS. 74 and 75 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along the line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. In FIG. 73, the outer wall member 4301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 4310 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 73 illustrates a fixed-side intermediate state in which the fixed-side intermediate line Wcr of the switching device 6500 coincides with the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 in a top view, and in FIG. 74, the first position of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 75, the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 73, control is performed so that the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4), etc. do not notify the operation member 4310 to be pushed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 75 is a result of the player pushing the operation member 4310 without permission while the pachinko machine 10 is not informing at all.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, when the operating member 4310 is pushed and the opening / closing member 4340 rotates from the first position, the outer push-out member 6550 and the connecting portion 6363 of the movable cover member 6360 are in contact with each other. In contact therewith, the movable cover member 6360 is pushed from the inner position toward the outer position. When the opening / closing member 4340 is rotated to the second position by this pushing, the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position (see FIG. 75).

  Even if the player stops the push-down operation, the operation member 4310 returns upward from the state shown in FIG. 75, and the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the first position state, a force to return the movable cover member 6360 to the inside is generated. Therefore, the arrangement of the moving cover member 6360 is maintained at the outer position.

  Here, since the moving cover member 6360 moves on a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the opening / closing member 4340, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 4340 from changing due to the movement of the moving cover member 6360. . Thus, the reaction force applied to the player via the operation member 4310 can be prevented from changing, so that the player can change the state of the switching device 6500 between the fixed side and the change by the reaction force applied from the operation member 4310. It can be difficult to recognize that it is in a state.

  76 is a top view of the operation device 6300, and FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 6300 along the line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. In FIG. 76, the outer wall member 4301 and the overlapping member 302 are shown by imaginary lines, and the operation member 4310 is not shown. 76 shows a first state in which the fixed side position line Wc of the switching device 6500 coincides with the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 in a top view, and FIG. 77 shows a second position state of the opening / closing member 4340. Is illustrated.

  76 and 77, after the operating member 4310 is operated while the switching device 6500 is in the fixed intermediate state as shown in FIG. 75, the return position line Wc of the switching device 6500 is an opening / closing member in a top view. The case where the switching device 6500 is set to the first state without passing through the second state that coincides with the center of the width length of 4340 is illustrated. Therefore, the movable cover member 6360 is maintained at the outer position.

  As shown in FIG. 77, even when the operation member 4310 is operated with the movable cover member 6360 disposed at the outer position and the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state, the first return member 4530 remains on the movement locus. Since the movable cover member 6360 is still disposed and the movable cover member 6360 is interposed between the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530, the opening / closing member 4340 continues to receive a load from the first return member 4530.

  That is, when the opening / closing member 4340 is fixed in the second position state depending on whether the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the inner position or the outer position (see FIG. 54), The case where the movable cover member 6360 is interposed and still receives the reaction force from the first return member 4530 can be caused.

  In other words, the state of the switching device 6500 is the same as that in the first state depending on whether or not the player operates the operation member 4310 in a state where the switching device 6500 is disposed at the fixed-side intermediate position and there is no push-in notification. Nevertheless, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the operation member 4310 by the player. This change is a change that leads to confusion for the player. This will be described below.

  The operation device 6300 in the present embodiment notifies information that is beneficial to the player by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 when the operation member 4310 is pushed in. Since the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 can be switched depending on the state of the switching device 6500, the drive motor 4590 is driven so as to switch the state of the switching device 6500 in accordance with information that is beneficial to the player. The state of the device 6500 is controlled. In the present embodiment, the switching device 6500 is controlled so that the opening / closing member 4340 is easily maintained in the second position when the degree of jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level.

  Here, in the first state of the switching device 6500, if the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the inner position (initial position), the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position as the opening / closing member 4340 is brought into the second position state. This is a state maintained in the position state (see FIG. 54). On the other hand, in the third state of the switching device 6500 (see FIGS. 56 to 58), the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state, and returns to the first position state as the operation member 4310 is raised. Therefore, the player can grasp the difference in the state of the switching device 6500 based on whether or not the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the second position state, and the profit as the expectation degree as intended by the control side is determined from the difference in the state. Can be understood by the player (expected degree of jackpot in the first state> expected degree of jackpot in the third state).

  However, when the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position, even when the switching device 6500 is in the first state, the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state, and the first operation is performed as the operation member 4310 is raised. Since it returns to the position state, it cannot be distinguished from the case where the switching device 6500 is in the third state, and it is difficult to determine the state of the switching device 6500 from the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player visually recognizing the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 is reduced.

  In the state shown in FIG. 77, the first return member 4530 rotates in accordance with the rotation amount of the opening / closing member 4340, and the reaction force of the torsion spring NB4 that increases in accordance with the rotation angle is given to the player. This is given to the player because the reaction force applied to the player when the switching device 6500 is in the third state (see FIGS. 56 to 58) is equivalent in terms of absolute value and change mode. It becomes difficult to determine the state of the switching device 6500 from the reaction force. Therefore, the profit obtained by concentrating the consciousness on the reaction force when the player operates the operation member 4310 and identifying the difference in the reaction force is reduced.

  In other words, if the switching device 6500 is disposed at the fixed-side intermediate position and there is no push-in notification, and if the operation member 4310 is not operated, the player can obtain the profit obtained by visually recognizing the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340. Can be maintained. Further, it is possible to maintain the profit obtained by concentrating the consciousness on the reaction force given to the player through the operation member 4310 and identifying the difference in the reaction force. Thereby, it can suppress that a player pushes in and operates the operation member 4310 in the state where there is no notification of pushing.

  77, when the switching device 6500 is set to the second state, the movable cover member 6360 disposed at the outer position receives an inward load from the inner pushing member 6560 and is pushed to the inner position. (See FIG. 70). That is, the inner pushing member 6560 is formed in such a manner that the end in the extending direction of the adjusting arm portion 4345 and the end of the inner pushing member 6560 overlap on the same line when viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 70). Accordingly, even when the moving cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position by operating the operation member 4310 by the player, the switching device 6500 goes into the first state after passing through the second state. The influence of the player's operation can be canceled.

  Thereby, when the operation member 4310 is operated unintentionally when the switching device 6500 is in the fixed-side intermediate state, the third symbol display device has an effect of almost jackpot (99% jackpot) (for example, “premier effect”). ) Is displayed, the open / close member 4340 can prevent a discrepancy in the pachinko machine 10 as a whole that performs an operation with a low degree of expectation (an operation that is not maintained in the second position state).

  In other words, the behavior of the switching device 6500 after the switching device 6500 is arranged in the fixed intermediate state is configured to be changeable according to the jackpot expectation of the effect actually performed by the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, when the switching device 6500 operates the operation member 4310 in the fixed intermediate state, the moving cover member 6360 performs an effect of urging the operation member 4310 to be pushed in a state where the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position. It is possible to select on the control device side whether or not an effect of urging the operation member 4310 to be pushed is performed after the position of is set to the inner position.

  For example, after the switching device 6500 is set to the fixed-side intermediate state before performing the effect of prompting the operation member 4310 to be pushed, the switching device 6500 is switched via the second state immediately before the effect of prompting the operation member 4310 to be pushed. By operating in the first mode of operation (first driving mode), even when the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position, the operation member 4310 is pushed after being returned to the inner position. Production can be performed.

  As another operation, after the non-fixed-side intermediate line Wcn of the switching device 6500 is set to the non-fixed-side intermediate state that coincides with the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 when viewed from above, the effect of prompting the operation member 4310 to be pushed The switching device 6500 is provided with an operation mode (an operation mode in which the rotation direction of the drive motor 4590 is reversed with respect to the first drive mode) in which the switching device 6500 is set to the third state via the second state immediately before. Therefore, it can be difficult to grasp the operation sound or mechanical vibration of the switching device 6500 operating in the first drive mode (the player can hear the operation sound or the frame of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). It can be difficult to notice that the switching device 6500 is operating in the first drive mode by feeling the vibration transmitted through.

  As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the jackpot expectation information corresponding to the difference in the state of the switching device 6500 without pressing the operation member 4310. That is, the difference in the state of the switching device 6500 cannot be grasped unless the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 that operates in accordance with the operation of the operation member 4310 is visually recognized. Therefore, attention to the state of the opening / closing member 4340 after operating the operation member 4310 can be improved, and the player can be directed to operate the operation member 4310.

  As described above, the sixth embodiment is configured such that when the operation member 4310 is pushed in when there is no notification for pushing, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 changes, and the information obtained from the opening / closing member 4340 is reduced. Therefore, the player can be directed to perform the operation as informed.

  In addition, whether or not the operation member 4310 is pushed while ignoring the notification, the notification is ignored by mixing the operation mode of the opening and closing member 4340 with a control that enables the player to obtain useful information. Thus, even after the operation member 4310 is operated, it is possible to maintain the attention to the opening / closing member 4340.

  Further, even if the operation member 4310 is operated when there is no notification for pushing, the reaction force applied to the player from the operation member 4310 does not change, so the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 is intentionally ignored at a desired timing. It is possible to prevent the player who operates the operation member 4310 from feeling uncomfortable due to the reaction force changing during the push-in operation.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 92. In the third embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 340 can be rotated and the case where the opening / closing member 340 is not rotated depending on the distance by which the operation member 310 is pushed is described. However, the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment Depending on the period during which the operation device 7300 is operated, there are formed a case where the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state and a case where the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state and returns to the first position state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  78 and 79 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 78 and 79, the switching device 7500 is in a first state to be described later. 78, the first position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated, and in FIG. 79, the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated.

  The operation device 7300 in the present embodiment is configured such that the operation member 4310 is relatively movable with respect to the operation cover 7320 that is directly operated by the player while partially using the configuration of the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. Is very different.

  That is, the operation device 7300 includes an opening / closing member 4340 having the same shape as that of the fourth embodiment, and has a function of giving a rendering effect to the operation device 7300 itself by partially viewing the internal mechanism. The outer wall member 7301 is formed to have an opening 301a at the bottom center of the shape and is fixed to the front frame 14 in such a manner that an operation device such as the switching device 7500 is accommodated between the front frame 14 (see FIG. 5). The outer wall member 7301 has an opening 7302a that is formed in a shape with a reduced width in the height direction and that is coaxial with the opening 301a and has a slightly larger diameter, and an internal space is formed between the outer wall member 7301 and the outer wall member 7301. And an internal space formed by the outer wall member 7301 and the overlapping member 7302 inserted through the openings 301a and 7302a. The plate-shaped operation member 4310 made of a light transmissive material, the operation of which is restricted by the operation member 4310, the operation cover 7320 covered by the operation member 4310, and the operation member 4310 supported by the outer wall member 7301. And a pair of opening / closing members 4340 configured to be tiltable according to the amount of operation, and the opening / closing member 4340 disposed below the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state even after the player releases his / her hand from the operation member 4310. The switching device 7500 configured to be able to switch between the state that can be maintained in the state and the state that the opening / closing member 4340 cannot be maintained in the second position state, and the drive that generates the driving force of the drive gear 4591 that operates the switching device 7500 And a motor 4590.

  The outer wall member 7301 includes an opening 301a, a recessed portion 301b, a pair of support arm portions 4301c, and a tilt prevention arm portion 4301d in the same manner as the outer wall member 4301 in the fourth embodiment, and is equivalent to the outer wall member 4301. In addition, the upper end position of the support arm portion 4301c is formed at the inner side of the opening 301a so as to be lowered, and is formed in a U-shaped push-up member 7301e that is pivotally supported by the support arm portion 4301c. It mainly includes a through hole 7301f drilled in the bottom of the portion 301b and a detection sensor KC71 disposed below the through hole 7301f.

  The support arm 4301c is longer in width in the present embodiment than in the fourth embodiment, so that a region for supporting the push-up member 7301e can be secured and the switching device 7500 in a top view can be secured. Visibility can be deteriorated. Therefore, it is satisfied by grasping the state of the switching device 7500 through the operation member 4310, and the game method of not operating the operation member 4310 can be suppressed.

  The push-up member 7301e is a member that changes its posture as the operation cover 7320 is pushed down. Details of the relationship with the operation cover 7320 will be described later.

  The opening 7302a of the overlapping member 7302 is formed to have a larger diameter than the opening 302a corresponding to the operation cover 7320 having a larger diameter than the operation member 4310 of the fourth embodiment.

  The operation cover 7320 is a member that is covered with the operation member 4310 and is formed in a reverse cup shape from a light-transmitting material, and has a reverse cup-shaped main body having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the operation member 4310. A portion 7321, a protruding portion 7322 that protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 7321 toward the axial center side, and an annular shape extending from the opening tip of the main body portion 7321 in the outer diameter direction. A flange portion 7323 extending further downward from the extending tip, a restricting portion 7324 extending in the inner diameter direction from the lower end portion of the flange portion 7323, and a through hole 7301 f of the outer wall member 7301 from the restricting portion 7324. And a detection unit 7325 extending so as to be able to be inserted therethrough.

  The protruding portion 7322 is a portion that reduces the contact area between the operation member 4310 and the operation cover 7320 by being arranged between the operation member 4310 and the operation member 4310. As a result, the operation member 4310 easily rubs against the operation cover 7320 (it becomes easy to move relative).

  The downward extending length of the flange portion 7323 is formed longer than the thickness of the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 4310, and the restricting portion 7324 is disposed below the outer extending portion 313. That is, when the load that restricts the vertical movement of the operation member 4310 is released, the operation member 4310 is configured to move downward to a position where the outer extending portion 313 rides on the restriction portion 7324.

  The detection unit 7325 is detached from the detection sensor KC71 when the operation cover 7320 is not pushed in and is disposed at the upper end position, and is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor KC71 after the operation cover 7320 is pushed in (FIG. 79). Thereby, the control operation side can recognize whether or not the operation cover 7320 has been pushed.

  FIG. 79 illustrates a state in which the operation member 4310 is disposed at the lower end of the movement range with respect to the operation cover 7320. When the operation member 4310 is arranged as shown in FIG. 79, the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state for the first time. In other words, when the operation member 4310 is not arranged as shown in FIG. 79 (see, for example, FIG. 78), the opening / closing member 4340 is not in the second position state no matter how much the operation cover 7320 is pushed. Therefore, in the following, the state of the operation member 4310 shown in FIG. 79 (the state disposed at the lower end of the movement range) is referred to as an allowable state of the operation member 4310, and the other state is referred to as a restricted state of the operation member 4310.

  In this embodiment, when a load from the push-up member 7301e is generated on the operation member 4310, the operation member 4310 is in a restricted state, and the load from the push-up member 7301e on the operation member 4310 is released. Then, the operation member 4310 is configured to descend by the action of gravity.

  With reference to FIGS. 80 and 81, a change in the state of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in will be described. FIG. 80A, FIG. 80B, FIG. 81A, and FIG. 81B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line LXXXa-LXXXa in FIG. In FIG. 80A, the state in which the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the upper end position of the moving range is shown, and in FIG. 80B, the state in which the operation cover 7320 is pushed by a predetermined amount is shown in FIG. FIG. 81 (b) shows a state where the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the lower end position of the movement range, and FIG. 81 (b) shows a state after a predetermined period has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 81 (a). Note that the illustration of the detection sensor KC71 and the detection unit 7325 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the push-up member 7301e is urged upward by the urging spring, and in the state shown in FIG. 80A, the push-up load having a magnitude exceeding the load due to gravity is applied to the operation member 4310. give. That is, the state shown in FIG. 80A is maintained by the push-up member 7301e supporting the operation member 4310.

  FIG. 80B is illustrated as a limit position for supporting the operation member 4310 with respect to the operation cover 7320. That is, when the operation cover 7320 further moves down, the push-up member 7301e is pushed down by the restricting portion 7324, and the push-up member 7301e is separated from the operation member 4310.

  In FIG. 81A, the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the lower end position of the movement range, while the push-up member 7301e is separated from the operation member 4310 (a state separated downward). In this state, since no load is applied from the push-up member 7301e to the operation member 4310, the operation member 4310 is gradually lowered by its own weight.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (b), the lowering operation of the operation member 4310 stops at a position where the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 4310 gets on the restriction portion 7324. The state shown in FIG. 81B is an allowable state of the operation member 4310 (see FIG. 79).

  That is, in this embodiment, after the operation cover 7320 is pushed in, the opening / closing member 4340 is brought into the second position state after a predetermined period. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

  82 and 83 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 82 and 83, the switching device 7500 is in a first state to be described later. 82 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 81A, and FIG. 83 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 81B. FIG. 83 shows the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340.

  In FIG. 82, although the operation cover 7320 has been pushed to the lower end of the movement range, the opening / closing member 4340 is still receiving a load from the first return member 4530 (the opening / closing member 4340 on the movement locus of the first return member 4530). Is placed). Therefore, when the player releases his hand from the operation cover 7320 in the state shown in FIG. 82, the operation cover 7320 and the operation member 4310 return to the upper end position, and the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the first position state.

  On the other hand, if the push-in is maintained for a certain period (about 3 seconds in this embodiment) from the state shown in FIG. 82, the operation member 4310 descends with respect to the operation cover 7320, and the opening / closing member 4340 is moved to the first position as shown in FIG. There is a two-position state. Therefore, only when the player operates the operation cover 7320 with a short-time operation or operates the operation cover 7320 with a long-term operation (about 3 seconds or more), the opening / closing member 4340 has the second opening / closing member 4340. It can be made to be in a position state.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a change in the arrangement of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time. FIG. 85 shows the arrangement of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short time. FIG.

  First, FIG. 84 will be described. The upper graph in FIG. 84 shows a change in timed arrangement of the operation cover 7320 (upper position or lower end position), and the lower graph in FIG. 84 shows a change in timed arrangement of the operation member 4310. Note that the vertical length of the upper graph and the vertical length of the lower graph do not correspond to each other (the lower graph has a vertically compressed relationship). Also, in the lower graph of FIG. 84, the restricted state is a position immediately before reaching the lower end position of the operating range of the operating member illustrated by a white circle from the upper end position of the operating range of the operating member 4310 illustrated by the black circle It is illustrated as a range up to.

  In the first state of the switching device 7500 shown in FIG. 84, since the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed opposite to the first return member 4530 of the switching device 7500, the operation member 4310 is allowed to be allowed, that is, the operation cover 7320 This means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position when pushed. Therefore, in FIG. 84, when the lower graph is in the allowable state, it means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state.

  As shown in FIG. 84, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long period of time, the operation member 4310 is allowed after a predetermined period (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed. Therefore, the opening / closing member 4340 can be brought into the second position state by pushing the operation cover 7320 for a long time.

  Next, FIG. 85 will be described. The upper and lower graphs show the same items as in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short period (less than 3 seconds in this embodiment, about 1 second), each time the operation cover 7320 is placed at the upper end position of the movement range, Since the operation member 4310 is pushed up by the push-up member 7301e, the operation member 4320 is not allowed. The same applies to a case where the operation is repeated for a short period of time (continuous hitting operation).

  Therefore, when the switching device 7500 is set to the first state, the operation member 4310 is allowed to be in an allowable state by pressing the operation cover 7320 for a long period of time, while the operation member 4310 is in an allowable state for an operation of pressing the operation cover for a short period of time and repeated operations. The opening / closing member 4340 is formed so as not to be in the second position state.

  In this way, it is possible to change whether or not the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state according to the operation mode of the operation cover 7320 without changing the arrangement of the switching device 7500. In the effect that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher than a certain level in the position state, the player can be directed to perform the operation as informed.

  In other words, when the switching device 7500 is in the first state and the expected value of jackpot is higher than a certain level, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4) notify that “Press and hold the button”. When the player presses the operation cover 7320 for a long time (see FIG. 84), the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state, and the player can grasp that the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level. When the notification is ignored and the button is pressed or repeatedly hit, the opening / closing member 4340 is not in the second position state, and the player cannot grasp that the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level.

  In this case, if the operation cover 7320 is operated while ignoring the notification, the amount of information that can be obtained by the player is reduced even if the operation cover 7320 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to perform the operation as reported as an operation method that does not impair the amount of information obtained.

  If the player does not want to obtain any information related to the jackpot expectation level, the user can achieve the purpose by not operating the operation cover 7320 at all.

  Next, the switching device 7500 will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (a) is a top view of the switching device 7500, FIG. 86 (b) is a side view of the switching device 7500 in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a), and FIG. It is a front view of the switching apparatus 7500 in the arrow LXXXVIc direction view of Fig.86 (a). In FIG. 86, the base member 4510 is not shown.

  The switching device 7500 includes a base member 4510 (see FIG. 78), a slide member 4520, a first return member 4530 in which two pairs of front and rear members are disposed on the left and right, and between the two sets of first return members 4530. Are mainly provided with a second return member 7540 that is disposed at a position that equally divides the slide member 4520 and a pair of pillar members 7550 that extend upward from the front and rear ends of the slide member 4520.

  The second return member 7540 mainly includes a main body portion 4541, a rotation restricting portion 4542, and an inclined surface portion 7543 formed on the main body portion 4541 at the end opposite to the side where the rotation restricting portion 4542 is formed. Prepare.

  The inclined surface portion 7543 prevents the second return member 7540 and the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 from colliding with each other at the surfaces orthogonal to the operation direction and being damaged when the slide member 4520 slides. The inclined surface is formed at least from the end portion of the main body portion 4541 so as to be in contact with the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340. Unlike the fourth embodiment, the main body portion 4541 is formed on both left and right sides.

  FIG. 87 is a top view of the operation device 7300. In FIG. 87, the outer wall member 7301, the overlapping member 7302, and the imaginary line are shown, and the cover member 7320 and the operation member 4310 are not shown. In FIG. 87, a third state of the switching device 7500 is shown.

  Note that the description of the third state of the switching device 7500 represents one arrangement of the slide member 4520 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340. Here, in the third state, in the slide member 4520, the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530 on the left side (left side in FIG. 87) are arranged to face each other. In the first state of switching device 7500 shown in FIG. 78, slide member 4520 has opening / closing member 4340 and first return member 4530 on the right side (right side in FIG. 87) arranged to face each other.

  As described above, in the first state and the third state of the switching device 7500, the opening and closing member 4340 is similarly opposed to the first return member 4530. However, in the first state and the third state, the push-up member The state of 7301e is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 87, in the third state of the switching device 7500, the push-up member 7301e is brought into contact with the column member 7550 and changes its posture. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  88A and 88B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 88A shows a state in which the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range, and FIG. 88B shows a state in which the operation cover 7320 has been pushed down to the lower end position of the movement range. Illustrated. Note that the illustration of the detection sensor KC71 and the detection unit 7325 is omitted for easy understanding.

  89 and 90 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 taken along line LXXXIX-LXXXIX in FIG. 87. 89 shows a state corresponding to FIG. 88 (a), and FIG. 90 shows a state corresponding to FIG. 88 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 89, in the third state of the switching device 7500, the column member 7550 is in a tilted position in contact with the push-up member 7301e, so that the push-up member 7301e and the operation member 4310 are , And the load on the operating member 4310 from the push-up member 7301e is released.

  At this time, even if the operation cover 7320 is pushed in, a load from the push-up member 7301e is not given to the player, so that the operation cover 7320 is arranged (with the operation amount) via the operation cover 7320. The magnitude of the reaction force given to the player is different from the reaction force generated when the switching device 7500 is in the first state.

  When the load from the push-up member 7301e is released, the operation member 4310 descends by its own weight and stops at the lower end position with respect to the operation cover 7320 (see FIG. 89). That is, since the operation member 4310 forms a preliminary state in an allowable state in advance, the opening / closing member 4340 can be immediately brought into the second position state after the operation cover 7320 is pushed down (FIG. 88 ( b) and FIG. 90).

  The operation member 4310 moves up and down inside the operation cover 7320 that moves up and down by operation. Since this moving direction is along the line of sight (vertical direction) in which the player visually recognizes the operation cover 7320, it is difficult to recognize that the operation member 4310 has moved relative to the operation cover 7320. .

  In this embodiment, the urging force of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 applied upward to the operation member 4310 via the opening / closing member 4340 causes the operation member 4310 to move within the operating range of the opening / closing member 4340 and the return members 4530 and 4540. The spring constants of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 are set so as to be smaller than the own weight. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lowering operation of the operation member 4310 from being obstructed by the urging force of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4.

  In the present embodiment, when the switching device 7500 is in the third state, the drive motor 4590 is pushed in for a long period (about 3 seconds or longer) and the drive motor 4590 is switched to the second state of the switching device 7500. Control is performed so as to drive toward a state (a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 and the second return member 7540 face each other). Therefore, when the state of FIG. 90 is maintained (when the operation cover 7320 is pressed for 3 seconds or more), the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state when the hand is released from the operation cover 7320.

  Therefore, only when the player operates the operation cover 7320 with a short-time operation or operates the operation cover 7320 with a long-term operation (about 3 seconds or more), the opening / closing member 4340 has the second opening / closing member 4340. It can be made to be in a position state.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a change in time-position of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time, and FIG. 92 is a view of the arrangement of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short time. FIG.

  First, FIG. 91 will be described. The upper graph in FIG. 91 shows the time variation (upper end position or lower end position) of the arrangement of the operation cover 7320, and the intermediate position graph in FIG. The time change is shown, and the lower graph in FIG. 91 shows the drive state of the drive motor 4590. Note that the upper and lower lengths of the upper graph and the upper and lower lengths of the intermediate graph do not correspond to each other (the intermediate graph is more vertically compressed). Further, in the intermediate position graph of FIG. 91, the restricted state is a position immediately before reaching the lower end position of the operating member movement range illustrated by the white circle from the upper end position of the operating member 4310 illustrated by the black circle. It is illustrated as a range up to.

  In the third state of the switching device 7500 shown in FIG. 91, the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed opposite to the first return member 4530 of the switching device 7500, so that the operation member 4310 is in the permitted state, that is, the operation cover 7320 This means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position when pushed. Therefore, in FIG. 91, when the graph of the intermediate position is in the allowable state, it means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in, the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state almost simultaneously with the completion of the pushing operation. When the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time, the detection sensor KC71 detects pushing for a predetermined period (3 seconds in the present embodiment), whereby the drive motor 4590 is operated, and the state of the switching device 7500 is changed to the opening / closing member 4340. And the second return member 7540 change toward a state where they are arranged to face each other. Therefore, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time, the second maintenance state of the opening / closing member 4340 cannot be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 92 will be described. Each graph shows the same items as in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 92, if the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short period, the detection sensor KC71 does not detect that the operation cover 7320 has been pushed in for a predetermined period. Therefore, the drive motor 4590 is not driven, and the switching device 7500 The three states are maintained, and the opening / closing member 4340 can be maintained in the second position state. The same applies to a case where the operation is repeated for a short period of time (continuous hitting operation).

  Therefore, when the switching device 7500 is in the third state, the opening / closing member 4340 can be maintained in the second position state by pressing the operation cover 7320 for a short period of time and continuously striking, while pressing the operation cover 7320 for a long period of time. Then, the opening / closing member 4340 is formed so as not to be maintained in the second position state.

  In this way, it is possible to change whether or not the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state according to the operation mode of the operation cover 7320 without changing the arrangement of the switching device 7500. The player who is maintained in the second position state can be directed to perform the operation as informed to the player in the effect that the expected degree of jackpot is higher than a certain level.

  That is, when the switching device 7500 is in the first state and the expected value of jackpot is higher than a certain level, a notification that “please hit the button repeatedly” is given as an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4), or the like. When the player hits the operation cover 7320 repeatedly (see FIG. 92), the player can grasp that the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state and the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level. When the push operation is performed for a long time ignoring the notification, the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state after the player releases the hand from the operation cover 7320, and the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level. The player cannot grasp this.

  In this case, if the operation cover 7320 is operated while ignoring the notification, the amount of information that can be obtained by the player is reduced even if the operation cover 7320 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to perform the operation as reported as an operation method that does not impair the amount of information obtained.

  If the player does not want to obtain any information related to the jackpot expectation level, the user can achieve the purpose by not operating the operation cover 7320 at all.

  In the present embodiment, when the switching device 7500 is in the first state, the player can grasp that the expected value after the jackpot is higher than a certain level when the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state by the pushing operation. (See FIGS. 84 and 85) When the switching device 7500 is in the third state, after the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state by the push-in operation (regardless of the operation method, the second position state is not reached). After that, the player can grasp that the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level only when the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state even after the player releases the operation cover 7320. (See FIGS. 91 and 92).

  In this manner, by changing the movement of the opening / closing member 4340 with respect to the operation as informed, attention to the operation device 7300 can be maintained, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

  In the present embodiment, since the distance from the second return member 7540 to the two sets of first return members 4530 is the same, the opening / closing member 4340 and the second return member 7540 are arranged in a state opposite to each other. The operation amount of the drive motor 4590 until the first state is formed is opposite to the operation amount of the drive motor 4590 from the state where the opening / closing member 4340 and the second return member 7540 are arranged to face each other until the third state is formed. Same amount in direction. That is, the switching device 7500 can be set to the first state or the third state by operating at the same operation speed for the same period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the state of the switching device 75000 from the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 4590, and to improve the player's interest in pushing the operation cover 7320. .

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, in a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 and the third surface 423 of the adjustment step portion 420 are arranged to face each other, after the opening / closing member 340 is rotated from the first position state, Although the case where the pair of opening / closing members 340 can be simultaneously returned to the first position state by rotating the main body ring portion 410 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second surface 422 may be formed instead of the third surface 423. In this case, after the pair of opening / closing members 340 are in the second position state, an operation of returning to the first position state can be performed at the same time.

  In the first embodiment, the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 is rotated while facing the third surface 423 of the adjustment step portion 420, and the side surface of the opening / closing member 340 and the inner surface of the operation member 310 are surfaces. Although the case where it hits was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, a concave portion may be formed on the inner wall of the operation member 310, and a convex portion protruding from the opening / closing member 340 may be fitted into the concave portion. In this case, the operation member 310 can be easily maintained at the lower end position.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the straight line extending in the extending direction of the inner surface of the hook-shaped inner surface of the engaging claw 343 does not pass through the shaft portion 323 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a straight line extending in the extending direction of the inner surface of the hook shape of the engaging claw 343 may pass through the shaft portion 323. In this case, when the opening / closing member 340 is in the first position state, the direction of the load applied from the extending portion 333 to the engagement claw 343 and the operation direction of the engagement claw 343 are opposite (on the same straight line). Therefore, the wobbling of the opening / closing member 340 can be effectively suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting portion between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 420 is formed from a slope that is linearly inclined has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, it may be formed by a curved surface that is secondarily linearly curved when viewed in the radial direction. In this case, acceleration can be applied to the rotation operation of the opening / closing member 340 while rotating the main body ring portion 410 at a constant speed.

  In addition, the aspect of curvature is not specifically limited. For example, the main ring portion 410 may be curved so that the tangent slope with respect to the horizontal direction is deeper at the higher position than at the lower position. In this case, when the load from the torsion spring NB1 that urges the opening / closing member 340 to the outside is reduced (when the opening / closing member 340 is disposed on the second position state side), the return speed of the opening / closing member 340 is increased (reset). When the load from the torsion spring NB1 increases (when the opening / closing member 340 is disposed on the first position state side), the return speed of the opening / closing member 340 is reduced (load applied in the return direction). Can be reduced). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 340 is restored, the load applied to the opening / closing member 340 from the main body ring portion 410 can be made uniform.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the main body ring portion 410 is controlled by a constant operation regardless of whether or not the player pushes the operation member 310 is described, but is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, it may be detected whether or not the operation member 310 has been pushed in, and the operation mode of the main body ring portion 410 may be changed based on the detection. In this case, it is possible to configure a game property in which the operation means 310 is pushed by the player's intention and selection. For example, from the third symbol display means, a notification of “press” is made for a specified number of times (for example, 5 times), and the player is allowed to perform a pushing operation for a specified number of times (for example, 2 times). Under the condition that the player can push the operation member 310 with his / her own intention and selection by setting the expectation of jackpot expectation to change depending on how many times it is pushed. It is decided. In this case, for example, if the operation member 310 is pushed twice during the first or second notification period, the probability of the opening / closing member 340 rotating is high, but the expectation for jackpot when the opening / closing member 340 rotates is low. When the operation member 310 is pushed once in the first or second notification period, and the operation member 310 is pushed once in the third to fifth notification periods, the opening / closing member 340 rotates. Although the probability is low, the expectation of jackpot when the opening / closing member 340 rotates is set to be high, and the operation member 310 is pushed twice in the third to fifth notification periods, and the opening / closing member 340 is pushed by the second pushing. However, the probability of jackpot when the opening / closing member 340 rotates is set to be very high. Thereby, the player who is not interested in the jackpot expectation degree and wants to operate the opening / closing member 340 can satisfy the desire by completing the operation of the operation member 310 by the first or second notification, and can open / close the opening / closing member. A player who wants to predict the degree of jackpot expectation from the operation of the member 340 can satisfy the desire by operating the operation member 310 during the third to fifth notification periods. In other words, the first request that the player wants to play a lively game regardless of the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and the first request is different from the first request. The second requirement that the 340 only move when the jackpot expectation is high can be met by the player's will and choice.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the detected member 5413 is detected by the detection sensor KC51 when the player pushes the operation member 310 when there is no push notification has been described. Similarly, in the sixth embodiment, Alternatively, a sensor may be provided that detects that the player has pushed the operation member 4310 when there is no push notification.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 340 performs a special operation when the player pushes the operation member 310 when there is no notification has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a solenoid may be housed in the base member 320, and the main body bar portion 331 may be pulled downward by driving the solenoid. In this case, when the player repeatedly pushes the operation member 310, the contact portion 332 of the clutch member 330 and the protruding portion 312 of the operation member 310 can be prevented from repeatedly colliding, The durability of the contact portion 332 and the protruding portion 312 can be improved.

  Further, instead of pulling down the main body bar portion 331 downward, only the contact portion 332 of the clutch member 330 may be displaced so as to be buried in the main body bar portion 331. In this case, the opening / closing member 340 can be maintained in the first position while avoiding a collision between the protruding portion 312 and the contact portion 332. Note that examples of the method of burying the contact portion 332 in the main body bar portion 331 include a mode of drawing with a solenoid, a mode of using a mechanism of a knock-type ballpoint pen, and the like.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 340 rotated by the operation of the operation member 310 applies a load to the first divided annular member 5450 and the main body plate portion 5451 moves by the load applied from the opening / closing member 340 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion 5451 may be moved by a solenoid that is driven by detecting the operation of the operation member 310 outside the notification period. Thereby, for example, the operation member 310 is in a state in which the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 faces the connecting surface (for example, the inclined surface connecting the first surface 421 and the second surface 422) of the adjustment step portion 5420. When the opening / closing member 340 is operated to rotate, it is possible to prevent the coupling surface and the adjustment arm portion 345 from colliding with each other. Therefore, the adjustment arm portion 345 collides with the inclined surface, and a load is applied to the adjustment arm portion 345 along a direction oblique to the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 340, and the durability of the adjustment arm portion 345 decreases. Can be prevented.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the operation member 4310 is operated when there is no notification and the appearance at the time of operation does not change as usual and it is difficult to recognize that it is an erroneous operation has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, a lamp that emits light when the operation member 4310 is operated when there is no notification may be disposed at a location that is visible to the player of the operation device 6300. In this case, it is possible to notice an erroneous operation by visually recognizing how the lamp shines.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case has been described in which the operation member 4310 disposed inside the operation cover 7320 moves up and down with respect to the opening / closing member 4340 so that the permissible state and the restricted state are switched. It is not limited. For example, the bulging portion 4312 is configured with a shape that changes for each phase in the bottom view, and the operation member 4310 rotates around the center of the bottom plate of the operation member 4310 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340, thereby allowing and restricting the operation state. And may be switched. In this case, since it is not necessary to change the upper surface position of the operation member 4310 between the allowable state and the restricted state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state change of the operation member 4310 from the appearance.

  Although the case where the operation member 4310 moves by gravity with respect to the operation cover 7320 has been described in the seventh embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a drive motor that moves the operation member 4310 up and down with respect to the operation cover 7320 may be provided, or may be driven by a damper device.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the switching devices 400, 2400, 3400, and 5400 have been described as having a perfect circular ring shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise from the top view elliptical shape. In this case, the distance between the contact point between the main body ring portion 410 and the adjustment arm portion 345 and the shaft portion 323 can be changed depending on the phase at which the main body ring portion 410 faces the adjustment arm portion 420. In addition, the degree of freedom in designing the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 can be improved. Further, the main body ring portion 410 may be constituted by a plurality of coaxial annular rings.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the clutch member 330 operates in conjunction with the operation of the operation member 310 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a solenoid may be housed in the base member 320, and the main body bar portion 331 may be pulled downward by driving the solenoid. In this case, even when the player does not push in the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 can be rotated to the second position state.

  For example, the main body bar portion 331 is pulled in at a timing when there is no push-in instruction, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated, and after detecting the push-in operation after the push-in operation of the operation member 310 is detected, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated. An effect of closing the opening / closing member 340 can be performed.

  Further, the opening / closing member 340 opens and closes a plurality of times by rotating the main body ring portion 410 a plurality of times (forward operation, reverse direction, inversion, and a combination thereof) while the main body rod portion 331 is retracted. It is possible to produce a repetitive effect.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening / closing members 340, 2340, and 4340 are opened / closed with respect to the switching devices 400, 2400, 3400, 4500, 5400, 6500, and 7500 that are arranged on the back side of the opening / closing members 340, 2340, and 4340. Although the case where the state is changed by the change (displacement) of the state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state of opening / closing of the opening / closing members 340, 2340, 4340 may be changed by changing the state of the operation members 310, 4310 (for example, rotational displacement about the axis center). In this case, the player who operates the operation members 310 and 4310 can recognize that there has been a change from the normal state by visually recognizing the state change of the operation members 310 and 4310. Can improve expectations.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing member 340 is biased toward the second position state side, the opening / closing member 340 rotates to a predetermined position regardless of the operation depth of the operation member 310, and the opening / closing member 4340. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing member 340 rotates regardless of the operation depth of the operation member 310 until the third position state, which is a combination thereof, that is, the state between the first position state and the second position state of the opening / closing member 340. Once the operation member 310 stays there, and the operation member 310 is further pushed in, the opening / closing member 340 may rotate in accordance with the pushing depth of the operation member 310. In this case, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching device 400 by arranging the switching device 400 below the opening / closing member 340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by attaching a non-permeable film to the bottom surface of the operation member 310 and cutting out only a portion of the film that faces the opening / closing member 340, the opening / closing member 340 can be visually recognized through the operation member 310, but portions other than the opening / closing member 340 (The part of the switching device 400) may be configured so as not to be visually recognized by being shielded by the film. In this case, it is possible to prevent a game in which the situation of the switching device 400 is grasped by staring at the player and the expectation degree of jackpot is grasped without actually pressing the operation member 310.

  In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing member 340 has been described as a member that rotates, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a member that slides in a double-open manner in a direction that intersects the operation direction of the operation member 310 may be used.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the operation member 310 operated by the player maintains the shape and the opening / closing member 340 that is isolated from the player operates with the operation member 310 interposed therebetween, but is not necessarily limited thereto. is not. For example, the operation member 310 may be operated (deformed) by the player's operation, for example, the upper bottom portion of the operation member 310 may be broken at the center position.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing member 340 is pivotally supported by the base member 320 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a mode in which a plurality of spherical members (beads and the like) are accommodated in the operation device 300 and the spherical members move (bounce off) as the operation member 310 is pushed in may be possible. In this case, the player can perform an unexpected effect.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the state of the opening / closing member 340 is not particularly detected and the presentation is performed by a change in its appearance has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state of the opening / closing member 340 may be detected, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 may be switched depending on the arrangement.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the jackpot expectation degree can be predicted by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operating mode of the opening / closing member 340 may actually affect whether or not a big hit is made. For example, a random number that has already been acquired by the main control device may be rewritten to another random number when the opening / closing member 340 performs a predetermined operation mode. In this case, even if the initial random number is an out-of-range random number, there is a possibility of acquiring a jackpot random number by rewriting.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right, a three-time right, etc.) that increases the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, twice or three times). May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives the player a predetermined game value is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Direction that the button itself breaks. How to break and return can be changed>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means And a return means for returning to the first position, the game machine further comprising a second operation means interposed between the operation means and the operation means and capable of operating synchronously with the operation means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the operating means operates when the second operating means is displaced by a predetermined amount with respect to the operating means in synchronization with the means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a cover member that can form a state in which the button cannot be pushed by covering the button and a state in which the button can be pushed in by being exposed away from the button. There is a gaming machine that produces an effect of changing the appearance around the push button by operating a cover member with a drive motor (see, for example, JP-A-2015-112276). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the cover member is not mechanically engaged with the button, it is difficult to produce an effect in which the operation timing of the button and the cover member is synchronized and synchronized with each other. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the second operation means that is operated between the operation means and the operation means and that can operate synchronously with the operation means is operated by the operation means. Since the operation is performed by displacing the device by a predetermined amount, the timing of the operation of the operation device and the operation of the operation device can be matched. As a result, it is possible to obtain an actual feeling that the player has been involved in the performance related to the operation means by the operation.

  Examples of the second operation means include a means fixed to the operation means, a means that operates synchronously by operating while staying on the operation means in a fixed section during operation of the operation means, and the like.

  In the gaming machine A1, a load is applied from the second operating means to the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the operating means can be started by mechanical engagement, so that the second operating means and the operating means are arranged apart from each other. In comparison, each operation timing can be easily adjusted.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, it is possible to form a variable state in which the operating means is displaced before and after operating the operating means, and an invariant state in which the operating means is disposed at the same position before and after operating the operating means. A gaming machine A3, comprising: a switching means; and a driving means for generating a driving force for arbitrarily changing the state of the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the state of the switching unit can be changed by the driving unit, so that the player who operates the operating unit increases the attention to the operating unit. be able to.

  In addition, the aspect of the position change of the operation means in the variable state is not limited, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, by operating the operating means above a predetermined threshold value, the operating means may change its position by a predetermined amount irrespective of the magnitude of the operating amount, or it corresponds to the operating amount of the operating means. Thus, the displacement amount of the operating means may be increased or decreased.

  Moreover, the behavior of the operation means in the invariant state is not limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, while the player is operating the operating means, the operating means may be maintained at the same position, or while the player is operating the operating means, the operating means is displaced. When the operation of the operation unit is finished, the operation unit may return to the position before the operation.

  In the gaming machine A3, the switching means constitutes the return means, the gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, it is possible to eliminate the need to individually prepare return means for returning the operating means to the first position, and by reducing the number of members, the assembly man-hour can be reduced. This can reduce the cost of components.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the switching means includes a facing portion that is disposed to face the operating means, and the distance between the facing portion and the operating means changes between the variable state and the unchanged state. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the distance between the facing portion and the operating means changes, so that the variable state and the invariable state are switched. Due to the contact between the operating member and the switching means, the operation of the operating means can be mechanically prevented.

  Therefore, it is not necessary to wait for the player to operate the operation means and drive the drive means so as to prevent the operation means from operating at the timing of the operation. Then, it is possible to wait for the operation of the operation means.

  In the gaming machine A5, the switching means is configured to be capable of forming a plurality of types of distances between the facing portion and the operating means when the variable state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of operation amounts of the operating means when the player operates the operating means, so that the player operating the operating means Therefore, attention to the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the operating means is formed of a pair of movable members, a first distance that is a distance between one of the movable members and the facing portion, the other movable member, The gaming machine A7, wherein the switching means is formed so that the second distance, which is the distance between the facing portions, can be configured with different sizes.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the pair of movable members can be arbitrarily changed into a variable state or an invariable state, so that the operating means is composed of a single member. Compared to the case, the operation mode of the operation means can be prepared more. Thereby, the player's attention to the operating means can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A7, the switching unit constitutes the return unit, the switching unit is configured to be operable in both forward and reverse directions, and the pair of movable members return from the second position toward the first position. The gaming machine A8 is configured to be switchable according to the operation mode of the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the change of the state of the switching means is not only the possibility of displacement of the operating means before and after the operation of the operating means, but also a pair of movable members constituting the operating means Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of members (particularly, the number of drive means for driving the switching means) by using the action member also. In other words, the switching of whether or not the operating means (movable member constituting the operating means) is displaced before and after the operation of the operating means by one driving means and the operating means (movable member constituting the second position) at the second position. The position maintenance length can be switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the game machine includes an urging unit that generates an urging force that moves the operating unit toward the second position, and the second operating unit moves the operating unit to the first position. It is possible to form a fixed state to be maintained and a release state in which the operating means is movable from the first position, and the second operating means is moved from the fixed state by operating the operating means by a predetermined amount. A gaming machine A9 that is in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, is the load related to the operation of the operation means generated by the urging means, and can the operation means be operable in the second operation means? By giving the role of switching whether or not, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the operating means from the operating member, and to prevent the reaction force received by the player operating the operating means from changing due to the arrangement of the operating means can do. This can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in reaction force during operation.

  In the gaming machine A9, when the second operation means forms a fixed state, the operation means starts moving from the first position toward the second position, so that the fixing force of the second operation means increases. A gaming machine A10 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the operating means is moved from the first position to the second position by an impact given to the gaming machine by the player and vibrations of other vibrating members. When the load to be increased unintentionally and the operating means is about to start operating from the first position, the fixing means is configured to increase the fixing force, so that the operating means moves from the first position. It can be made easy to prevent.

  In the gaming machine A9 or A10, the switching means applies a predetermined urging force to the operating means regardless of the state of the switching means when the operating means is operated beyond a predetermined threshold. A gaming machine A11 comprising a force means.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9 or A10, the effect of preventing the player from determining the state of the operating means by the reaction force applied to the player via the operating means, and a predetermined threshold value The effect of providing the player with an indication of the operation amount by applying the urging force from the reaction force means to the operation means when operated as described above can be achieved by only one device, that is, the switching means. . Thereby, the arrangement | positioning number of a drive means can be reduced.

<Whether or not the operating means changes depending on the button press mode>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means A gaming machine comprising a return means for returning to the first position, comprising a switching means for switching an operation mode of the operation means required for the operation means to perform a predetermined operation.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a button that identifies a pressing state of two or more values depending on how it is pressed (see, for example, JP-A-2008-119165). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the difference in the identified push-down mode is notified by whether or not the movable accessory is driven, and the mode of the button as the operation target does not change, so the effect by the button is There is a problem that it cannot be said that the attention of the buttons can be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the switching means is configured so that the operating means that operates in accordance with the operation of the operating means can be switched between the operation modes of the operating means required to operate. Differences in the operation mode of the operation means can be reflected in the operation of the operation means. Therefore, an effect that changes depending on the operation mode of the operation means can be performed by the operation means, and the attention of the operation means can be improved, and the attention of the operation means related to the operation of the operation means can be improved. Can be made.

  Note that the operation means operating means that the player is operating so clearly that the player can confirm the operation. That is, the mode of opening for a moment and returning immediately is an operation that is misunderstood as a malfunction, and does not include such an operation.

  In addition, as a difference of the operation mode which operates an operation means, it does not limit at all, A several aspect is illustrated. For example, the distance for operating the operating means may be different, and the period for operating the operating means may be different. Further, the frequency of operating the operating means may be different.

  In the gaming machine B1, the switching unit is interposed between the operation unit and the operation unit, and permits a movement of the operation unit to the second position, and a regulation state different from the permitted state. Is configured to be able to change the operation mode that forms the permissible state and to displace the interposition unit in advance according to the operation mode corresponding to the permissible state. And a gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, an operating mode in which an intervening means displaced by the displacing means is interposed between the operating means and the operating means, and allows the operating means to move to the second position. Since the intervening means is changed in advance in accordance with the player's operation mode, it operates based on the player's operation compared to the case where the operation mode of the operating means is determined by driving other members corresponding to the player's operation mode. Responsiveness until the means operates can be improved, and the certainty of operation of the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B2, the reaction force returned to the player when the operation means is operated is made equal regardless of the position of the interposition means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, it is possible to prevent the reaction force returned to the player from changing at the position of the intervening means, so that the player feels uncomfortable when operating the operating means. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine B3, the switching means includes a reaction force means for applying a predetermined urging force to the operation means when the operation means is operated above a predetermined threshold. B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the reaction force means can provide the player with an indication of the amount of operation as to whether or not the operation has been performed beyond a predetermined threshold as a reaction force change. it can. This allows the player to intuitively switch the operation mode between operating with a large amount of operation or operating with a small amount of operation compared to when the amount of operation is notified by voice or video. Can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the switching unit includes an operation time switching unit that changes a state in contact with the operation unit and changes a movable range of the operation unit by changing the state. A gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the second means has an operation time switching means for changing the state by contact with the operating means and changing the movable range of the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a time delay from the time when the operation means is operated until the state change of the operation time switching means, as compared with the case where the operation time switching means is driven by an electric motor or the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the operating means operates even if the condition for starting the operation of the operating means switched by the switching means is not satisfied.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the switching unit is hidden from view by the player and is configured to be operable in both forward and reverse directions, and operates in the same direction in either the forward direction or the reverse direction. By doing so, it is possible to form an intermediate arrangement in which the operation mode of the operation means required for the operation means to start operation after switching can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B5, it is difficult to predict the state of the switching means even if the player listens carefully to the operation sound of the switching means. Thereby, the attention of the operating means can be maintained until the operating means is operated.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the return means is formed by the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the switching means is also used as the returning means, so that the switching means is arranged compared to the case where each is constituted by other members. Installation space can be secured. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare an individual member as the return means, the component cost can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the operation mode switched by the switching unit corresponds to the operation amount of the operation unit, and regardless of the operation amount, the presence or absence of the operation is detected by a single detection unit. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, it is possible to prevent the number of detection means from increasing while changing the effect due to the difference in the operation amount of the operation means. it can.

  In the gaming machine B2, the reaction force returned to the player at the time of operation of the operation means is changed by changing the state of the interposition means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, the reaction force returned to the player varies depending on the state of the intervening means, so the reaction force upon operation of the operating means causes the player to You can notice changes in

  In the gaming machine B2, the switching means includes a first urging means for generating a urging force that presses the interposition means against the operation direction of the operation means, and the operation means is separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance or more. Release means for releasing the urging force of the urging means, and a moving space is formed in which the interposing means can move relative to the operating means in the operating direction of the operating means, and the moving space is interposed in the intervening space. The allowable state is formed by relative movement of the means, and a load in the direction along the operation direction of the operation means that is smaller than the urging force of the first urging means is applied to the interposition means. A gaming machine B10 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of B2, the urging force by the first urging means is released by the arrangement of the operating means, and the interposing means moves due to the load in the direction opposite to the urging force. It is possible to secure a period from the time when the intervention means is allowed to be allowed after being separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance or more. Accordingly, it is possible to provide gameability that allows the operating means to be moved to the second position by operating the operating means for a certain period or longer.

<Deformation of operating means → Change the interval until return to improve attention after pressing>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means A game machine comprising: a return means for returning to the first position; and a switching means for switching a mode of reaction of the operation means with respect to an operation by changing an operation mode of the operation means. Machine C1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, by changing the elastic force of the biasing spring for returning the button in advance, the repulsive force felt by the player who pressed the button is changed and used for the production. (See, for example, JP 2010-252949 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the button is still moved to the end of the moving range and stopped, and it is difficult to recognize a change occurring in the button at a glance. In addition, since it is difficult for a player who receives various information (video and audio) during a game to recognize a change in the repulsive force received from the button, the button change is sufficiently reflected in the production. There was no problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the switching of the operation mode of the operation unit with respect to the operation occurs due to the change in the operation mode of the operation unit, the player can visually check the operation unit to switch by the switching unit. Can easily grasp that happened. Thereby, the attention of the operating means and the operating means can be improved.

  Further, since the operation of the operating means occurs when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the attention of the operating means and the operating means after the operation from being reduced.

  Here, the “period until the return” is not particularly limited. For example, it may be a period until the return starts or a period until the return to the second position is completed.

  Moreover, the mode of switching the reaction of the operating means with respect to the operation is not particularly limited. For example, the operation means after the operation may be prevented from returning to the position before the operation (stopped in the middle), or before the operation means after the operation is returned to the position before the operation. It is also possible to repeat the pause in several stages. Moreover, you may comprise so that the reaction force given to a player may change.

  In the gaming machine C1, the switching means can switch the return after the operation of the operation means in a state in which the operation means is located at the second position so that it can be delayed.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the switching means can delay the return after the operation of the operation means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly operating the operation means at unnecessary timing. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the operating means from being damaged due to unnecessary repeated hitting.

  Further, since the state where the operating means is arranged at the second position corresponds to the case where the return of the operating means is delayed, it is possible to indicate that the manner of return of the operating means has changed by paying attention to the operating means. Can be easily grasped by a person.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means passes through the third position which is in the middle while operating from the first position to the second position, and the switching means is an operation of the operating means. The mode is configured to be switchable between a first operation mode in which the operation unit operates to the second position and a second operation mode in which the operation unit operates to the third position and does not reach the second position. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the mode of reaction of the operating means is switched depending on whether or not the operating means reaches the second position.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operation mode of the operation means can be formed by a plurality of first operation modes and second operation modes. In the second operation mode, the response mode of the operating means is maintained the same as when the operating means does not operate, so that the attention to the operating means is maintained even after the operating means is operated. Can do.

  Note that the second position and the third position are desirably different to the extent that it is difficult for the player to visually identify the difference. This makes it difficult for the player to visually identify the state of the operating means after the operation, and to grasp whether or not the mode of reaction of the operating means has been switched to the operating means immediately after the operation. You can maintain your attention.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the operating means abuts against a side surface of the operating means along the operating direction of the operating means at the second position.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the operating means is arranged at the second position, so that the operating means abuts against the side surface of the operating means along the operating direction, Since it acts in such a manner as to prevent the operation means from operating, the force for operating the operation means can be effectively applied to the operation means, and the reproducibility of the operation of the operation means can be maintained.

  In the gaming machine C4, in a state where the operating means is arranged at the second position, the operating means is arranged at the terminal position of the movement width in the operating direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C4, even when the player tries to operate the operating means in a state where the operating means is disposed at the second position, the operating means does not move any further. Therefore, even if the player forcibly operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the operating means from being damaged by the load generated between the operating means and the operating means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machine C6 is configured in such a manner that the operation unit returns to the first position by operating the switching unit by a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the switching means for switching the operation mode of the operating means can be used as the means for returning the operating means to the first position. Compared to a case where another means for returning the operating means to the first position is prepared, the arrangement space of the switching means can be expanded and the number of parts can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the switching means can switch a change mode of a load applied to the player via the operation means corresponding to an operation amount of the operation means in a plurality of types. A gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the switching means changes the manner in which the load applied to the player via the operating means in accordance with the operation amount of the operating means is changed in a plurality of types. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that the player operates the operation means in an operation mode in which the load change mode can be easily determined. That is, it is possible to suppress an operation mode in which the operation unit is struck and promote an operation mode in which the operation unit is pushed in over time, so that the load received by the operation unit by the operation can be reduced, and the operation unit is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine C7, the switching unit is configured to be able to maintain the operation unit at the second position, and a load applied to the operation unit by operation of the operation unit is arranged at the second position. A gaming machine C8, which is configured to be switchable so as to be minimized when played.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the load applied from the operating means to the operating means can be minimized, By maintaining the operating means at the second position, the load applied to the operating means by the operation of the operating means can be reduced, and damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

<Push-in operation at a timing outside the instruction-> Drive control remains the same and does not move correctly>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means In a gaming machine comprising a return means for returning to the first position and a notifying means for notifying a player of a period for operating the operating means, the operating means is outside the period notified by the notifying means. A gaming machine D1 comprising a switching unit that is switched from the first state to the second state when the operation is performed, and capable of changing an operation mode of the operation unit by switching the state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the stopper member that restricts the movement of the button is displaced, and a state in which the button cannot be pushed down can be formed, thereby making it possible to suppress a meaningless continuous hitting operation. (For example, refer to JP2012-115586A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the button does not descend in the first place and it is not possible to detect that the player is pushing down, it is a specification that an inexperienced player cannot push down the button (hard Even if you misunderstand that it is a button) and try to push it down with a greater force (incorrect operation), you can't give an alarm from the gaming machine side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the state is switched when the operation unit is operated outside the period in which the operation is prompted by the notification unit, and the switching unit can change the operation mode of the operation unit by switching the state. Therefore, even an unfamiliar player can be made aware that an erroneous operation is performed by visually recognizing the operation mode of the operation means.

  In addition, the operating mode of the operating means changes, so that the operating means cannot be pushed in, leading to the player's hand hurting, or the effect is interrupted by the player's operation, such as when the liquid crystal effect changes. Can be prevented. Therefore, a player who dares to perform an erroneous operation can continue the game as usual. That is, the player can select how to operate the operation means.

  In addition, the mode of notification by the notification unit is not limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a mode in which characters such as “push” and “PUSH” are displayed on a liquid crystal display device, a sound such as “now” may be output from an acoustic device, and predetermined conditions are set. It may be considered that the notification has been made by aligning them (so-called “back button”).

  The profit that the player can obtain from the operation of the operating means when operating the operating means outside the notification period is set to be equal to or less than the profit that the player can obtain from the operation of the operating means when operating during the notification period. Anyway.

  In this case, since it is not disadvantageous for the player to operate during the notification period compared to when operating outside the notification period, it is desirable to obtain a little more advantageous information from the operation mode of the operation means (for example, the jackpot expectation degree) It is possible to direct the player to operate the operation means according to the notification of the notification means. Thereby, it can suppress that a player carries out a meaningless repeated operation of an operation means in periods other than the period alert | reported by an alerting | reporting means. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently enhance the deterrence against a player who is highly emotional from repeatedly hitting the button.

  In addition, the aspect of the profit which a player obtains is not limited, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, it is possible to use a profit that can grasp the jackpot expectation degree (expectation for occurrence of a special gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state) with high accuracy, or the ball can easily reach the winning opening when the opening and closing member of the electric tulip is open The profit which can grasp | ascertain a timing may be sufficient, and the profit which can grasp | ascertain the firing strength and the firing timing which a player tends to become advantageous may be sufficient.

  The gaming machine D1 includes reaction force generation means for applying a reaction force to the player via the operation means, and the reaction force provided by the reaction force generation means is equal regardless of whether there is an operation outside the notification period. A gaming machine D2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the reaction force applied to the player by the reaction force generating means does not change regardless of whether or not there is an operation outside the notification period. Even a player who operates the operating means can operate the operating means without feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, it is possible to improve attention to the operation means by preventing the player from noticing that the difference in the operation mode has changed due to the difference in the reaction force.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the switching means includes a contact means for changing an operation mode of the operation means by contact, a drive means for driving the contact means, and an operation outside the notification period of the notification means. Displacement means capable of changing the state from the first state to the second state when the operation means operates in the second state, the displacement means in the second state between the operation means and the contact means. A gaming machine characterized in that an operation mode of the operation means changes in accordance with an operation of the operation means when the displacement means is interposed between the operation means and the contact means. D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement means is in the second state, and the operation mode of the operation means is changed by being interposed between the operation means and the contact means. Even if the mode of the switching unit with respect to the operating member of the contacting unit is not switched, the operating mode of the operating unit can be changed depending on whether or not the player operates the operating unit outside the notification period of the reporting unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the drive means for driving the contact means, as compared with the case where the mode of the contact means with respect to the operation means is switched when the player operates the operation means.

  In addition, the arrangement | positioning place of a displacement means is not limited. For example, it may be disposed on the contact means, may be disposed on the operation means, or may be disposed on another means disposed between the contact means and the operation means.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is provided with detecting means for detecting that the displacement means has changed to the second state.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, since the detecting means can detect that the displacement means has changed to the second state, it is outside the notification period of the notification means without collating with the notification of the notification means. It can be determined that the operating means has been operated. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the control flow for determining that the operation means is operated outside the notification period of the notification means.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operation mode of the operation unit that occurs when the displacement unit is interposed between the operation unit and the contact unit is any of cases where the operation unit is not operated outside the notification period. A game machine D5, which is also different from the operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operating mode of the operating means that occurs when the displacement means is interposed between the operating means and the contacting means is outside the notification period of the operating means. Since it is different from any operation mode when the operation is not performed, even when the player unintentionally operates the operation unit outside the notification period of the notification unit, it is possible to pay attention to the operation mode of the operation unit. It can be noticed that the operation means is operated in an operation mode different from usual.

  In addition, compared with the case where the display of the liquid crystal device is changed (for example, an error is displayed) or the abnormality is notified by the sound / lighting device, the operation means is not excessively stressed. It is possible to produce an effect that only noticed players are noticed.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operation mode of the operation means that occurs when the displacement means is interposed between the operation means and the contact means is when the operation means is not operated outside the notification period. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being equivalent to any operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operating mode of the operating means that occurs when the displacement means is interposed between the operating means and the contacting means is outside the notification period of the operating means. Since it is equivalent to one of the operation modes when the operation is not performed, the operation mode of the operation means currently occurring is caused by the intervention of the displacement means, or is caused without the intervention of the displacement means. However, it is difficult for the player to grasp, and it is possible to produce an effect that confuses the player who operates the operation means outside the notification period of the notification means. Thus, the player can be directed not to operate the operation means outside the notification period of the notification means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the driving means is configured to be drivable in a first driving mode in which the displacement means is switched from the second state to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the driving means is driven in the first driving mode even if the player operates the operating means outside the notification period of the notification means. As a result, the displacement means is switched from the second state to the first state. Therefore, by making it impossible to grasp the drive mode of the drive unit, whether the operation mode of the operation unit is caused by the intervention of the displacement unit or not It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the means is present without intervention.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, and D1 to D7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, and D1 to D7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, and D1 to D7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device (part of the notification means)
310 Operation member (operation means)
330 Clutch member (second operating means)
340, 2340, 4340 Opening / closing member (operation means, movable member)
340a Open / close member (part of movable member)
340b Open / close member (part of movable member)
345 Adjustment arm (part of movement means, part of movable member)
400 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
420, 2420, 3420 Adjustment step (opposite part)
490, 4590 Drive motor (drive means)
2340a First opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2340b Second opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2340c Third opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2340d Fourth opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2400 Switching device (part of return means, switching means)
3400 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
3410 Ring body part (part of displacement means)
3440 1st operation | movement apparatus (a part of interposition means, switching means at the time of operation)
3450 Second operating device (part of intervening means, switching means at operation)
4310 Operation member (operation means, part of switching means, intervening means)
4312 Swelling part (second operating means)
4500 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
4520 slide member (part of displacement means, part of contact means)
4530 1st return member (a part of contact means)
4540 Second return member (part of contact means)
5400 Switching device (part of return means, switching means)
5413 Detected member (part of detection means)
5420 Adjustment step (opposite part, part of contact means)
5450 First divided annular member (part of displacement means)
5460 Second divided annular member (part of displacement means)
6360 Moving cover member (displacement means)
6500 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
7301e Push-up member (part of displacement means, first biasing means, switching means)
7320 Operation cover (operation means)
7324 Restriction part (release means)
7500 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
NB1 Torsion spring (part of return means, biasing means)
KC51 detection sensor (part of detection means)
KC71 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 spring (part of reaction force generation means)
SP2 spring (part of reaction force generation means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an opening and closing member that can form a state in which the button cannot be pushed by covering the button and a state in which the button can be pushed by leaving the button. There is a gaming machine that produces an effect of changing the appearance around a button by operating a drive motor (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-112276, A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement regarding the operation of the button and the opening / closing member.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the operation of the button and the opening / closing member.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operating means operated by a player, a first position in accordance with an operation of the operating means, and a second position different from the first position. And a return means for returning the operating means to the first position. The game machine is interposed between the operating means and the operating means. Second operating means that can be synchronized with the operating means, and the second operating means is displaced by a predetermined amount with respect to the operating means in synchronization with the operating means, whereby the operating means operates.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operation of the operation means and the operation means can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member, a clutch member, an opening / closing member, and a switching device. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is an expanded view of the outer peripheral surface of a switching apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the IX-IX line of FIG. FIG. 12 is a top view of the operation device when viewed in the direction of arrow XII in FIG. 11. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a top view of the operation device in the arrow XIV direction view of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XIX-XIX line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXI-XXI line | wire of FIG. (A)-(d) is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. (A)-(d) is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. (A) And (b) is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. It is a model figure of an opening-and-closing member. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXVII-XXVII line | wire of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member, a clutch member, an opening / closing member, and a switching device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the state of each opening-and-closing member, (b) is a table | surface which illustrates how to replace the structure of each opening-and-closing member. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the state of each opening / closing member, (b)) is a table | surface which illustrates how to replace the structure of each opening / closing member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member, a clutch member, an opening / closing member, and a switching device. It is a top view of a main body ring part and an adjustment step part. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXXVIII-XXXVIII line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XL-XL line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XL-XL line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XL-XL line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of the operation device in a 4th embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of the switching device, and (b) is a top view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIXb in FIG. 49 (a). (A) is a front view of one first return member, (b) is a top view of the first return member as viewed in the direction of arrow Lb in FIG. 50 (a), and (c) is FIG. It is a side view of the 1st return member in the arrow Lc direction view of (a). (A) is a front view of one second return member, (b) is a top view of the second return member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIb in FIG. 51 (a), and (c) is FIG. It is a side view of the 2nd return member in the arrow LIc direction view of (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LVII-LVII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LVII-LVII line | wire of FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of the reaction force given to the player who pushed the operation member and operated. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a switching device. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the main body ring part in the LXIIa-LXIIa line of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. It is a top view of an operation device. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LXV-LXV line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is a partial side view of the opening-and-closing member and switching device in the arrow LXVIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a partial side view of the opening-and-closing member and switching device in the arrow LXVIIIa direction view of FIG. (A) to (c) are side views of the switching device and the opening / closing member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of the switching device, and (b) is a top view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a). (A) is a front view of an opening / closing member, (b) is a side view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a), and (c) is a front view of the movable cover member. (D) is a side view of the movable cover member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIId in FIG. 72 (c), and (e) is a top view of the movable cover member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIe in FIG. 72 (c). . It is a top view of an operation device. FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 73. FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. 73. It is a top view of an operation device. FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. 76. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in 7th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the LXXXa-LXXXa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the LXXXa-LXXXa line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a long period of time. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a short period. (A) is a top view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device in the direction of arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is an arrow LXXXVIc in FIG. 86 (a). It is a front view of the switching device in the direction view. It is a top view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LXXXIX-LXXXIX line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the LXXXIX-LXXXIX line | wire of FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a long period of time. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of the operation member at the time of pushing in an operation cover for a short period.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 27, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a specific winning port 65a, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A specific winning port 65 a is provided below the first winning port 64. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71. The out ports 71 are provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 490, 4590.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the operation device 300 will be described. The operation device 300 is an apparatus for causing a player to participate in the production by an operation. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, FIGS. 7A and 7B are front perspective views of the operation device 300, 8 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 320, the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 340, and the switching device 400, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 6 and 9, the front frame 14 is partially illustrated. 7A and 7B, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. 6 and 7A, the first position state of the opening / closing member 340 is illustrated, and in FIG. 7B, the second position state of the opening / closing member 340 is illustrated.

  The operation device 300 causes the state change of the opening / closing member 340 illustrated in FIGS. 6, 7A, and 7B to be executed in response to the operation of the operation member 310, and the state change is a game. It is an apparatus that produces an effect that improves the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize.

  The operation device 300 has a function of giving a rendering effect to the operation device 300 by visually recognizing a part of the internal mechanism, and is formed with an opening 301a at the bottom center portion of the inverted cup shape and the front surface. An outer wall member 301 fixed to the front frame 14 in a mode in which an operation device such as the switching device 400 is accommodated between the frame 14 and a shape in which the width in the height direction of the outer wall member 301 is shortened. An overlap member 302 that has an opening 302a that is coaxial with and substantially the same shape (slightly larger in diameter) as the opening 301a and that is overlapped and fixed in such a manner as to form an internal space with the outer wall member 301, is inserted into the openings 301a and 302a. A dish-shaped operation member 310 which is a member whose movement is restricted by an internal space formed by the outer wall member 301 and the overlapping member 302 and is made of a light-transmitting material, and its operation A base member 320 disposed on the back side in the pushing direction of the material 310, a clutch member 330 supported on the base member 320 so as to be slidable in the pushing direction of the operation member 310, and the clutch member 330 being fitted The position of the opening / closing member 340 is defined by a pair of opening / closing members 340 pivotally supported by the base member 320 and abutting the opening / closing member 340, as viewed in the pushing operation direction. A switching device 400 that is configured in a donut shape and is supported by the base member 320 so as to be rotatable around the base member 320, and a drive motor 490 that rotates the switching device 400 are mainly provided.

  The outer wall device 301 has an opening 301a formed as a circular through hole at the center of the bottom of the inverted cup shape, and an upper surface that is spaced apart by 90 degrees on the radial outer side of the opening 301a with respect to the center of the opening 301a. And a recessed portion 301b recessed downward from the main.

  The recessed portion 301b is arranged so as to overlap the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 310 in the vertical direction, and houses the lower end portion of the spring SP1 that returns the operation member 310 upward (see FIG. 9).

  The operation member 310 is disposed on the front side of the upper plate 17 of the front frame 14, is formed in an inverted cup shape, and is supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A projecting portion 312 projecting toward the outside, an outer extending portion 313 extending outwardly from the peripheral surface portion of the main body portion 311 in a flange shape, and the side opposite to the upper base with respect to the extending portion 313 A misalignment prevention portion 314 extending to the inner side, and an inner extension portion 315 extending in a flange shape from the extension end of the misalignment prevention portion 314 to the inner peripheral side.

  The main body 311 has a circular outer periphery and has substantially the same diameter in the vertical direction.

  The protruding portion 312 is a portion that comes into contact with a contact portion 332 of a clutch member 330 described later. When the operation member 310 is pushed in by the projecting portion 312, even if the clutch member 330 and the operation member 310 come into contact with each other, the load applied to the main body portion 311 can be reduced and the main body portion 311 can be prevented from cracking. can do.

  The outer extending portion 313 is a portion that is inserted into a space formed between the bottom portion of the outer wall member 301 and the bottom portion of the overlapping member 302, and is formed in an annular shape around the periphery of the main body portion 311. The vertical movement end position of the operation member 310 is formed at a position where the outer extending portion 313 contacts the upper surface of the bottom portion of the outer wall member 301 or the lower surface of the bottom portion of the overlapping member 302.

  The misregistration prevention portion 314 is an annular portion having a diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the main body portion 311 and extending below the main body portion 311, and the extending tip is inserted into the opening 301 a of the outer wall member 301. The Here, the opening 301a is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the misalignment prevention portion 314, and the opening 302a is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body portion 311. Supporting at the two positions can prevent the operation member 310 from being disturbed (displaced in the radial direction) while allowing the operation member 310 to slide in the vertical direction.

  The base member 320 is a member that is fixed to the front frame 14 vertically below the operation member 310, and is centered on a vertical line that passes through the center of the rotationally symmetric main body 321 and the convex portion 312 of the operation member 310. A cylindrical portion serving as an axis, and a recessed portion 322 that is recessed vertically downward from the upper surface of the main body portion 321, and is spaced apart from the recessed portion 322 in the horizontal direction and perpendicular to the recessed direction of the recessed portion 322. A shaft portion 323 that is a pair of rotating shaft rods that are extended and supported by a portion protruding from the upper surface of the main body portion 321, an extended bottom portion 324 that extends radially outward from the lower end of the main body portion 321, Is mainly provided.

  The extended bottom portion 324 includes a support protrusion 324a that protrudes from the main body portion 321 toward the outer side in the radial direction at the periphery thereof, and an upper surface of the extended bottom portion 324 that extends upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 321. And a circular projecting portion 324b that projects along an annular shape coaxial with the central axis.

  Since the contact ridge between the switching device 400 and the base member 320, which will be described later, can be reduced by the support protrusions 324a and the circular protrusions 324b, the operating resistance of the switching device 400 can be reduced, and the drive The driving force required for the motor 490 can be reduced.

  The clutch member 330 is a member that is fitted in the recessed portion 322 of the base member 320 and moves up and down along the recessed direction, and is formed from a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recessed portion 322. A main body bar portion 331 in which a lower portion is fitted in the recessed portion 322, and extends from the upper end of the main body bar portion 331 coaxially with the main body bar portion 331 and has a smaller diameter than the main body bar portion 331. A contact portion 332, an extended portion 333 that extends in the radial direction from the upper end of the main body bar portion 331, and a sealing portion that supports the main body portion 331 on the upper end side and is fixed to the base member 320 on the lower end side. 334, an E ring 335 that is fitted into the main body bar portion 331 from the radial direction and has an action of expanding the outer diameter of the main body bar portion 331, and a lower side of the E ring 335 between the sealing portion 334 and the base member 320 Placed in E A spring SP2 for generating biasing force for moving the main rod portion 331 upwardly through the grayed 335 mainly comprises a.

  The abutting portion 332 is a portion that abuts against the protruding portion 312 of the operation member 310, and the clutch member 330 is lowered by being abutted and pushed down. Here, when the clutch member 330 is biased by the spring SP2 on the opposite side of the operation member 310, even if the operation member 310 is operated violently (at high speed), the protruding portion 312 is caused by the interference action of the elastic force. And the contact portion 332 can be prevented from being excessively loaded.

  The extending portion 333 includes an annular recess 333a that is recessed in a donut shape from the upper surface downward. The annular recess 333a acts to prevent a change in the posture of the opening / closing member 330 in the first position state of the opening / closing member 340 shown in FIG.

  The sealing portion 334 is formed in a half pipe shape in which the inner diameter of the upper end portion inner hole 334 b of the opening is formed with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body rod portion 331 and is divided by a straight line passing through the central axis of the main body rod portion 331. After the pair of half members 334 a are combined, the base member 320 is fixed.

  The method of assembling the sealing portion 334 to the base member 320 will be described in detail. First, the E-ring 335 is fitted into the main body rod portion 331 from the radial direction, and then the pair of half members are accommodated inside the cylinder. Combine 334a. Thereafter, the spring SP2 is inserted into the sealing portion 334 from the lower end side of the main body bar portion 331, and in this state, the lower end portion of the main body bar portion 331 is inserted into the recessed portion 322 of the base member 320, while the sealing portion The sealing portion 334 is fixed to the base member 320 by fitting the lower end portion of 334 to the base member 320.

  By assembling in this way, it is possible to prevent the sealing portion 334 from falling off from the intermediate member obtained by combining the pair of half members 334a with the main body bar portion 331. Therefore, the main body bar portion 331 and the sealing portion 334 can be connected in advance, so that the production efficiency can be improved in the production line.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the main body bar portion 331 is supported at two points, that is, the recessed portion 322 of the base member 320 and the upper end inner hole 334 b of the sealing portion 334, and thus the main body bar portion 331 of the clutch member 330. Can be suppressed, and the movement width when the clutch member 330 moves in the vertical direction can be ensured without waste.

  The opening / closing member 340 is a long member that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 323 of the base member 320, and a main body plate portion 341 that is formed in a long plate shape when viewed in the axial direction, and a lower end portion of the main body plate portion 341. A support hole 342 formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 323, an engagement claw 343 projecting from the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 341 on the side facing the clutch member 330, An adjustment receiving portion 344 that protrudes from a side surface that intersects with the support hole 342 of the main body plate portion 341, and an adjustment that protrudes from the side surface opposite to the side facing the clutch member 330 at the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 341. The arm portion 345, the bulging portion 346 bulging from the surface of the main body plate portion 341 facing the sealing portion 334, and the shaft portion 323 are wound around and locked by the convex receiving portion 344, thereby opening and closing the opening / closing member 340. Turn to outside position Mainly includes a torsion spring NB1, the generating a biasing force for.

  In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the expected degree of jackpot can be grasped by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340. Therefore, by making the player visually recognize the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340, the player can be relieved.

  The main body plate portion 341 is formed such that the lower half portion to be pivotally supported is formed in a plate shape, and the upper half portion connected thereto is formed from a three-dimensional shape (substantially rectangular shape) enlarged in the plate thickness direction. .

  The engaging claw 343 is formed in a bowl shape protruding downward from the tip (projecting toward the shaft portion 323 side), and in a state where the opening / closing member 340 is closest to the clutch member 330 (first position state). Then, it engages with the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 (see FIG. 9). The engagement claw 343 engages with the annular recess 333 a, thereby preventing the opening / closing member 340 from rotating around the shaft portion 323. That is, the opening / closing member 340 is prevented from moving from the first position state to a state (second position state or the like) separated from the clutch member 330.

  The adjustment arm portion 345 is a member that defines the end of rotation of the opening / closing member 340 by contacting an upper surface of the switching device 400 described later. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the end of rotation of the opening / closing member 340 is mainly selectable from three types.

  The bulging portion 346 is a portion that defines the rotation end of the opening / closing member 340 by contacting the sealing portion 334. In this embodiment, the surface facing the sealing portion 334 is configured in a planar shape, but may be configured in a curved surface shape that matches the curvature of the outer peripheral surface of the sealing portion 334.

  The switching device 400 is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body portion 321 of the base member 320, so that the periphery of the base member 320 can be relatively rotated, and a donut-shaped main body ring portion 410 viewed from above An adjustment step portion 420 that is formed on the upper surface of the main body ring portion 410 and stops the rotation operation of the opening and closing member 340 by contact with the adjustment arm portion 345; Gear teeth 430 engraved in this manner, and a drive motor 490 that drives a drive gear 491 meshed with the gear teeth 430.

  The switching device 400 is a device configured to be able to change the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340, and is disposed below (on the back side) of the operation device 300 from the opening / closing member 340 when viewed from the player. Thereby, while making it easy for a player to visually recognize the opening / closing member 340, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the switching device 400.

  The adjustment step portion 420 is configured in such a manner that the height of the upper side surface changes for each angular position (phase) with respect to the axis center when the main body ring portion 410 is viewed in the rotation axis direction. Therefore, the position at which the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 stops depends on which surface of the adjustment step 420 the adjustment arm 345 contacts.

  The gear teeth 430 rotate when driving force is transmitted from the driving gear 491. As the gear teeth rotate, the main body annular portion 410 and the adjustment step portion 420 formed on the upper surface thereof similarly rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the adjustment stepped portion 420 has a first surface 421 whose upper surface is the highest step h0 and a second surface 422 that is one step lower than the first surface 421 and the middle step h1. And the third surface 423, which is the lowest low step h2, and each connection surface that connects the circumferential ends of the respective surfaces (for the high step h0, the middle step h1, and the low step h2). (See FIG. 10). Note that a cut surface θL0 and a third surface 423, which will be described later, are arranged with a difference of approximately 110 degrees with respect to the central axis of the main body ring portion 410.

  In addition, each connecting surface has a volume portion in which the annular shape of the main body ring portion 410 and a solid body (block-shaped member) extending radially from the rotation axis of the main body ring portion 410 overlap each other. It is formed from a mode in which it is recessed in the form of being extracted from the ring portion 410. Therefore, each connection surface is in a mode in which a straight line extending from the connection surface intersects the central axis of the main body ring portion 410 on a plane perpendicular to the axis of the main body ring portion 410.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the operation member 310 is disposed so as to face the upper surface of the outer wall member 301 and the upper surface of the opening / closing member 340 in the direction of the push-in operation. A length until the top surface of 301 or the top surface of the opening / closing member 340 comes into contact is set. In the present embodiment, in a state where the operation member 310 is disposed at the upper end position (see FIG. 9) of the movement range, the distance from the lower surface of the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 310 to the upper surface of the outer wall member 301 is The distance from the upper bottom surface of the main body 311 of 310 to the upper surface of the opening / closing member 340 is shorter. Thereby, even if the operation member 310 is pushed down to the lower end of the movement range, it is possible to prevent the operation member 310 and the opening / closing member 340 from colliding in the vertical direction.

  With reference to FIG. 10, the detail of the relationship between the adjustment step part 420 and the opening-and-closing member 340 is demonstrated. In the description of FIG. 10, FIG. 8 is appropriately referred to.

  FIG. 10 is a development view of the outer peripheral surface of the switching device 400. 10 is developed from the predetermined cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL2 arranged at a position moved by a center angle of 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. FIG. 10 is a developed view, and the lower side of FIG. 10 shows the side surface of the main body ring portion 410 from the cutting line θL2 to the cutting line θL0 arranged at a position shifted by a center angle 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. FIG. 8 is a developed view (see FIG. 8 for the cutting lines θL0 and θL2).

  Here, in FIG. 8, the position intersecting with the straight line drawn up and down is the opposite position across the central axis of the main body ring portion 410 (the protruding receiving portions 344 of the pair of opening and closing members 340 can simultaneously contact each other). Corresponding position).

  As for the main body ring portion 410, cutting lines θL0 to θL3 are drawn vertically on the side surface as a reference line for convenience when the side surface is expanded. Here, from the cutting line θL0, the cutting line θL1 is arranged at a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in top view around the central axis of the main body ring portion 410, and is positioned 180 degrees counterclockwise in top view (see FIG. The cutting line θL2 is disposed at a position (opposite to the cutting line θL0), and the cutting line θL3 is disposed at a position rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above (a position opposite to the cutting line θL1) (see FIG. 8).

  As described above, the adjustment step portion 420 is a portion that contacts the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340, and the opening / closing member 340 moves outward depending on which position of the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 420 abuts. The way of opening (operation mode) when rotated toward the direction changes.

  For example, the shape of the adjustment step portion 420 from the cutting line θL1 to the cutting line θL2 and the shape of the adjustment step portion from the cutting line θL3 to the cutting line θL0 are the same in the relationship between the upper and lower figures in FIG. That is, when the adjustment arm 345 is disposed opposite to the section from the cutting line θL1 to the cutting line θL2 and the section from the cutting line θL3 to the cutting line θL0 of the adjustment step section 420, the opening / closing member that rotates outwardly. 340 rotates to a similar position with a pair of opening and closing members 340.

  On the other hand, the shape of the adjustment step portion 420 from the cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL1 is different from the shape of the adjustment step portion from the cutting line θL2 to the cutting line θL3 in the relationship between the upper and lower figures in FIG. . Specifically, in the section from the cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL1, the second surface 422 is arranged close to the cutting line θL0 (the center position in the circumferential direction of the second surface 422 is cut by 11.25 degrees from the virtual line BK2). In the section from the cutting line θL2 to the cutting line θL3, the second surface 422 is close to the cutting line θL0 side in the section from the cutting line θL0 to the cutting line θL1. The second surface 422 is disposed close to the cutting line θL3 side. Therefore, the operation modes of the opening / closing member 340 can be made different from each other. Next, this will be described in detail.

  As shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 10, a description will be given by drawing three virtual vertical lines at equal intervals between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1. In FIG. 10, virtual lines BK1, BK2, and BK3 are defined in order from the side close to the cutting line θL0. The virtual lines BK 1, BK 2, and BK 3 are a straight line extending radially from the central axis of the main body ring portion 410 and a plane formed by the central axis of the main body ring portion 410, and the circumference of the main body ring portion 410. Corresponds to the line where the plane intersects.

  Since the length in the left-right direction in FIG. 10 corresponds to the size of the angle with respect to the central axis of the main body ring portion 410, the virtual lines BK1, BK2, between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 By BK3, it is divided at equal intervals of 22.5 degrees. Similarly, in the lower diagram of FIG. 10, virtual lines BK1, BK2, and BK3 are drawn between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3.

  Next, the case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where each of the virtual lines BK1, BK2, BK3 is drawn will be described in order, starting with the case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where the cutting line θL0 is drawn.

  When the adjustment arm 345 is in contact with the point where the cutting line θL0 is drawn (the initial state of the main body ring portion 410, see FIG. 6), the adjustment arm 345 is the adjustment step portion in the first position state of the opening / closing member 340. It is already in contact with the first surface 421 of 420. Accordingly, since the opening / closing member 340 cannot move further toward the second position state, even if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the opening / closing member 340 is not provided. Is maintained in the first position state. In FIG. 10, the state in which the adjustment arm 345 can come into contact with the point where the cutting line θL0 is drawn corresponds to the initial state (waiting for instruction) of the main body ring portion 410.

  Next, a case where the adjustment arm part 345 contacts the point where the virtual line BK1 is drawn will be described. This state corresponds to a state in which the main body ring portion 410 of the switching device 400 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  In a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 can contact the point where the virtual line BK1 is drawn (first effect state), the adjustment arm portion 345 (hereinafter referred to as the adjustment arm) disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3. Part 345b) is still in contact with the first surface 421 of the adjustment step part 420, while the adjustment arm part 345 (hereinafter referred to as the adjustment arm part) disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1. 345a) is opposed to the second surface 422, and a space is formed between the second surface 422 and the second surface 422.

  Accordingly, if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the adjustment arm 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is maintained in the first position state. The adjustment arm portion 345a disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 is maintained until the space between the first position state and the second surface 422 is filled (the adjustment arm portion 345 and the second surface 422 are disposed). Rotate until contacted.

  The opening / closing member 340 on which the adjustment arm portion 345a after rotation is disposed is lifted up to the first surface 421 by the adjustment arm portion 345 sliding on the adjustment step portion 420 as the main body ring portion 410 rotates. As a result, the first position state is restored. For example, by rotating the main body ring portion 410 counterclockwise as viewed from above, the other adjustment arm portion 345 can reach the position where the cutting line θL0 is drawn (the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the left in FIG. 10). The adjusting arm 345a can be lifted up to the first surface 421. Further, since the connecting surface between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 is formed to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being overloaded.

  Hereinafter, the opening / closing member 340 provided with the adjustment arm 345a is also referred to as an opening / closing member 340a, and the opening / closing member 340 provided with the adjustment arm 345b is also referred to as an opening / closing member 340b.

  Next, a case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where the virtual line BK2 is drawn will be described. This state corresponds to the state in which the main body ring portion 410 of the switching device 400 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  In a state where the adjustment arm part 345 can contact the point where the virtual line BK2 is drawn (second effect state), the adjustment arm part 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is also the cutting line θL0. And the adjustment arm portion 345a arranged between the cutting line θL1 and the second surface 422, and a space is formed between the adjustment arm portion 345a and the second surface 422.

  Therefore, if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the adjustment arm portion 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is also between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1. The adjustment arm portion 345a disposed in the position also rotates until the space between the first position state and the second surface 422 is filled (until the adjustment arm portion 345 and the second surface 422 come into contact with each other). In addition, the opening / closing member 340 after the rotation is moved to the first position state by the adjustment arm portion 345 sliding on the adjustment step portion 420 and being lifted to the first surface 421 as the main body ring portion 410 rotates. Return. Further, since the connecting surface between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 is formed to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being overloaded.

  Here, from the second effect state, the return mode of the pair of opening and closing members 340 can be changed by switching the rotation direction of the main body ring portion 410 forward and backward. For example, when the main body ring portion 410 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from above (when the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the left in FIG. 10), the opening / closing disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 When the member 340b returns to the first position state earlier than the opening / closing member 340a, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated clockwise as viewed from above (the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the right in FIG. 10). ), The opening / closing member 340b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 returns to the first position state later than the opening / closing member 340a.

  Accordingly, by changing the direction in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated after the operation member 310 is operated by the player in relation to the expected degree of variation occurring at that time, the difference in the return mode of the opening / closing member 340 Therefore, the degree of attention to the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

  Next, a case where the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the point where the virtual line BK3 is drawn will be described. This state corresponds to a state in which the main body ring portion 410 of the switching device 400 is rotated 67.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  In a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 can contact the point where the virtual line BK3 is drawn (third effect state), the adjustment arm portion 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is the second surface. The adjustment arm portion 345a disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 is formed on the first surface of the adjustment step portion 420 while facing the 422 and forming a space between the second surface 422. 421 abuts.

  Therefore, if the engagement between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 is released, the adjustment arm portion 345b disposed between the cutting line θL2 and the cutting line θL3 is moved from the first position to the second surface 422. The adjustment arm 345a disposed between the cutting line θL0 and the cutting line θL1 is rotated until the space between the adjustment arm 345 and the second surface 422 comes into contact with each other. Maintained in the first position state.

  In addition, the opening / closing member 340a after the rotation moves to the first position state by the adjustment arm portion 345 sliding on the adjustment step portion 420 and being lifted up to the first surface 421 as the main body ring portion 410 rotates. Return. For example, by rotating the main body ring portion 410 clockwise as viewed from above, the adjustment arm portion 345b can reach the position where the cutting line θL3 is drawn (the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved to the right in FIG. 10). The adjustment arm 345b can be lifted up to the first surface 421. Further, since the connecting surface between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 is formed to be inclined, it is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being overloaded.

  As described above, rotating the main body ring portion 410 clockwise corresponds to moving the adjustment arm portion 345 rightward in FIG. 10 (illustrated by an arrow CW in FIG. 10). . Conversely, rotating the main body ring portion 410 counterclockwise when viewed from above corresponds to moving the adjustment arm portion 345 leftward in FIG. 10 (illustrated by an arrow CCW in FIG. 10).

  Note that, in a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 can contact the third step 423 of the adjustment step portion 420 (fourth effect state), the opening / closing member 340 rotates at the maximum rotation angle from the first position state. In this case, the surface of the opening / closing member 340 facing the operation member 310 is configured to come into contact with the operation member 310, and details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, a state in which the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 410 is in the initial state will be described. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 6, and FIG. 12 is a top view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XII in FIG.

  In FIG. 11, the operation member 310 before being pushed in is illustrated by an imaginary line. In FIG. 12, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not illustrated for easy understanding. The In FIG. 12, the main body annular portion 410 passes through the cutting line θL0 so that a straight line (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 12) passing through the center of the main body annular portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening / closing members 340 passes. The posture is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by being pressed against the protruding portion 312. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, but the rotation of the adjustment arm portion 345 is regulated by the adjustment step portion 420. The operation of 340 is restricted.

  Therefore, the state of the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state before and after the player operates the operation member 310 (see FIG. 12). In this way, in the initial state, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state regardless of whether or not the operation member 310 is operated. Therefore, an effect of instructing to push the operation member 310 (third symbol display) The opening / closing member 340 can be prevented from opening / closing when the player pushes the operating member 310 even though the device 81, other liquid crystal screen, sound, and lamp effects are not generated. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, a state where the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 410 is in the second effect state will be described. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 6, and FIG. 14 is a top view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XIV in FIG.

  In FIG. 13, the operation member 310 before being pushed is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 14, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not illustrated for easy understanding. The Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the main body annular ring so that a straight line (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 14) passing through the center of the main body ring portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening and closing members 340 passes through the virtual line BK2. The portion 410 is determined in posture. That is, FIG. 14 shows a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by being pressed against the projecting portion 312. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate in directions away from each other. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340 is stopped in a posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 420.

  Therefore, before and after the player operates the operation member 310, the state of the opening and closing member 340 changes from the first position state to the second position state (see FIG. 14). Therefore, since the content of the operation device 300 can be added as information to be given to the player, the attention of the operation device 300 can be improved. For example, by controlling the drive motor 490 so that the difference in expectation degree of jackpot can be identified depending on whether or not the state of the opening / closing member 340 changes, a pre-reading effect can be performed by changing the state of the opening / closing member 340. .

  The direction in which the engaging claws 343 of the opening / closing member 340 arranged in the first position state move (left and right, at the intersection of a circle centered on the shaft portion 323 in FIG. 13 and a line drawn vertically through the shaft portion 323. The direction of the tangent drawn to the circle) and the moving direction (vertical direction) of the clutch member 330 intersect at right angles. Therefore, when the operating member 310 is pushed in and the extending portion 333 of the clutch member 330 is lowered. The load generated between the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 can be reduced. Thereby, the case where the opening / closing member 340 is arranged in the first position state (see FIG. 13, illustrated by an imaginary line) and the case where the opening / closing member 340 is arranged in the second position state (see FIG. 13, shown by a solid line). Thus, the reaction force applied to the player via the operation member 310 can be made equal.

  That is, the reaction force applied to the player via the operation member 310 when the player operates the operation member 310 is mainly constituted by the spring SP1 and the urging force of the spring SP2 included in the clutch member 330. The reaction force does not change greatly depending on whether the opening / closing member 340 is in the first position state or the second position state.

  Thereby, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced by changing the reaction force from the operation member 310. In addition, since it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the opening / closing member 340 from the reaction force, it can be directed to pay attention to the state of the opening / closing member 340, and the attention of the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

  In addition, since an effect is produced by a change in the state of the operation device 300, a lighting device such as an LED is not necessarily required, and cost reduction by reducing the number of LEDs and space saving by omitting LED wiring are achieved. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 is easily prevented from rotating due to an increase in the load applied to the opening / closing member 340 even though the operation member 310 is not operated. The This will be described below.

  In a state where the operation member 310 is not operated, the opening / closing member 340 may unintentionally shake violently due to an impact given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player, vibrations transmitted from other operation members, or the like. In this case, when the load applied to the clutch member 330 from the opening / closing member 340 increases and the extension portion 333 is pushed down by the load from the opening / closing member 340, the engagement between the extension portion 333 and the engaging claw 343 is engaged. The opening / closing member 340 may be erroneously rotated from the first position state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the engaging claw 343 is protruded toward the shaft portion 323 which is the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 340, the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340 are engaged (see FIG. 9). When the opening / closing member 340 starts to rotate, the extension portion 333 is pushed downward (on the shaft portion 323 side) due to interference with the protruding tip of the engagement claw 343. In this case, since the E-ring 335 is also moved downward at the same time, the spring SP2 is contracted. Therefore, a force for maintaining the opening / closing member 340 in the first position (the attachment of the spring SP2 that pushes up the E-ring 335) is applied. (Power) increases. Therefore, the clutch member 330 is pushed down by the opening / closing member 340, and it is possible to easily prevent a malfunction in which the opening / closing member 340 rotates.

  This mechanism for preventing malfunction is not based on controlling a solenoid or the like, but is constituted by a mechanical engagement relationship between the clutch member 330 and the opening / closing member 340. Therefore, it is possible to reliably cope with unexpected impacts and vibrations, and to improve the reliability of the operation of the operation member 300 (suppressing malfunction).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the return operation of the opening and closing member 340 will be described. 15 and 16 are top views of the operation device 300. FIG. 15 illustrates a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. 16 illustrates the main body ring portion 410 from the state illustrated in FIG. A state in which is rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 15, when the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 14, the adjustment member 345 a moves to the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 420. Thus, the opening / closing member 340a (the member on the upper side of FIG. 15, the member disposed on the back side) rotates to the first position state, while the opening / closing member 340b is maintained in the second position state. In FIGS. 22 and 23 described later, the return mode shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 16, when the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the top from the state shown in FIG. 14, the adjustment member 345 b moves to the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 420. Thus, the opening / closing member 340b (the lower member in FIG. 16, a member disposed on the front side) rotates to the first position state, while the opening / closing member 340a is maintained in the second position state. That is, the state of the opening / closing member 340 after rotating the main body ring portion 410 is upside down as compared with FIG. In FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 described later, the return mode shown in FIG.

  Therefore, the return mode of the opening / closing member 340 after the player has operated the operation member 310 to reach the state shown in FIG. 14 can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the main body ring portion 410. To increase attention to the operation device 300 after the operation by configuring the difference as an effect related to a sense of expectation for the occurrence of a special game state such as a jackpot game state (hereinafter referred to as “a jackpot expectation”). Can do.

  Conventionally, the difference in jackpot expectation is, for example, a difference in sound output from a sound output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 (see FIG. 4), a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, or the like). ) 227 (see FIG. 1 and FIG. 4), the player was informed by the difference in the output mode of turning on and off, the difference in emission color, and the like.

  However, there is a risk that the voice notification may be drowned out by a loud sound emitted from other gaming machines, etc., and there is a limit to the easily distinguishable color difference and output mode change in the light notification. There is a problem that the game tends to be monotonous because the number of jackpot expectations is limited to a small number (for example, four types). In addition, in the light notification, the part to be turned on or off may be changed depending on the degree of expectation, but also in this case, a space is required and the player needs to move the line of sight following the light. Eventually, there was a problem that players were not attracting attention.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as will be described later, at least eight types of operation modes of the opening / closing member 340 accompanying the operation of the operation member 310 can be formed. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree classified into at least eight types can be notified by the operation mode of the opening and closing member 340. Further, since the player only needs to pay attention to the opening / closing member 340, it is not necessary to move the line of sight to a plurality of locations, so that attention to the opening / closing member 340 can be maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the adjustment arm 345 b is moved to the first surface 421 of the adjustment step 420 by further rotating 22.5 degrees clockwise (in the same direction) from the state shown in FIG. 15. Since it can be moved, the state which returned a pair of opening-and-closing member 340 to the 1st position state can be formed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the adjustment arm 345a is further rotated by 22.5 degrees counterclockwise (in the same direction) from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to form a state in which the pair of opening / closing members 340 are returned to the first position state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19, the case where the main body ring portion 410 is set to the first effect state will be described. 17 is a top view of the operation device 300, FIG. 18 is a top view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XIX-XIX in FIG.

  In FIGS. 17 and 18, the outer wall member 301, the stacking member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown for easy understanding, and in FIG. 19, the opening / closing member 340a after the rotating operation is shown by an imaginary line. Is done.

  17 shows a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 12, and FIGS. 18 and 19 show the main body ring portion 410 from the state shown in FIG. A state rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise is shown. That is, in FIG. 18, the main body annular portion 410 passes through the virtual line BK1 so that a straight line (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 18) passing through the center of the main body annular portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening and closing members 340 passes. The posture is determined.

  In the state shown in FIG. 19, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by being brought into contact with and pushed into the projecting portion 312. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and only the opening / closing member 340a (right side in FIG. 19) of the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotates. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340a stops when the adjustment arm 345a is in contact with the second surface 422 of the adjustment step 420. After the operation member 310 is operated, the main body ring portion 410 is further rotated 22.5 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above, so that the main body ring portion 410 can be returned to the state shown in FIG. The opening / closing member 340a can be returned to the first position state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the case where the main body ring portion 410 is set to the third effect state will be described. 20 is a top view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXI-XXI in FIG. Note that FIG. 17 is referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS.

  In FIG. 20, the outer wall member 301, the stacking member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown for easy understanding, and in FIG. 21, the opening / closing member 340b after the rotating operation is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  20 and FIG. 21, a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise as viewed from above is illustrated from the state shown in FIG. That is, in FIG. 20, the main body ring portion 410 passes through the virtual line BK3 so that a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of opening / closing members 340 (a line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 20) passes through the virtual line BK3. The posture is determined.

  In the state shown in FIG. 21, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by abutting and pushing the operation member 310. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and only the opening / closing member 340b (left side in FIG. 21) of the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotates. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340b stops in a posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345b contacts the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 420.

  In addition, after the operation member 310 is operated, the main body ring portion 410 is further rotated 22.5 degrees clockwise as viewed from above, so that a straight line passing through the center of the main body ring portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening and closing members 340 is connected. (A line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 20) can pass through the cutting line θL1, so that the adjustment arm 345b can reach the first surface 421 (see FIG. 10), and the opening / closing member 340b is moved to the first position. It can be returned to the position state.

  Therefore, when the player operates the operation member 310, a change occurring in the opening / closing member 340 is changed in advance by changing the state of the main body ring portion 410, so that a plurality of types (at least the mode shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 19 and the embodiment shown in FIGS. 20 and 21).

  Therefore, since the difference in the type of change in the contents of the operation device 300 can be added as information given to the player, the attention of the operation device 300 can be improved. For example, by controlling the drive motor 490 so that the difference in expectation level of jackpots can be identified according to the type of state change of the opening / closing member 340, a pre-reading effect can be performed with the type of state change of the opening / closing member 340. .

  Here, for example, in FIG. 18, even if the main body ring portion 410 is rotated after the opening / closing member 340a is rotated, the state of the opening / closing member 340b does not change. By utilizing this, the state of the opening / closing members 340a and 340b is rotated while the main body ring portion 410 is rotated by rotating the main body ring portion 410 by 22.5 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above from the state shown in FIG. When the operation member 310 is pushed in again, the opening / closing member 340b can be rotated, and as a result, the pair of opening / closing members 340 can be brought into the second position state. The same thing can be performed by rotating the main body ring portion 410 by 22.5 degrees in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top in the state shown in FIG.

  Therefore, by controlling the main body ring portion 410 in a manner that associates the difference in whether the state of the opening / closing member 340 changes due to the re-pushing operation after the push-in operation of the operation member 310 with the difference in the jackpot expectation. The attention of the operation device 300 after operating the operation member 310 once can be improved. Further, since the degree of expectation of jackpot changes depending on whether or not the state of the opening / closing member 340 changes due to the re-pushing operation, the operation device 300 can be focused even after the re-pushing operation.

  Since the rotation angle is the same at 22.5 degrees, a period for rotating the drive motor 490 at a predetermined first speed in order to operate the main body ring portion 410 from the state shown in FIG. 17 to the state shown in FIG. The period during which the drive motor 490 is rotated at a predetermined first speed to operate the main body ring portion 410 from the state shown in FIG. 17 to the state shown in FIG. 20 is the same. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the state of the main body ring portion 410 from the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 490.

  After the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate, as described above with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, which of the pair of opening / closing members 340 is to be returned from which opening / closing member 340 a, 340 b is determined. It can be changed according to the rotation direction of 410. Accordingly, by combining the mode in which the opening / closing member 340 rotates and the mode in which the opening / closing member 340 returns, it is possible to perform movements corresponding to a plurality of types of jackpot expectations. Thereby, the attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  FIG. 22A to FIG. 22D and FIG. 23A to FIG. 23D are model diagrams of the opening / closing member 340. In FIGS. 22A to 22D and FIGS. 23A to 23D, different patterns of the rotation operation of the opening / closing member 340 are illustrated in time series. Here, in FIGS. 22 and 23, the opening / closing member 340b is illustrated on the left side, and the opening / closing member 340a is illustrated on the right side.

  The timing for prompting the player to push in the operation member 310 by being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like is indicated by “push”. In addition, a time-series change in the state of the switching device 400 is illustrated as a horizontally long bar. Here, the display of “preparation of BK1” means that the virtual line BK1 and the adjustment arm portion 345 are arranged to face each other at the timing of the right end of the frame. The display “BK2 preparation” means that the virtual line BK2 and the adjustment arm 345 are arranged, and the display “BK3 preparation” means that the virtual line BK3 and the adjustment arm 345 are arranged opposite to each other. This is the same in FIGS. 24 and 25.

  As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, at least eight types of rotation modes of the opening / closing member 340 can be formed. For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player pushes the operation member 310 into the second effect state (see FIG. 13). ), A first operation pattern for returning the opening / closing member 340 can be formed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player pushes the operation member 310 into the second effect state (see FIG. 13). 15), the second operation pattern for returning the opening / closing member 340 can be formed.

  By controlling the posture of the main body ring portion 410 so that the degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on whether it is the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, a pair of opening and closing is performed by pushing the operation member 310 It is possible to improve attention to the returning operation of the opening / closing member 340 after both the members 340 are rotated.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (c), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state (see FIG. 18), the player pushes the operation member 310, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned. A third operation pattern can be formed.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (d), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the third effect state (see FIG. 20), the player pushes the operation member 310, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned. A fourth operation pattern can be formed.

  The opening / closing member 340 when the operation member 310 is pushed in is controlled by controlling the posture of the main body ring portion 410 so that the degree of expectation of jackpot depends on whether it is the third operation pattern or the fourth operation pattern. It is possible to improve attention to the rotational movement of the.

  When the switching device 400 is arranged at the initial position, it is necessary when the switching device 400 is in the third effect state as compared with the rotation angle of the main body ring portion 410 required when the switching device 400 is in the first effect state. The angle of rotation becomes larger. Accordingly, the player may be able to predict the state of the main body ring portion 410 by making the player easily grasp the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 490.

  In this case, on the assumption that the operation speed of the drive motor 490 is constant, if the operation sound of the drive motor 490 continues for a long time, the player is expected to operate in the fourth operation pattern. Can do. Therefore, if the jackpot expectation level when operating in the fourth motion pattern is set high, the player's interest can be improved.

  Here, the adjustment arm 345 is supported not at the initial position but at a position where the switching device 400 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position (position where the adjustment arm 345a coincides with the cutting line θL1). The second initial state may also be set to be possible. In this case, from the second initial state, even if the operation sound is short (when rotated by 22.5 degrees), the switching device 400 can be in the third effect state, and even if the operation sound is long, The switching device 400 can be set to the first effect state. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the relationship between the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 490 and the big hit expectation.

  The operation timing of the main body ring portion 410 is exemplified when, for example, a reach effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the rotational speed of the drive motor 490 is a constant speed. Therefore, an operation with a large rotation angle is performed during the long reach, and an operation with a small rotation angle is performed during the short reach so that a sufficient period can be prepared when the rotation angle of the main body ring portion 410 increases. For example, the third operation pattern is used for short reach, and the first, second, and fourth operation patterns are used for long reach.

  When returning to the initial state after the switching device 400 is in the second initial state, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from above. Thereby, even if the player pushes the operation member 310 during the return operation, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 340 from operating in the first to eighth operation patterns and confusing the player. Further, by utilizing a range in which the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 420 is maintained long in the circumferential direction, the state in which the adjustment arm portion 345 is maintained at the upper end position of the movement range (opening / closing member) during most of the return operation. 340 can be maintained in the first position state). Further, this return operation is performed outside the period during which the reach effect is performed. Thereby, it is possible to return the main body ring portion 410 to the initial position in a state where the player's attention is diverted.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state (see FIG. 18), the player pushes the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the front-to-back return mode (see FIG. 16). Five operation patterns can be formed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23B, when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state (see FIG. 18), the player pushes the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the rearward return mode (see FIG. 15). Six operation patterns can be formed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the third effect state (see FIG. 20), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the front-to-back return mode (see FIG. 16). Seven operation patterns can be formed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (d), when the main body ring portion 410 is in the third effect state (see FIG. 20), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 and then the main body ring portion 410 is moved. After rotating to the posture of the second effect state (see FIG. 13), the player is caused to push the operation member 310 again, and then the opening / closing member 340 is returned in the rearward return mode (see FIG. 15). Eight operation patterns can be formed.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the fifth operation pattern to the eighth operation pattern, the members on one side of the pair of opening / closing members 340 operate before and after the player pushes the operation member 310 (performs the second operation). . You may make it express the difference in jackpot expectation degree by the combination of the operation modes of this one side member.

  In this case, for example, “when the opening / closing member 340 that is rotated by the first pushing operation is maintained in the rotating state (second position state) longer than the opening / closing member 340 on the opposite side after the second operation. When the control is performed such that the expectation level for jackpot is high, the expectation degree for jackpot is higher in the fifth operation pattern and the eighth operation pattern than in the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern.

  If controlled in this way, the gameability for knowing the jackpot expectation degree by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 for a certain period is added to the gameability for knowing the expectation degree of the jackpot from the state (operation mode) of the opening / closing member 340 at a certain point. can do.

  Therefore, the opening / closing member 340 is in the second position state at the time of the second push operation and after the second push operation, as compared with the case where all the information about the jackpot expectation is obtained by the push operation of the first operation member 310. In the meantime, the player's attention to the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

  In addition, the combination of the operation modes of the members on one side is not limited to those described above, and various modes are exemplified. For example, if the opening / closing member 340 that is rotated by the first pressing operation returns to the initial state (first position state) earlier than the opening / closing member 340 on the opposite side after the second operation, the jackpot expectation is You may make it control so that it is high. In this case, the big hit expectation is lower in the fifth operation pattern and the eighth operation pattern than in the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern.

  In addition, for example, “the first opening operation causes the opening / closing member 340a on the back side to rotate, and the expectation degree of jackpot is higher than the case where the opening / closing member 340b on the front side rotates,” the second pressing operation. The return order from the front opening / closing member 340b may be controlled such that the return operation from the front side opening / closing member 340b has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the return operation from the rear side opening / closing member 340a. In this case, among the fifth operation pattern to the eighth operation pattern, the fifth operation pattern has the highest jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation decreases in order as the sixth, seventh, and eighth.

  In addition, from the number of operation stages, the operation patterns (fifth operation pattern to eighth operation pattern) shown in FIG. 23 are compared with the operation patterns (first operation pattern to fourth operation pattern) shown in FIG. Although the operation is longer, the correspondence of the expectation level to the operation length is not limited. For example, the operation pattern shown in FIG. 22 may be controlled to have a higher jackpot expectation than the operation pattern shown in FIG. 23, or vice versa. Further, for example, the first operation pattern to the eighth operation pattern may be randomly ordered, and control may be performed so that the jackpot expectation is increased in that order.

  Note that, as a control method related to the effect, in the third operation pattern or the fourth operation pattern, before the opening / closing member 340 performs the return operation, a re-pushing instruction may be issued. In this case, even if the operation member 310 is pushed in accordance with the push-in instruction, the opening / closing member 340 arranged in the first position state does not rotate, and an effect of maintaining the posture (so-called “gase effect”) can be performed. Therefore, the fact that the main body ring portion 410 is operating in any one of the fifth to eighth operation patterns can be prevented from being determined even when the second pressing instruction is issued. It is possible to increase the player's feeling of tension when the operation member 310 is pushed in.

  In addition, as a control method related to the effect, in the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, a re-pushing instruction may be issued before the opening / closing member 340 returns. In this case, even if the operation member 310 is pushed in accordance with the push-in instruction, when the opening / closing member 340 is arranged in the second position state, only the posture is maintained, and the player ignores the first operation instruction. The pair of opening / closing members 340 is in the second position state. Therefore, the fact that the main body ring portion 410 is operating in any one of the fifth to eighth operation patterns can be prevented from being determined even if the second push instruction is issued. .

  As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of tension when pushing the operating member 310, and at the same time, the first operation instruction is determined to have a low expectation level and is ignored, and the second time is expected to have a high expectation level. A unique mode of operation can be formed for an operation method in which a push-in operation is performed only in response to the operation instruction. This will be described below.

  24A and 24B are model diagrams of the opening / closing member 340. FIG. In FIG. 24A, the operation pattern of the opening / closing member 340 when the main body ring portion 410 operates so that the opening / closing member 340 can operate in the first operation pattern is shown in FIG. The operation patterns of the opening / closing member 340 when the main body ring portion 410 operates so that the member 340 can operate in the fifth operation pattern (or the seventh operation pattern) are illustrated in time series. In addition, in the first operation pattern shown in FIG. 24A, the effect control is performed in such a manner that a second operation instruction is generated. 24A and 24B illustrate a case where the player ignores the first operation instruction and does not push the operation member 310.

  As shown in FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B, when the first operation instruction is ignored and only the second operation instruction is followed, the opening / closing member 340 changes the posture of the main body ring portion 410. Although the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is the same regardless of the operation pattern to be performed, the player determines in which operation pattern the opening / closing member 340 is rotating. It is impossible to read the jackpot expectation degree from the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340.

  Therefore, the main body ring portion 410 that enables the opening / closing member 340 to operate in a plurality of operation patterns is combined with the timing (time and number of times) at which an operation instruction for the operation member 310 that triggers the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 is input. When the player ignores a part of the operation instructions of the operation member 310 and operates the operation member 310 only according to the remaining part of the operation instructions by performing the production, in which operation pattern the opening / closing member 340 is operated. By making it impossible to grasp whether it is operating, it is possible to produce an effect that stirs up the player's imagination. Thus, it is possible to satisfy a request from a player who wants to operate the operation unit 310 but does not want to grasp the degree of expectation of jackpot from the state of the operation unit 310 (a request to prefer a so-called “one-shot notification”). it can.

  Further, for example, when the operation member 310 is pushed at a timing when there is no operation instruction, the expected operation pattern is destroyed, and the big hit expectation degree may not be read from the operation mode of the opening and closing member 340. By configuring the ring portion 410, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the operation member 310 at a timing when there is no operation instruction. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly operating the operation member 310 at unnecessary timing, and the durability of the operation device 300 can be improved. Hereinafter, this will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a model diagram of the opening / closing member 340. In FIG. 25, the operation pattern of the opening / closing member 340 when the main body ring portion 410 operates so that the opening / closing member 340 can operate in the first operation pattern is illustrated in time series. FIG. 25 illustrates a case where the player performs an unnecessary operation before the first operation instruction is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 25, due to the structure of the main body ring portion 410 in this embodiment, the posture of the main body ring portion 410 is changed from the initial state to the second effect state in order to form the first operation pattern of the opening / closing member 340. On the way, there is a case of going through the first effect state.

  If the operation member 310 is pushed unnecessarily when the main body ring portion 410 is in the first effect state, the opening / closing member 340a rotates. Thereafter, the main body ring portion 410 enters the second effect state, and when a push-in instruction is given by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, and the player pushes in accordingly, the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate.

  This operation mode is the same operation sequence as the fifth operation pattern described above with reference to FIG. 23A, but the main body annular portion 410 operates in a mode that allows the opening / closing member 340 to operate according to the first operation pattern. Since it is controlled, the jackpot expectation that can be read by the operation of the opening / closing member 340 is the jackpot expectation corresponding to the first operation pattern.

  Therefore, the occurrence of an unnecessary pushing operation at a timing when there is no pushing instruction can cause a difference between the jackpot expectation expressed in the performance and the jackpot expectation actually recognized by the player.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the jackpot expectation correctly by performing an unnecessary push-in operation, and to suppress the player's unnecessary push-in operation (for example, repeated hitting operation). it can. Thereby, durability of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, a state after the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 410 is in the fourth effect state will be described. 26 is a top view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG.

  In FIG. 26, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown for easy understanding, and in FIG. 27, the operation member 310 and the opening / closing member 340 before being pushed in are imagined. Illustrated with lines.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 26, the main body circle is such that a straight line (line extending in the vertical direction in FIG. 26) passing through the center of the main body ring portion 410 and connecting the centers of the pair of opening / closing members 340 passes through the third surface 423. The ring portion 410 is determined in posture. That is, FIG. 26 shows a state in which the main body ring portion 410 is rotated about 110 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the player pushes the operation member 310, the clutch member 330 is lowered by abutting and pushing the operation member 310. As a result, the engagement between the annular recess 333a of the clutch member 330 and the engagement claw 343 of the opening / closing member 340 is released, and the pair of opening / closing members 340 rotate in directions away from each other. The rotation of the opening / closing member 340 stops with the posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts the third surface 423 of the adjustment step portion 420.

  The opening / closing member 340 comes into contact with the inner surface of the operation member 310 in the rotated state. Therefore, the operating member 310 receives a load from the opening / closing member 340, and in this embodiment, the elastic coefficient of the spring SP1 is selected so that the vertical movement of the operating member 310 is stopped by the load. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 27, the operation member 310 is maintained without being raised.

  Thereby, for example, the player's interest in the operation of the operation member 310 can be improved by controlling the drive motor 490 so that the state in which the operation member 310 is maintained without being raised is a state in which the degree of big hit expectation is high. it can.

  For example, when the player is hitting the operation member 310 repeatedly, the player is pushing and applying a load to the operation member 310 that is moved upward by the elastic force of the spring SP1, and suddenly the fourth effect state shown in FIG. By inserting, the upward load applied to the player through the operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player can feel uncomfortable. By giving the player a sense of incongruity, attention to the operation device 300 that is the cause (target) can be improved.

  In addition, since the opening / closing member 340 is changed to the second position state in the state of giving a sense of incongruity, if the feeling of incongruity is given, the state of the opening / closing member 340 on the back side of the operation member 310 is visually recognized, and the big hit expectation It is possible to provide the player with a new game mode of grasping the game.

  In the fourth effect state, the operation of pushing the operation member 310 to rotate the pair of opening / closing members 340 is not different from the second effect state, but in the present embodiment, the difference is determined for the player. It is formed from a difficult mode (a mode in which the rotation angle of the opening and closing member 340 in the second effect state is similar to the rotation angle of the opening and closing member 340 in the fourth effect state, see FIGS. 14 and 26).

  Accordingly, it is possible to configure a game property in which the player can release his hand from the operation member 310 and can recognize whether the operation state is the second effect state or the fourth effect state depending on whether the operation member 310 is raised. . Therefore, attention to the operation device 300 can be maintained not only when the operation member 310 is pushed in but also when the hand is released from the operation member 310.

  26 and 27, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated clockwise as viewed from above (in FIG. 10, the main body ring portion 410 is moved to the left with respect to the opening / closing member 340). The adjustment arm 345 can reach the first surface 421 of the adjustment step 420, and the opening / closing member 340 can be returned to the first position. When the opening / closing member 340 returns, the load applied from the opening / closing member 340 to the operation member 310 is released, and the operation member 310 can be returned to the initial position (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 27). In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 10, the shape of the adjustment step 420 from the cutting line θL1 to the cutting line θL2 is the same as the shape of the adjustment step 420 from the cutting line θL3 to the cutting line θL0. Therefore, the pair of opening / closing members 340 return in the same operation mode.

  In the present embodiment, from the state shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the main body ring portion 410 is controlled to be prohibited from rotating counterclockwise as viewed from above. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, even if the connecting surface on the left side of the third surface 423 (clockwise in the top view of the main body ring portion 410) is formed along the vertical direction, It is possible to prevent the adjustment arm portion 345 from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the displacement of the operation member 310 is disposed inside the outer periphery of the outer wall member 301 and outside the outer periphery of the operation member 310. A portion (not shown) that protrudes radially outward of the operating member 310 from below the inner extending portion 315 of the operating member 310 is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor, so that the displacement of the operating member 310 is reduced. It is detected and it is determined that there is an operation by the player.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the operation device 300 includes a pair of opening / closing members 340. However, the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment includes two pairs (four) of opening / closing members 2340, which are the second It shifts in order from the position state to the first position state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a front perspective view of the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 2320, the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 2340, and the switching device 2400. In FIG. 28, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  The base member 2320 is formed from a mode in which a pair of shaft portions 323 is added to the base member 320 of the first embodiment. That is, the shaft portions 323 are arranged at equal intervals on four sides (front and rear, left and right) of the recessed portion 322.

  The opening / closing member 2340 is formed from a mode in which a pair of opening / closing members 340 is added to the opening / closing member 340 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the first opening / closing member 2340a, the second opening / closing member 2340b, the third opening / closing member 2340c, the fourth, in order from the member arranged on the drive motor 490 side of the switching device 2400, clockwise from the top. The opening / closing member 2340d is used.

  In the switching device 2400, the adjustment step portion 2420 has a first surface 2421 in which the highest step h0 is the highest, a second surface 2422 in which the adjustment step portion 2420 is an intermediate step h1 that is one step lower than the first surface 2421, and the circumference of each of these surfaces. It is formed only from each connecting surface that connects the direction end portions, and the switching interval between each surface is different from that of the adjustment stepped portion 420 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, this will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 30 is a top view of the operation device 2300. In FIG. 30, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. FIG. 30 illustrates an initial state (waiting for instructions) of the main body ring portion 2410 in which the adjustment arm portions 345 of all the opening / closing members 2340 are opposed to the first surface 2421. Further, in FIG. 30, for easy understanding, a schematic diagram showing a change in the height of the adjustment step portion 2420 is shown in an annular shape with an imaginary line.

  In the schematic view, a side view of the adjustment step portion 2420 is schematically shown in an annular shape. The closer to the center (position of the contact portion 332), the higher the step.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the first surface 2421 of the adjustment step portion 2420 has only a short surface 2421a having a short left-right width (in this embodiment, a center angle of about 6 degrees), and an upper surface based on the short surface 2421a. It mainly includes a first width-long surface 2421b, a second width-long surface 2421c, and a third width-long surface 2421d that are sequentially arranged in a clockwise direction. Note that, in the initial state, the width short surface 2421a has a mode in which the center of the opposing opening / closing member 2340 (first opening / closing member 2340a in FIG. 30) coincides with the center of the width length.

  The first width-long surface 2421b, the second width-long surface 2421c, and the third width-long surface 2421d are surfaces formed with a width of a center angle of about 50 degrees, respectively, and in the initial state, the positions with the opposing opening / closing member 2340 The relationship is different.

  That is, the opening / closing member 2340 (the second opening / closing member 2340b in FIG. 30) arranged to face the first width-long surface 2421b has a first width length that divides the width of the first width-long surface 2421b by an equal uniform width Hf. It is arranged at a position shifted from the center of the surface 2421b by the first shift angle θ21 in the clockwise direction when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the first deviation angle θ21 is about 11 degrees (θ21 = 11 degrees).

  In addition, the opening / closing member 2340 (the third opening / closing member 2340c in FIG. 30) disposed to face the second width-long surface 2421c is a second width length that divides the width length of the second width-long surface 2421c by an equal uniform width Hf. It is disposed at a position equivalent to the center position of the surface 2421c.

  In addition, the opening / closing member 2340 (the fourth opening / closing member 2340d in FIG. 30) disposed to face the third width long surface 2421d is a third width length that divides the width of the third width long surface 2421d by the uniform equal width Hf. It is arranged at a position shifted from the center of the surface 2421d by the first shift angle θ21 counterclockwise when viewed from above. In the present embodiment, the first deviation angle θ21 is about 11 degrees (θ21 = 11 degrees).

  As described above, each of the surfaces 2421a to 2421d forming the first surface 2421 is arranged in a different manner with respect to a line (each opening and closing member 2340) that divides the circle into four equal parts. The mode of opening and closing can be varied. This will be described below.

  FIG. 31 is a top view of the operation device 2300. In FIG. 31, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. Further, FIG. 31 illustrates a posture in which the adjustment arm portions 345 of all the opening / closing members 2340 are opposed to the second surface 2422, and illustrates a state in which all the opening / closing members 2340 are in the second position state. The Further, in FIG. 30, for easy understanding, a schematic diagram showing a change in the height of the adjustment step portion 2420 is shown in an annular shape with an imaginary line.

  In the schematic view, a side view of the adjustment step portion 2420 is schematically shown in an annular shape. The closer to the center (position of the contact portion 332), the higher the step.

  FIG. 31 illustrates a state (posture A) in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above, from the initial state of the main body ring portion 2410 illustrated in FIG. 30. In the present embodiment, in the posture A shown in FIG. 31, the positional relationship between the open / close members 2340a to 2340d and the second surface 2422 is different.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 31, the first opening / closing member 2340a is shifted from the end of the short width surface 2421a by an angle J24 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top (counterclockwise when viewed from the end of the first long surface 2421b). At a position shifted by an angle J21) from the second surface 2422.

  Further, the second opening / closing member 2340b is shifted by an angle J23 from the end of the first width-long surface 2421b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top (angle J22 from the end of the second width-long surface 2421c counterclockwise as viewed from the top). The second surface 2422 is opposed to the second surface 2422 at a shifted position.

  Further, the third opening / closing member 2340c is shifted from the end of the second width long surface 2421c by an angle J22 clockwise as viewed from above (angle from the end of the third width long surface 2421d by angle J23 counterclockwise as viewed from above). The second surface 2422 is opposed to the second surface 2422 at a shifted position.

  Further, the fourth opening / closing member 2340d is shifted by an angle J21 clockwise from the end of the third width long surface 2421d (viewed from the end of the short width surface 2421a by an angle J24 counterclockwise from the top). The second surface 2422 is disposed at a position).

  In this embodiment, the angle J21 is set to 9 degrees, the angle J22 is set to 20 degrees, the angle J23 is set to 31 degrees, and the angle J24 is set to 42 degrees (angle J21 <angle J22 <angle J23 <angle J24, (angle J22 -Angle J21) = (Angle J23-Angle J22) = (Angle J24-Angle J23) = 11 degrees).

  Therefore, by rotating the main body ring portion 2410 from the state shown in FIG. 31, the adjustment arm portion 345 of each opening / closing member 2340 is lifted to the first surface 2421 of the adjustment step portion 2420 to be in the first position state ( The period until (see FIG. 30) is different for each opening / closing member 2340. In this regard, the state shown in FIG. 31 is divided into a case where the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 45 degrees clockwise when viewed from above and a case where the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above. This will be described below.

  FIG. 32A is a diagram showing a change in time of the state of each opening / closing member 2340. In FIG. 32 (a), the time change of the posture of each opening / closing member 2340 when the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the top from the state (posture A) shown in FIG. The line is set to the second position state of the opening / closing member 2340 (shown as “inverted” in FIG. 32A), and the upper line is set to the first position state of the opening / closing member 2340 (“rise” in FIG. 32A). It is shown as four line graphs shown as).

  In FIG. 32A, the posture change modes of the first opening / closing member 2340 a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340 d are illustrated in order from the top, and the horizontal axis of each graph indicates the time from the start of the operation of the switching device 2400. It is shown as a time axis, and a numerical value when the switching device 2400 is rotationally driven at a speed of 10 degrees per second is described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are illustrated in the vicinity of each graph.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the main body ring portion 2410 starts to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from above, the first opening / closing member is turned when the rotation angle becomes 9 degrees (angle J21) 0.9 seconds after the start. 2340a is in the first position state, and when the second opening / closing member 2340b is in the first position state after 1.1 seconds (2.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of rotation) and the rotation angle reaches 20 degrees (angle J22). Then, when 1.1 seconds have passed (3.1 seconds have passed since the start of rotation) and the rotation angle has reached 31 degrees (angle J23), the third opening / closing member 2340c is brought into the first position state, and further 1.1 seconds. After a lapse of time (4.2 seconds from the start of rotation) and the rotation angle becomes 42 degrees (angle J24), the fourth opening / closing member 2340d is brought into the first position state.

  That is, each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d operates in such a manner that the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d are sequentially raised from the first opening / closing member 2340a in a clockwise direction as viewed from above. Further, the operation timing is generated every time the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 11 degrees ((angle J22−angle J21) = (angle J23−angle J22) = (angle J24−angle J23) = 11 degrees). By operating the main body ring portion 2410 to rotate at a constant speed, the operation timing of each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d can be set at equal intervals.

  FIG. 33A is a diagram showing a change in time of the state of each opening / closing member 2340. In FIG. 33A, the change in time of each opening / closing member 2340 when the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 31 (posture A) opens and closes the lower line. The member 2340 is in the second position state (shown as “falling” in FIG. 33A), and the upper line is shown in the first position state of the opening / closing member 2340 (in FIG. 33A, “starting”). ) As four line graphs.

  In FIG. 33A, the posture change modes of the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are illustrated in order from the top, and the horizontal axis of each graph indicates the time from the start of the operation of the switching device 2400. A numerical value when the switching device 2400 is rotationally driven at a speed of 10 degrees per second is described. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are illustrated in the vicinity of each graph.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), when the main body ring portion 2410 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from above, the fourth opening / closing member 2340d becomes a position when the rotation angle becomes 9 degrees (angle J21) 0.9 seconds after the start. Is in the first position state, and when 1.1 seconds have passed (2.0 seconds have passed since the start of rotation) and the rotation angle has become 20 degrees (angle J22), the third opening / closing member 2340c is placed in the first position state. Furthermore, when 1.1 seconds have passed (3.1 seconds have passed since the start of rotation) and the rotation angle has become 31 degrees (angle J23), the second opening / closing member 2340b is set to the first position state, and 1.1 seconds have passed. The first opening / closing member 2340a is set to the first position when the rotation angle reaches 42 degrees (angle J24) after 4.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of rotation.

  That is, each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d operates in such a manner that the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d are sequentially raised from the fourth opening / closing member 2340d counterclockwise as viewed from above. Further, the operation timing is generated every time the main body ring portion 2410 rotates 11 degrees ((angle J22−angle J21) = (angle J23−angle J22) = (angle J24−angle J23) = 11 degrees). By operating the main body ring portion 2410 to rotate at a constant speed, the operation timing of each of the opening / closing members 2340a to 2340d can be set at equal intervals.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32A and FIG. 33A, by changing the operation mode of the main body ring portion 2410 as shown in the example in which the operation order of the opening and closing members 2340 is reversed in top view. The operation mode of each opening / closing member 2340 can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, the opening / closing member 2340 is moved in the state in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from above, based on the positional relationship between the short width surface 2421a and the first opening / closing member 2340a. Although the two-position state and the return to the first position state from the state have been described, the posture of the main body ring portion 2410 that can set the opening / closing member 2340 to the second position state is not limited to this, and at least this posture A posture (posture B, posture C, and posture D, which will be described later) in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated by 90 degrees in a top view from the posture shown in FIG. 31 is also possible.

  Therefore, the order of the operation timing of the opening / closing member 2340 is not limited to that described with reference to FIGS. 32A and 33A. For example, the second opening / closing member 2340b first returns to the first position state. Various aspects (at least six different aspects) can be formed in the present embodiment, such as the aspect of the third opening / closing member 2340c first returning to the first state.

  In addition, the change of each aspect can be easily understood by rereading a structure by the table | surface relationship shown in FIG.32 (b) and FIG.33 (b). FIGS. 32B and 33B are tables illustrating how to replace the configuration of the open / close members 2340a to 2340d. 32 (a) and 33 (b), there is a way to replace the opening / closing member 2340 in order to utilize FIGS. 32 (a) and 33 (b) corresponding to the stop posture of the main body ring portion 2410. Illustrated.

  32 (b) and 33 (b), the main body ring portion 2410 is stopped in the posture B in which the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the opening / closing member 2340 is in the second position after the rotation, the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from above, for example, so that the leftmost column in the table shown in FIG. The opening / closing member 2340 changes its state in the order described from the top to the bottom (corresponding to FIG. 32A). On the other hand, by rotating the main body ring portion 2410 clockwise, for example, as viewed from above, FIG. The state of the opening / closing member 2340 changes in the order described from the bottom to the top of the leftmost column of the table (corresponding to FIG. 33A). In FIGS. 32B and 33B, the first opening / closing member 2340a to the fourth opening / closing member 2340d are abbreviated as a to d.

  In addition, after stopping the main body ring part 2410 in the posture C that is the state in which the main body ring part 2410 is rotated clockwise by 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31, the opening / closing member 2340 is set to the second position state. In this case, the center column of the table shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 33 (b) is associated, and the main body ring portion 2410 is rotated 270 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the opening / closing member 2340 is brought into the second position state after the main body ring portion 2410 is stopped in the posture D, the rightmost columns in the tables shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 33 (b) correspond. Thus, FIG. 32A and FIG. 33A illustrating the case where the switching device 2400 is rotated from the posture A can be easily converted when the switching device 2400 is rotated from each posture B to D. it can.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the posture of the main body ring portion 2410 when the opening / closing member 2340 is in the second position state can be selected from at least four ways, and the opening / closing member 2340 in the second position state can be selected. Since the return mode to the 1-position state can be selected from two ways of rotating the main body ring portion 2410 forward or reverse, the return mode of the opening / closing member 2340 is selected from at least eight ways. Can be controlled.

  Thereby, for example, when the return mode of the opening / closing member 2340 is controlled in correspondence with the jackpot expectation level, the jackpot expectation level can be shown in eight stages for the return operation of the opening / closing member 2340. The jackpot expectation is information that is highly noticeable to the player. Since the return operation of the opening / closing member 2340 is an operation that can be visually recognized by the player after the player operates the operation member 310 (see FIG. 5) of the operation device 2300, the operation device 2300 after the operation member 310 is pushed into the operation device 2300. You can improve your attention.

  In addition, when the player keeps his / her hand on the operation member 310, the hand is in the way, and the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2340 is difficult to see (the upper surface which is the push-in portion of the operation member 310 is made of a translucent material. And the player can visually recognize the opening / closing member 2340 through its upper surface). It is possible to suppress a game in which a hand is left on. Therefore, an appropriate operation as instructed can be performed, and the durability of the operation device 2300 can be improved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, in the case where there is a gap between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 420, the case where the opening / closing member 340 rotates as long as the operation member 310 is pressed has been described. The operation device 3300 according to the embodiment can form a case where the opening / closing member 340 rotates and a case where the opening / closing member 340 does not rotate depending on the manner in which the operation member 310 is pushed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 320, the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 340, and the switching device 3400, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a top view of an annular part 3410 and an adjustment step part 3420. In FIG. 34, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  The switching device 3400 includes a main body ring part 3410 that is rotatably supported by the base member 320, an adjustment step part 3420 formed on the upper surface of the main body ring part 3410, and a periphery of the main body ring part 3410. Gear teeth 430 that are formed, a drive motor 490 that generates a driving force transmitted to the main body ring portion 3410 via the gear teeth 430, and a first ring that is disposed on the main body ring portion 3410 and is operatively formed. The first operating device 3440 and the second operating device 3450 that is disposed in the main body ring portion 3410 and can be operated in the reverse mode of the first operating device 3440 like the first operating device 3440 are mainly provided. .

  The main body ring portion 3410 is a pair of first housing portions 3411 disposed on the cutting line θL0, θL2 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the top, and a position back from the first housing portion 3411 to the cutting lines θL0, θL2 side. It mainly includes a pair of second accommodating portions 3412 to be disposed. It should be noted that the pair of first housing parts 3411 and the pair of second housing parts 3412 are located at opposite positions (180 ° angular deviation) across the central axis of the main body ring part 3410, like the pair of opening / closing members 340. Arranged).

  The shapes of the main body ring portion 3410 and the adjustment step portion 3420 are substantially the same as the shapes of the main body ring portion 410 and the adjustment step portion 420 in the first embodiment except for the first storage portion 3411 and the second storage portion 3412. The shape is equivalent.

  The first accommodating portion 3411 is a portion that accommodates the first operating device 3440 that is disposed so as to be able to face the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340, and from the upper surface inside the width of the annular portion of the main body annular portion 3410. A receiving recess 3411a that is recessed downward, and a rectangular shape that is vertically long from the receiving recess 3411a toward the outer diameter side, and has a horizontal length shorter than the outer peripheral length of the receiving recess 3411a. The communication hole 3411b is extended in the outer diameter direction of the main body annular portion 3410 along the side surface of the communication hole 3411b, and is bent and formed in an L-shape when viewed from above on the side surrounding the communication hole 3411b at the extended tip. An extended wall portion 3411c, a support convex portion 3411d protruding from the extended wall portion 3411c in a direction along the bending direction of the extended wall portion 3411c, and a lid on the bent side of the extended wall portion 3411c. And a pair of support recesses 3411f formed to be recessed in both directions orthogonal to the extending direction of the extending wall portion 3411c in a top view when the cover member 3411e is assembled. Prepare mainly.

  The housing recess 3411a has a shape surrounded by a pair of arcs around the central axis of the main body ring portion 3410 and a pair of straight lines extending radially from the central axis of the main body ring portion 3410 in a top view. Formed from. Thereby, since the limited area inside the width of the main body ring portion 3410 can be effectively used to secure a large cross-sectional area of the housing recess 3411a, the first motion member 3440 that is the object to be housed can be secured. The cross-sectional area can be increased, and the durability can be improved.

  The housing recess 3411a includes an inclined surface 3411a1 that slopes upward on the side surface on the counterclockwise side when viewed from above (the second housing portion 3412 side). In the present embodiment, when the adjustment arm 345 of the opening / closing member 340 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 3411a (see FIG. 41), thereafter, the main body ring portion 3410 is controlled to rotate clockwise as viewed from above. . As a result, the adjustment arm 345 moves upward along the inclined surface 3411a1, and the opening / closing member 340 can be returned to the first position state.

  In the present embodiment, after the main body ring portion 3410 rotates from the initial position and reaches the posture in which the adjustment arm portion 345 and the first housing portion 3411 are arranged to face each other, the main body ring portion 3410 is exclusively used. Is controlled to rotate in a clockwise direction when viewed from above and return to the initial position. As a result, the main body ring portion 3410 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from above, and the adjustment arm portion 345 comes into contact with and breaks the side surface (surface extending in the vertical direction) opposed to the inclined surface 3411a1 of the housing recess 3411a. This can be prevented.

  The second accommodating portion 3412 is a portion that accommodates the second operating device 3450 that is disposed so as to face the adjusting arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340, and has substantially the same cross-sectional shape as the accommodating concave portion 3411 a of the first accommodating portion 3411. And a communication hole 3412b that is formed to penetrate the storage recess 3412a in the same manner as the communication hole 3411b.

  The first operating device 3440 includes an intermediate gear 3441 that is pivotally supported by the support convex portion 3411d of the first housing portion 3411 and gear teeth 3442a that are meshed with the intermediate gear 3441, and a housing recess portion of the first housing portion 3411. 3411a has an engaging member 3442 in which the main body portion 3442b is accommodated and a gear tooth 3443a which is disposed on the opposite side of the engaging member 3442 with the support convex portion 3411d interposed therebetween and meshed with the intermediate gear 3441 and has a support concave portion 3411f. And a contact member 3443 housed in the main body.

  The engaging member 3442 mainly includes the gear teeth 3442a, the main body portion 3442b, and a connecting portion 3442c that connects the gear teeth 3442a and the communication hole 3411b. Here, in accordance with the relationship of the communication hole 3411b with respect to the housing recess 3411a, in comparison with the outer peripheral length of the main body portion 3442b of the engagement member 3442 and the length of the gear teeth 3442a in the same direction in the top view. The length (thickness) in the same direction of 3442c is shortened.

  This prevents the main body portion 3442b and the gear teeth 3442a of the engagement member 3442 from penetrating the communication hole 3411b, so that the engagement member 3442 is positioned in the radial direction of the main body ring portion 3410 with respect to the communication hole 3411b. Can be positioned.

  The contact member 3443 meshes the gear teeth 3443a with the intermediate gear 3441, and a rectangular portion extending in the tooth thickness direction is fitted in the support recess 3411f, so that the contact member 3443 is accurately moved in the vertical direction. It can be arranged to be slidable.

  Note that the engaging member 3442 and the abutting member 3443 are arranged in a positional relationship with the intermediate gear 3441 interposed therebetween, so that when one moves up, the other moves down. Further, as will be described later, the contact member 3443 is disposed at a position where it can contact the operation member 310. Further, since the engaging member 3442 is configured to be heavier than the abutting member 3443, the engaging member 3442 is disposed at the lower end of the movement range in the initial state where the operating member 310 is not operated. The abutting member 3443 is disposed at the upper end of the moving range (see FIG. 40).

  Further, in a state where the engaging member 3442 is disposed at the upper end of the movement range, the upper surface position of the engaging member 3442 is formed in a manner that coincides with the lower end position of the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 in the first position state. The Therefore, when the adjustment arm 345 is pushed up on the upper surface of the engagement member 3442, the state of the opening / closing member 340 is changed to the first position state by the engagement member 3442 moving to the upper end of the movement range.

  The second motion device 3450 is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 3442b of the first motion member 3440 and is housed in the housing recess 3412a of the main body ring portion 3410, and the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 3451 Are connected in the same manner as the connecting portion 3442c of the first operating member 3440 and are connected to the connecting hole 3411b of the main body ring portion 3410, and the opposite side of the main body portion 3451 through the connecting portion 3452. A contact portion 3453 extending along the radial direction of the main body ring portion 3410 and a spring SP31 disposed between the main body ring portion 3410 below the main body portion 3451 Is mainly provided.

  Note that the abutting portion 3453 is disposed at a position where it can abut on the operation member 310. Further, in a state where the abutting portion 3453 is not pushed in by the operation member 310, the upper surface of the main body portion 3451 is formed in a manner that coincides with the lower end position of the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 in the first position state.

  In the present embodiment, the spring SP31 and the spring SP31 and the spring SP31 and the spring SP31 so as to generate an urging force (elastic force) large enough to push back the opening / closing member 340 to the first position. The spring coefficient of the torsion spring NB1 is set.

  The operation of the switching device 3400 will be described. 37 is a top view of the operation device 3300, and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In FIG. 37, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  In the present embodiment, in the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410, the main body ring portion 3410 is maintained in a posture in which the adjustment arm portions 345 of the pair of opening / closing members 340 face the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 3420.

  37 and 38, the main body ring portion 3410 is rotated from the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410 until the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 3420 faces the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340. The state is shown.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, since a space is made between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 3420 of the opening / closing member 340 in the first position state, by pushing the operation member 310, The opening / closing member 340 rotates. At this time, the pushing mode of the operation member 310 is not limited, and the opening / closing member 340 rotates as long as the clutch member 330 is lowered.

  39 is a top view of the operation device 3300, and FIGS. 40, 41, and 42 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 along the line XL-XL in FIG. In FIG. 39, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  39 to 42, the center position in the circumferential direction of the first operating device 3440 accommodated in the switching device 3400 is opposed to the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 from the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410 (adjustment arm portion). A state in which the main body ring portion 3410 is rotated until it reaches a state in which the center axis of 345 coincides in the vertical direction) is illustrated.

  In FIG. 40, the state before the operation member 310 is pushed is shown in FIG. 41. The operation member 310 is weak (the clutch member 330 is lowered, while the lower end of the operation member 310 is in contact with the contact member 3443 and the first housing. FIG. 42 shows a state where the operation member 310 is pushed in strongly (to the lower end of the movable width).

  As shown in FIG. 40, in a state before the operation member 310 is pushed in, a space is formed between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 3420 of the opening / closing member 340. When the engagement between the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 is released by lowering the clutch member 330, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 35).

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the operation member 310 is pressed weakly, the posture of the opening / closing member 340 after the rotating operation is maintained.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, when the operation member 310 is strongly pressed, the inner extending portion 315 of the operation member 310 and the contact member 3443 come into contact with each other, and the contact member 3443 moves downward. The engaging member 3442 moves up. In the process of the ascending operation of the engaging member 3442, the upper surface of the engaging member 3442 and the adjustment arm 345 come into contact with each other, the opening / closing member 340 rotates, and the opening / closing member 340 changes to the first position state.

  That is, when the main body ring portion 3410 is in the posture shown in FIG. 39, the operation mode of the subsequent opening / closing member 340 can be changed depending on whether the operation member 310 is pressed weakly or strongly. By utilizing this change in the operation mode, the player can easily operate the operation member 310 in an appropriate operation mode.

  For example, in a gaming machine that produces an effect that the big hit expectation is high when the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by a pressing operation of the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by pushing the operation member 310 as instructed. It is possible to add the playability that can be done.

  That is, for example, an effect method of instructing the player how to press the operation member 310 by displaying “weakly pressed” on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is exemplified. . In this case, if the operating member 310 is pressed weakly as instructed, the opening / closing member 340 rotates (see FIG. 41), and if the operating member 310 is pressed strongly against the instruction, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 340 is the first operating device. 3440 (returns to the first position state). Therefore, it is possible to direct a player who wants to know whether or not the expectation degree of jackpot is high to push the operation member 310 weakly.

  43 is a top view of the operation device 3300, and FIGS. 44, 45, and 46 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 along the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. In FIG. 43, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown.

  43 to 46, the center position in the circumferential direction of the second motion device 3450 accommodated in the switching device 3400 is opposed to the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 from the initial state of the main body ring portion 3410 (adjustment arm portion). A state in which the main body ring portion 3410 is rotated until it reaches a state in which the center axis of 345 coincides in the vertical direction) is illustrated.

  44, the state before the operation member 310 is pushed is shown in FIG. 45, and the operation member 310 is weak (the clutch member 330 is lowered, while the lower end of the operation member 310 is in contact with the contact member 3443 and the first housing). FIG. 46 shows a state where the operation member 310 is pushed in strongly (to the lower end of the movable width).

  As shown in FIG. 44, in a state before the operation member 310 is pushed in, the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 and the adjustment step portion 3420 (the upper surface of the second operation device 3450) are in contact with each other. Even if the opening / closing member 340 is moved downward by the pushing operation to release the engagement between the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 and the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 35), As long as the operation member 310 is operated weakly, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state by the biasing force of the spring SP31 (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the operation member 310 is pressed strongly, the inner extension portion 315 and the contact portion 3453 of the operation member 310 are in contact with each other, and then facing the biasing force of the spring SP31. When the force is applied, the abutting portion 3453 and the main body portion 3451 are moved downward. Thereby, a clearance gap is formed between the adjustment arm part 345 and the contact part 3453, and the opening / closing member 340 rotates in a manner to fill the clearance. When the load on the operation member 310 is released, the second operation device 3450 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring SP31, and the opening / closing member 340 is moved to the main body portion 3451 of the second operation device 3450 in the first position state. To change.

  That is, when the main body ring portion 3410 is in the posture shown in FIG. 43, the operation mode of the subsequent opening / closing member 340 can be changed depending on whether the operation member 310 is pressed weakly or strongly. By utilizing this change in the operation mode, the player can easily operate the operation member 310 in an appropriate operation mode.

  For example, in a gaming machine that produces an effect that the big hit expectation is high when the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by a pressing operation of the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated by pushing the operation member 310 as instructed. It is possible to add the playability that can be done.

  That is, for example, an effect method of instructing the player how to press the operation member 310 by displaying “strong press” on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is exemplified. . In this case, if the operating member 310 is pressed strongly according to the instruction, the opening / closing member 340 rotates (see FIG. 46). If the operating member 310 is pressed weakly against the instruction, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 340 is performed by the second operating device. 3450 is suppressed (maintained in the first position state). Therefore, the player who wants to know whether or not the jackpot expectation is high can be directed to push the operation member 310 strongly.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the opening / closing member 340 rotates when pressed weakly while the opening / closing member 340 does not rotate when pressed hard, and the opening / closing member 340 does not rotate when pressed weakly when pressed hard. The state in which the opening / closing member 340 is rotated can be formed by changing the posture of the main body ring portion 3410 in advance by the drive motor 490.

  Thereby, by fixing the operation mode instructed to the player, it is possible to prevent the player's operation from becoming ruined, and to change the variation of the operation mode by the single drive motor 490. it can.

  Further, when the operation mode of the operation member 310 is detected and the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is changed (for example, a drive motor for operating the opening / closing member 340 is provided, and driving and stopping are performed depending on a difference in operation mode of the operation member 310 The number of sensors that detect whether or not the operation member 310 is pushed in at the position of the operation member 310 can be reduced (single) compared to the case of switching), and the opening / closing member 340 and each of the operating devices 3440 and 3450 can be reduced. Since the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is switched by contact, the sense of unity of the operation of the operation member 310 and the opening / closing member 340 can be increased, and the reliability of the operation of the opening / closing member 340 can be increased.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the switching device 3400 is in a predetermined posture, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is changed depending on whether the operation member 310 is operated by “weakly pressing” or “strongly pressing”. It is configured to be possible, and it is not necessary to detect whether the operation member 310 is operated by “weakly press” or “strongly press”. Therefore, a drive motor for operating the opening / closing member 340 is provided, and the number of sensors for detecting the position of the operation member 310 is reduced as compared with a case where driving and stopping are switched depending on the operation mode of the operation member 310. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the boundary between “weak press” and “strong press” can be determined as a change in the load felt by the player. That is, the range of “weak press” described above is a range in which the operation member 310 does not contact the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device 3450, and the operation member 310 has the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device 3450. No load from device 3450.

  On the other hand, the range of “strong pressing” described above is a range where the operation member 310 is in contact with the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device 3450, and the operation member 310 is in the first operation device 3440 and the second operation device. An upward load is received from device 3450. Therefore, the player can determine the position where the upward load applied to the operation member 310 starts to increase (position where the increase width starts to change) as the boundary between “weakly pressed” and “strongly pressed”.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the player is operating the operation member 310 by “weakly pressing” or “strongly pressing”, the player is able to perform an intuitive operation. Can be done.

  The movement trajectories of the contact member 3443 of the first motion device 3440 and the contact portion 3453 of the second motion device 3450, which are parts that apply a load to the operation member 310, are circular with the rotation axis of the main body ring portion 3410 as the center. Configure. Therefore, when the rotation axis of the main body ring portion 3410 coincides with the center of the protruding portion 312 of the operation member 310 (see FIG. 38), the inner extension portion of the operation member 310 depends on the posture of the main body ring portion 3410. There is no change in the manner of contact between 315 and the contact member 3443 and the contact portion 3453 (whether contact is made or not).

  Therefore, the upward load (reaction force felt by the player) applied to the operation member 310 from the first operation member 3440 and the second operation member 3450 does not depend on the posture of the main body ring portion 3410, and the push-in depth of the operation member 310 is increased. Therefore, the player cannot determine the posture of the main body ring portion 3410 due to the difference in the upward load applied to the operation member 310.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the posture of the main body ring portion 3410 from being determined based on the feeling when operating the operation member 310, and the player can be directed to visually recognize the opening / closing member 340. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the state inside (opening / closing member 340 disposed in) the operation device 3300.

  In the present embodiment, the return operation of the opening / closing member 340 (the operation of returning to the first position state) is performed by driving the switching device 3400 so that it is independent of the player's operation. For example, the opening / closing member 340 can be returned to the first position state by rotating the main body ring portion 3410 at most once. Thereby, regardless of whether or not the player operates the operation member 310 in the state shown in FIG. 39 or FIG. 43, the opening / closing member 340 inside the operation device 3300 is returned to the first position state (see FIG. 34). (Maintain).

  When the main body ring portion 3410 is in an intermediate position between the state shown in FIG. 39 and the state shown in FIG. 43, the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 3420 is disposed to face the adjustment arm portion 345, so that the opening / closing member The rotation of 340 is suppressed. Therefore, as a preliminary arrangement of the state shown in FIG. 39 or the state shown in FIG. 43, the main body ring portion 3410 is set to an intermediate posture between the state shown in FIG. 39 and the state shown in FIG. It can be prevented that the annular portion 3410 is in the state shown in FIG. 39 or is in the state shown in FIG. 43 from the operating sound of the drive motor 490. Thereby, attention to the operation device 3300 can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 3411a1 of the first housing portion 3411 is disposed on the side close to the second housing portion 3412, the main body ring portion 3410 is in the state shown in FIG. 39 and the state shown in FIG. Can be operated from a posture in which the first housing portion 3411 and the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 are arranged to face each other (rotating operation counterclockwise when viewed from above). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotation direction of the main body ring part 3410 from being limited.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 59. In the first embodiment, the case where the biasing force applied to the opening / closing member 340 of the operation device 300 is directed in the direction in which the opening / closing member 340 is tilted is described. However, in the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment, the opening / closing member 4340 is raised. Biased in the direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  47 is a top view of the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 taken along the line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. In FIG. 47, the outer wall member 4301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 4310 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 47, the first state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated, and in FIG. 48, the first position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated. In FIG. 48, the second return member 4540 (the portion protruding from the first return member 4530) is not shown.

  Note that the description of the first state of the switching device 4500 represents one arrangement of the slide member 4520 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340. Here, in the first state, the slide member 4520 is configured such that the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530 are opposed to each other.

  The operation device 4300 has a function of giving an effect to the operation device 4300 itself by visually recognizing a part of the internal mechanism. The operation device 4300 is formed with an opening 301a at the center of the bottom of the inverted cup and is also a front surface. Formed from an outer wall member 4301 fixed to the front frame 14 in such a manner that an operating device such as the switching device 4500 is accommodated between the frame 14 (see FIG. 5) and a shape in which the width in the height direction of the outer wall member 4301 is shortened. And an opening 302a that is coaxial with the opening 301a and has a slightly larger diameter at the center of the bottom, and is overlapped and fixed in such a manner that an internal space is formed between the outer wall member 4301 and the openings 301a and 302a. A dish-shaped member made of a light-transmitting material, the member of which movement is restricted by an internal space formed by the outer wall member 4301 and the overlapping member 302. An operation member 4310, a pair of opening / closing members 4340 supported by the outer wall member 4301 and configured to be tiltable in conjunction with the operation amount of the operation member 4310, and disposed below the opening / closing member 4340, and the opening / closing member 4340 A switching device 4500 configured to be able to switch between a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is urged by abutting and a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is not in contact with the opening / closing member 4340, and a drive gear 4591 for operating the switching device 4500. And a drive motor 4590 for generating a drive force.

  The outer wall member 4301 extends in the front-rear direction from the position that intersects the straight line extending in the front-rear direction passing through the center of the opening 301 a in the inner surface of the opening 301 a, the recessed portion 301 b, and the opening 301 a toward the center of the opening 301 a. A pair of extending support arms 4301c and an inner surface of the opening 301a, extending from the position intersecting with a straight line passing through the center of the opening 301a and extending in the left-right direction toward the center of the opening 301a. And an anti-tilt arm portion 4301d.

  The recessed portion 301b is arranged so as to overlap the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 4310 in the vertical direction, and houses the lower end portion of the spring SP1 that returns the operation member 4310 upward (see FIG. 48).

  The support arm portion 4301c extends downward from the side surface of the opening 301a, and is formed in a bifurcated shape that sandwiches the opening / closing member 4340 from the left and right at the extending tip, and the opening / closing member 4340 is pivoted at the extending tip. It is comprised in the aspect which supports the column-shaped axial part 4301c1 to support.

  The tilt prevention arm portion 4301d contacts the inner side surfaces of the pair of opening / closing members 4340 in the first position state (see FIG. 48). Therefore, since the rotation of the opening / closing member 4340 is restricted by the tilt prevention arm portion 4301d, the posture of the opening / closing member 4340 after the return operation can be stabilized.

  The operation member 4310 differs from the operation member 310 of the first embodiment only in the lower surface shape of the upper bottom portion and the lower end shape of the main body portion 311. That is, the operation member 4310 is swelled on the lower surface of the upper bottom portion of the operation member 4310 so that the operation member 4310 can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member 4340 when the main body portion 311, the outer extending portion 313, and the operation member 4310 are pushed. And an output part 4312.

  The bulging portion 4312 has a substantially conical shape whose lower surface is inclined upward with increasing distance from the central axis, with the lower end being a portion disposed on the central axis of the main body 311. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, it is set as the aspect which the degree of a raise inclination becomes low, so that it distances from a central axis.

  The opening / closing member 4340 is a long member that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 4301c1 of the support arm portion 4301c, and has the same configuration as the opening / closing member 340 of the first embodiment. That is, the opening / closing member 4340 includes a main body plate portion 341 formed in a long plate shape when viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 48), a support hole 342, and a convex receiving portion 344 (see FIG. 8). The extension part 4343 extending along the front-rear direction toward the other opening / closing member 4340 at the upper end part of the main body plate part 341, and the side facing the tilt prevention arm part 4301d at the lower end part of the main body plate part 341 And an urging force that is wound around the shaft portion 4301c1 and is locked by the convex receiving portion 344 to rotate the opening / closing member 4340 to the inward side position. And a generated torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8).

  Note that the direction of the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 in the present embodiment is the opposite direction of the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 in the first embodiment. That is, in the state of FIG. 48, the opening / closing member 4340 is pressed against the tilt prevention arm portion 4301d by the biasing force of the spring NB1, and the rotation is restricted by the tilt prevention arm portion 4301d.

  The extended portion 4343 includes a chamfered portion 4343a that is a portion that comes into contact with the lower surface of the upper bottom portion of the operation member 4310 and is chamfered at an upper portion of the extended tip (a portion that comes into contact with the central portion of the bulging portion 4312). The chamfered portion 4343a can prevent the tip of the bulging portion 4312 from contacting the extended portion 4343 at a point, and even if the tip of the bulging portion 4312 is sharply configured, the bulging portion Damage to the tip of 4312 can be suppressed.

  The adjustment arm portion 4345 mainly includes a contact surface 4345a disposed on the lower surface of the extended distal end portion and a rotation restricting surface 4345b intersecting with the extending direction.

  The contact surface 4345a is a surface that contacts the return members 4530 and 4540 of the switching device 4500 and presses the return members 4530 and 4540 by the rotation of the opening and closing member 4340.

  The rotation restricting surface 4345b is a surface constituted by a curved shape that is recessed toward the shaft portion 4301c1 side. In the second position state shown in FIG. 54, the first return member 4530 of the switching device 4500 has a shape that matches the arc shape centered on the pivot center J41.

  Next, the switching device 4500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. In the description of the switching device 4500, FIGS. 47 and 48 are referred to as appropriate. 49A is a side view of the switching device 4500, and FIG. 49B is a top view of the switching device 4500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIXb in FIG. 49A. In FIG. 49, illustration of the drive motor 4590, the drive gear 4591, and the base member 4510 is omitted.

  50 (a) is a front view of one first return member 4530, and FIG. 50 (b) is a top view of the first return member 4530 as viewed in the direction of arrow Lb in FIG. 50 (a). 50 (c) is a side view of the first return member 4530 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Lc in FIG. 50 (a). 51 (a) is a front view of one second return member 4540, and FIG. 51 (b) is a top view of the second return member 4540 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIb in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 51C is a side view of the second return member 4540 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LIc in FIG.

  The switching device 4500 includes a base member 4510 having a slide rail 4511 extending to the left and right, a slide member 4520 disposed on the base member 4510 in a state operable along the slide rail 4511, and the slide member 4520. A plurality of return members 4530 and 4540 that are pivotally supported by a support member 4523 disposed on the upper surface, a drive motor 4590, and a drive gear 4591 are mainly provided.

  The slide rail 4511 is formed from the same cross-sectional shape in the left-right direction. Therefore, by inserting the slide member 4520 into the slide rail 4511 from the left and right directions, the slide member 4520 can be coupled to the slide rail 4511 in a slidable state.

  The slide member 4520 includes a main body plate portion 4521 formed from a plate-like member having a rectangular shape when viewed from above, gear teeth 4522 engraved on the front side surface of the main body plate portion 4521, and each corner near the upper surface of the main body plate portion 4521. And a support member 4523 provided in parallel at a position.

  As for the main body plate part 4521, a dent directed inward from the front and rear side surfaces is provided in the left-right direction, and the recessed part is fitted to the slide rail 4511. The gear teeth 4522 mesh with the drive gear 4591 (see FIG. 47), and the slide member 4520 operates in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 47) in conjunction with the operation of the drive motor 4590.

  Each pair of support members 4523 mainly includes a support hole 4523a formed coaxially in the left-right direction and a shaft member 4523b inserted and fixed in the support hole 4523a.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the first return member 4530 is formed of a long rectangular plate shape, and a main body portion 4531 in which a through hole that is pivotally supported by the shaft member 4523b is formed at the end, and the main body portion. A rotation restricting portion 4532 extending along the radial direction of the through hole from the end portion on the side where the through hole 4531 is formed, and the main body portion at the end opposite to the side where the rotation restricting portion 4532 is formed And an inclined surface portion 4533 formed at 4531.

  The main body 4531 is provided with an arc-shaped curved surface 4531a centered on the pivot support center J41 at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end.

  The rotation restricting portion 4532 is inclined and extended with respect to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 4531. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is formed at about 50 degrees.

  The inclined surface portion 4533 prevents the first return member 4530 and the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 from colliding with each other on the surfaces orthogonal to the operation direction and being damaged when the slide member 4520 slides. The inclined surface is formed at least from the end of the main body 4531 so as to contact the adjusting arm 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the second return member 4540 is formed of a long rectangular plate shape, and has a main body portion 4541 in which a through hole that is pivotally supported by the shaft member 4523b is formed at the end portion, and the main body portion. The rotation restricting portion 4542 extending along the radial direction of the through hole from the end portion on the side where the through hole of 4541 is formed, and the main body portion at the end opposite to the side where the rotation restricting portion 4542 is formed And an inclined surface portion 4543 formed on the main surface 4541.

  The main body portion 4541 is formed in a shape extending in a long direction to the opposite side of the main body portion 4531 of the first return member 4530 and the end portion is formed in a planar shape orthogonal to the longitudinal direction.

  The rotation restricting portion 4542 is inclined and extended with respect to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 4541. In this embodiment, the inclination angle is formed at about 50 degrees.

  The inclined surface portion 4543 prevents the second return member 4540 and the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 from colliding with each other at the surfaces orthogonal to the operation direction and being damaged when the slide member 4520 slides. The inclined surface is formed at least from the end portion of the main body portion 4541 so as to be in contact with the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340.

  A torsion spring NB4 is wound around the shaft member 4523b, and the return members 4530 and 4540 are urged in the direction in which the distal ends of the main body portions 4531 and 4541 are raised upward. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the rotation restricting portions 4532 and 4542 function as detents for the return members 4530 and 4540.

  Next, the function of the switching device 4500 when the switching device 4500 forms the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. 52 to 54 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. 52 illustrates a state in which the operation member 4310 is pushed down halfway, FIG. 53 illustrates a state immediately after the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the lower end position of the moving range, and FIG. The state in which the operating member 4310 is raised from the state of FIG. 53 and returned to the upper end position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52, when the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the extent that it does not reach the lower end position of the movement range, the first on the movement locus of the contact surface 4345a of the opening / closing member 4340 that is pushed and expanded by the bulging portion 4312. The main body portion 4531 of the return member 4530 is disposed, and the first return member 4530 is formed so as to tilt against the urging force of the torsion spring NB4 as the operation amount of the opening / closing member 4340 increases.

  Therefore, the reaction force applied from the operation device 4300 to the player who pushes in the operation member 4310 is urged by the reaction force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8) that urges the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530. This is a combined force of the reaction force of the torsion spring NB4. Therefore, the reaction force felt by the player increases as the amount of pushing the operation member 4310 downward increases.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the lower end of the movement range, the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed outside the movement locus of the first return member 4530. Therefore, since the load applied to the first return member 4530 by the opening / closing member 4340 is eliminated (because only the frictional force is applied to the curved surface 4531a), the first return member 4530 is raised and operated by the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 (FIG. 54).

  Therefore, the reaction force applied from the operation device 4300 to the player who pushes the operation member 4310 is greatly changed immediately after the operation member 4310 is pushed to the lower end of the movement range. That is, the urging force of the torsion spring NB4 that urges the first return member 4530 is not given to the player.

  Thereby, the reaction force felt by the player is immediately reduced. Therefore, in the process of operating the operation member 4310 to the lower end of the movement range, the reaction force felt by the player changes in a manner that decreases immediately after reaching the lower end after increasing as the operation amount increases.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the first return member 4530 is disposed on the movement trajectory of the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340, and the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 applied to the first return member 4530 via the opening / closing member 4340 is increased. Since the rotation restricting portion 4532 of the first return member 4530 is directed in the direction in which the rotation restricting portion 4532 is pressed against the slide member 4520 (the direction in which the rotation is restricted), the return of the opening / closing member 4340 is prevented. Therefore, even after the operation member 4310 is raised after FIG. 53, the opening / closing member 4340 can be maintained in the second position state.

  In this case, since the opening / closing member 4340 and the operation member 4310 do not come into contact with each other when the operation member 4310 moves upward, the biasing force of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 is applied to the operation member 4310 via the opening / closing member 4340 ( Compared to FIG. 58), the return speed of the operation member 4310 can be reduced (the return is delayed).

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the player that the switching device 4500 is in the first state by three different means. That is, the reaction force decreases immediately after the operating member 4310 is pushed to the lower end of the movement range (tactile sense), and the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state even after the player releases the hand from the operating member 4310. (Visual), and that the return operation of the operation member 4310 is slow (visual or tactile sense (operation waiting time)).

  The reason that the tactile notification indicates that the return operation of the operation member 4310 is slow is that the speed of the operation member 4310 is a measure of the continuous hit speed when the player performs the continuous hit operation. That is, in the continuous hitting operation, the player only performs an operation of pushing the operating member 4310 in one direction. However, before the player operates, the operating member 4310 is moved to the initial position (the upper position of the moving range of the operating member 4310). For the first time, the same pushing operation can be continuously performed.

  Therefore, if the return speed of the operation member 4310 is slow, even if the continuous hitting operation is performed at a certain interval (time interval until the operation member 4310 returns to the initial position), the operation member 4310 is pushed at the timing of pushing. Is not returned to the initial position, and it is possible to feel a sense of discomfort tactilely to a player who tries to operate the operation member 4310 repeatedly.

  In this way, by performing a plurality of different notifications, even if the player is not aware of any of the notifications, it is possible to leave the possibility of the player noticing with other notifications, so the switching device The possibility that the player misses that the 4500 is in the first state can be reduced.

  In addition, these notifications are notification methods that are easy for a player who operates the operation device 4300 to recognize, while other players are difficult to recognize, for example, compared to notification by sound, lighting, vibration, or the like. . Therefore, for example, when control is performed to set the switching device 4500 to the first state in a state where the jackpot is confirmed, if the above-described notification can be noticed, the jackpot is confirmed before the jackpot effect is started. Since only the operated player can recognize it, the player can be directed to operate the operation device 4300.

  In the state shown in FIG. 54, even if the operation member 4310 is pushed in, the movement range of the operation member 4310 is limited to the position where the operation member 4310 starts to contact the opening / closing member 4340 (see FIG. 53). Thereby, since the load given to the opening / closing member 4340 from the operation member 4310 can be minimized when the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state, for example, the player is not aware of the notification, and the operation member 4310 Even when the operation is continued, the operation member 4310 or the opening / closing member 4340 can be prevented from being damaged by a load generated between the opening / closing member 4340 and the operation member 4310.

  Next, the state of the switching device 4500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIG. 47 is referred to as appropriate. 55 and 56 are top views of the operation device 4300. FIG. 55 and 56, the outer wall member 4301 and the overlapping member 302 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the operation member 4310 is not illustrated. Also, in FIG. 55, the second state of the switching device 4500 in which the slide member 4520 is disposed at a position where the opening / closing member 4340 does not face any of the return members 4530, 4540 is shown, and the opening / closing member 4340 in the second position state is shown. Illustrated by an imaginary line, FIG. 56 illustrates a third state of the switching device 4500 in which the slide member 4520 is disposed at a position where the opening / closing member 4340 faces the second return member 4540.

  When the slide member 4520 is slid from the state shown in FIG. 54 to the second state shown in FIG. 55, the left-right position of the first return member 4530 is shifted from the left-right direction position of the opening / closing member 4340. The load applied to the opening / closing member 4340 from the member 4530 is released, and the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the first position state.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the second state of the switching device 4500, no reaction force is generated from the switching device 4500 to the opening / closing member 4340. Therefore, compared to the first state and the third state of the switching device 4500, the reaction force applied through the operation member 4310 to the player who operates the operation member 4310 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the third state of the switching device 4500, the horizontal position of the opening / closing member 4340 and the horizontal position of the second return member 4540 are the same. Even when the slide member 4520 is slid in a state where the operation member 4310 is pushed in (when the open / close member 4340 is moved from the first position state), the side surface of the open / close member 4340 is not 2 Since the inclined surface portion 4543 of the return member 4540 contacts and the second return member 4540 is pushed down below the opening / closing member 4340, the second return is achieved by operating the slide member 4520 while operating the operation member 4310. The problem that the member 4540 is damaged can be prevented. Accordingly, the slide member 4520 can be slid at an arbitrary timing.

  57 and 58 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 57 illustrates a state where the operation member 4310 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range, and FIG. 58 illustrates a state where the operation member 4310 is pushed down to the lower end position of the movement range.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, even when the slide member 4520 is in the third state, the urging force of the torsion spring NB4 is applied to the reaction force applied to the player by the pushing operation of the operation member 4310. No change occurs when 4520 is in the first state.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 4520 is in the third state, as shown in FIG. 58, the adjustment of the opening / closing member 4340 on the movement locus of the second return member 4540 is performed even when the operation member 4310 is pushed to the lower end position of the movement range. An arm portion 4345 is disposed. Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 transmitted to the opening / closing member 4340 via the second return member 4540 is continuously applied to the opening / closing member 4340.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a time change of reaction force applied to the player who has pushed the operation member 4310 in the present embodiment. 59, the first state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated by a solid line, the second state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated by a broken line, and the third state of the switching device 4500 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line. The In order to facilitate understanding, the solid line and the alternate long and short dash line are described in parallel with a slight distance as long as the solid line and the alternate long and short dash line overlap each other.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the switching device 4500 is in the third state, the reaction force applied to the player increases to the end and does not decrease halfway, while the switching device 4500 is in the first state. In the case of the state, the reaction force applied to the player is reduced on the way, and the reduced reaction force is maintained.

  In addition, when the switching device 4500 is set to the second state, the increase in the reaction force applied to the player is reduced compared to the first state and the third state, but the operation member 4310 is within the movement range. The reaction force in the state arranged at the lower end is the same in the first state and the second state.

  Therefore, for example, the player can operate the operation member 4310 by informing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) that the “push button is pressed. Can be directed to. That is, by making it possible for the player to grasp the jackpot expectation degree from information that only the operating person can grasp, such as increase or decrease of reaction force, it is possible to give the player a special feeling that only the player can know the result. Therefore, normally, a player who does not push in and operate the operation member 4310 from troublesomeness can enjoy and operate the operation member 4310. In addition, since the operation of gradually pushing in the operation member 4310 is more sensitive to the reaction force change than the operation of hitting the operation member 4310, the operation of hitting the operation member 4310 by the player can be suppressed, and the operation device 4300 can be suppressed. The durability of can be improved.

  In addition, for example, the player can notify the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) that “push down the button. If the reaction force is always smaller, the chance !?” for the same reason as described above. The operating member 4310 can be directed to operate. In this case, in the gameability in which it is advantageous for the player if the reaction force is lower than that in the third state, the change mode of the reaction force when the reaction force applied to the player is finally lower than that in the third state. Two patterns of the first state and the second state can be prepared.

  Accordingly, while the operation member 4310 is being operated, the reaction force is the same as in the third state, but the reaction force is reduced by completing the operation of the operation member 4310 to the lower end of the movement range, and the player's interest The player can grasp that the reaction force is low immediately after the start of the push-in operation of the operation member 4310, and improve the player's interest during the push-in operation. The mode of the reaction force that is advantageous to the player can be switched between the case (second state) and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the operation of the operation member 4310.

  In the present embodiment, when the push-in is notified, the switching device 4500 is set to the first state or the third state with a high probability (99% or more), and the second state is rarely entered. Controlled. As a result, in most cases, it is possible to direct the player to push the operation member 4310 to the lower end position (to the end) and to make the player accustomed to the reaction force in the first state and the third state. Even if the reaction force applied to the player via the member 4310 changes slightly (change due to the second state), the player can easily notice the change.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state even when the operation member 310 is pushed in the initial state of the main body ring portion 410, and the operation of the opening / closing member 340 accompanying the subsequent operation of the operation member 310 is performed. As described above, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment changes the state of the opening / closing member 340 by operating the operation member 310 in the initial state of the main body ring portion 410. The opening / closing member 340 operates in an operation mode different from the case where the operation member 310 is not operated in the initial state of the main body ring portion 410. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 61 is an exploded front perspective view of the switching device 5400. In FIG. 60, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. In FIG. 60, the main body ring portion 5410 is shown in an initial state. In FIG. 61, the drive motor 4590 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the operation device 5300 has the same configuration as the operation device 300 except that a switching device 5400 described below is incorporated instead of the switching device 400 of the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. Prepare.

  Note that the switching device 5400 is configured so that the height of each surface 421 to 423 of the adjustment step portion 5420, the position of switching between the surfaces 421 to 423, and the like are the first when no external force is applied (see FIG. 60). This is the same as the adjustment step 420 in the embodiment. Accordingly, as described in the first embodiment, the first operation is performed by pushing the operating member 310 in a state where the main body ring portion 5410 is stopped in a posture corresponding to the first effect state (see FIG. 18) or the like. The opening / closing member 340 can be made to perform the same operation as that described in the embodiment.

  On the other hand, the switching device 5400 operates relative to the main body ring portion 5410 when an external force is applied, and is divided between the opening / closing member 340 and the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 5420. Members 5450 and 5460 are provided.

  The switching device 5400 is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body portion 321 of the base member 320, so that the periphery of the base member 320 can be relatively rotated, and a donut-shaped main body ring portion 5410 in a top view is formed. And an adjustment step portion 5420 that is formed on the upper surface of the main body ring portion 5410 and stops the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 by contact with the adjustment arm portion 345, and has the same function as the adjustment step portion 5420. However, the first divided ring member 5450 that moves relative to the main body ring portion 5410 in accordance with the rotation of the main body ring portion 5410, and a similar function that is configured in a similar shape to the first divided ring member 5450. A second split ring member 5460 having gears, gear teeth 430 engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the main body ring portion 5410 in the circumferential direction, and a drive gear 491 meshed with the gear teeth 430. A driving motor 490 to be driven, mainly comprises.

  The main body ring portion 5410 includes a recessed portion 5411 that is recessed in the circumferential direction with respect to the shape of the main body ring portion 410 in the first embodiment for the purpose of accommodating the divided members 5450 and 5460, and the recessed portion. An inclined surface 5412 that is formed so as to be inclined to rise toward the side where the recessed depth increases on the circumferential side surface of the plate portion that covers 5411 from above, and a radially outer side in the vicinity of the outermost diameter portion of the main body ring portion 5410 Detected member 5413 that is housed in a projecting manner, and protrudes outwardly from the outermost diameter portion of main body ring portion 5410 below concave portion 5411 in the vicinity of the base position of detected member 5413. The locking projection 5414 is mainly provided.

  In the recessed portion 5411, the recessed depth at the center of the radial thickness of the main body ring portion 5410 is reduced, and the recessed depth at both ends is increased. Further, the recessed portions at both ends are formed such that the radial side wall has an arc shape centering on the central axis of the main body ring portion 5410.

  By inserting the main body plate portion 5451 and the extended support portion 5453 of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 into the recessed portion 5411 formed in this way, the initial state of the main body annular portion 5410 (see FIG. 60). Is formed. Even when the split ring members 5450 and 5460 protrude from the main body ring portion 5410, the split ring members 5450 and 5460 are disposed on the main body ring portion 5410 in a top view.

  The member to be detected 5413 is disposed at a position opposite to each other (a position shifted by 180 degrees) below each of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460.

  The adjustment step portion 5420 is configured in such a manner that the height of the upper side surface changes for each angular position (phase) with respect to the axis center when the main body ring portion 5410 is viewed in the rotation axis direction. Therefore, the position at which the rotation of the opening / closing member 340 stops depends on which surface of the adjustment step portion 5420 the adjustment arm portion 345 contacts. As will be described later, the upper surfaces of the first divided annular member 5450 and the second divided annular member 5460 have the same functions as the adjustment step portion 5420.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the adjustment step portion 5420 has a first surface 421 whose upper surface is the highest step h <b> 0 and a middle step h <b> 1 that is one step lower than the first surface 421. 2 surface 422, the 3rd surface 423 used as the lowest low step h2, and each connection surface which connects the circumferential direction edge parts of each of these surfaces is mainly provided (the high step h0, the middle step h1, and the low step). For h2, see FIG.

  The first divided annular member 5450 includes a main body plate portion 5451 housed in the recessed portion 5411, a bulky portion 5452 formed to increase from the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451, and a main body plate portion 5451. A pair of extended support portions 5453 that are curved and extended along the radius of curvature of the side surface in the radial direction of the main body plate portion 5451 from the radial end portion of the main plate portion 5451, and the outermost portion on the root side of the main body plate portion 5451 An adjustment portion 5454 extending downward from the diameter portion, and one end of the adjustment portion 5454 is fixed to the adjustment portion 5454 and the other end is fixed to the main body ring portion 5410. And a coil spring SP51 that urges toward the main.

  The main body plate portion 5451 and the bulking portion 5252 are formed of curved noodles whose radial side faces are located on the inner side surface and the outer side surface of the main body ring portion 5410, and the first divided annular member 5450 is formed in the recessed portion 5411. In the accommodated state (see FIG. 60), the tip end portion is formed at the same inclination angle as the connecting portion of the adjustment step portion 5420 and is provided with an inclined surface 5451a that is smoothly connected.

  The bulking portion 5452 is formed on the upper surface of the contact surface 5452a which is a flat surface which is formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 5451a and which is inclined upward as it approaches the inclined surface 5451a along the circumferential direction of the main body annular portion 5410. And a smooth upper surface 5452b.

  The abutting surface 5452 a is a surface that is disposed to face the inclined surface 5412 in the housing of the first divided annular member 5450. As shown in FIG. 60, the inclined surface 5412 rises and tilts away from the contact surface 5452a, so that a recess is formed between the contact surface 5452a and the inclined surface 5412.

  In the smooth upper surface 5452b, the arrangement of the main body ring portion 5410 in the axial direction is the same as that of the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 5420. Therefore, even if the player pushes the operation member 310 (see FIG. 6) in a state where the main body ring portion 5410 rotates and the adjustment arm portion 345 is disposed to face the smooth upper surface 5452b, the opening / closing member 340 is not rotated. The opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state by being restricted by the smooth upper surface 5452b.

  The extension support portion 5453 is formed such that the upper and lower thicknesses are slightly shorter than the vertical length of the gap of the recess portion 5411, and the radial thickness of the extension support portion 5453 is the both end portions in the radial direction of the recess portion 5411. It is made slightly thinner than the thickness of the recessed portion.

  Accordingly, the extended support portion 5453 is positioned in the radial direction and the axial direction of the main body ring portion 5410 with respect to the recessed portion 5411 and is supported so as to be relatively movable in the circumferential direction.

  The adjustment portion 5454 is a portion that regulates the operation of the first divided annular member 5450 by abutting with the locking convex portion 5414 of the main body annular portion 5410.

  In the second divided annular member 5460, the upper end portion of the increased portion 5462 is not formed as a surface like the increased portion 5452 of the first divided annular member 5450, but is formed as a raised upper side 5462b composed of sides. Except for this, the first split annular member 5450 has the same configuration. Accordingly, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

  The push-up upper side 5462b is arranged in the same manner as the first surface 421 of the adjustment step part 5420 in the axial arrangement of the main body ring part 5410. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 340 is in the second position state (see FIG. 13), and then the main body ring portion 5410 is rotated, the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 is pushed up and rides on the upper side 5462b. The opening / closing member 340 can be in the first position state.

  62 (a) and 62 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the main body ring portion 5410 along the line LXIIa-LXIIa in FIG. 62A shows a state in which the tip of the member to be detected 5413 is housed inside the outermost diameter portion of the main body ring portion 5410. FIG. 62B shows the state of the member to be detected 5413. A state in which the tip protrudes outward from the outermost diameter portion of the main body ring portion 5410 is illustrated. 62A shows the adjusting portion 5454 of each of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 in the accommodated state (see FIG. 60). In FIG. 62B, the adjusting portion 5454 is formed on the locking convex portion 5414. The abutted state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the detected member 5413 is rotatably supported by a shaft rod disposed on the main body ring portion 5410, and the main body ring is rotated by a torsion spring NB51. The portion 5410 is biased outward in the radial direction. For example, when the first divided annular member 5450 is in the accommodated state, it is returned radially inward by the adjusting portion 5454 (see FIG. 62A), but the first divided annular member 5450 is out of the accommodated state. When the adjusting portion 5454 is moved close to the shaft rod of the detected member 5413, the tip end portion of the detected member 5413 projects outward in the radial direction of the main body ring portion 5410 (see FIG. 62B).

  Thereby, by detecting the arrangement of the detected member 5413, it is possible to determine whether or not the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 are moving relative to the main body annular portion 5410. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the detected member 5413 is detected by a sensor KC51 described later.

  With reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, an operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410 will be described. 63 and 64 are top views of the operation device 5300, and FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line LXV-LXV in FIG. 63 and 64, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. 63 to 65 show the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410. FIGS. 64 and 65 show the state after the player pushes the operating member 310 from the state of FIG. 63 (opening / closing member 340). Is a state in which the position is deviated from the first position state.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the present embodiment, the detected member 5413 is arranged by projecting inward from the inner wall of the outer wall member 301 so as to face the outer wall of the main body annular portion 5410 and detecting the detected member 5413. A detection sensor KC51 for determining whether or not

  The detection sensor KC51 is arranged such that the member to be detected 5413 can be accommodated in the detection groove in a state where each of the divided annular members 5450 and 5460 extends to the end (see FIG. 67). Further, since both of the pair of detected members 5413 are configured to be detectable, in this embodiment, the player pushes the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 5410 is shifted 180 degrees from the initial state. Even when the member to be detected 5413 protrudes, detection can be performed by the same detection sensor KC51.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, when the opening / closing member 340 rotates out of the first position in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, the adjustment arm portion 345 has each of the divided ring members. It rotates to the intermediate position where it abuts on the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451 of 5450 and 5460 (see FIG. 65).

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 and the clutch member 330 are not in contact with the adjustment arm 345 in contact with the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451. That is, the state of the clutch member does not change between when the opening / closing member 340 is in the first position state and when it is in the intermediate position state. Therefore, the opening / closing member 340 determines the value of the resultant force of the urging force of the spring SP1 and the urging force of the spring SP2 which is a reaction force applied to the player who operates the operating member 310 via the operating member 310 in the first position. It can be made the same in the case of the state and the case of the intermediate position state.

  In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4) and the like do not notify the operation member 310 to be pushed in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410. That is, the state shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 is a result of the player pushing the operation member 310 without permission while the pachinko machine 10 is not informing at all.

  66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial side views of the opening / closing member 340 and the switching device 5400 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. 66 (a) shows the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, and in FIG. 66 (b), the main body ring portion 5410 is clockwise from the initial state as viewed from above (FIG. 66 (b) leftward). The state after a predetermined amount of rotation is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the opening / closing member 340 rotates from the first position state when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state, the adjustment arm portion 345 causes the first split ring member 5450 to abut. It is accommodated in a recess between the contact surface 5542a and the inclined surface 5412 of the main body ring portion 5410. Here, the abutting surface 5452a is inclined upward in the direction away from the depression, but since the degree of the inclination is close to the vertical direction side (close to 90 degrees), the adjustment arm portion 345 and the abutting surface 5452 are 66 (b), when contacting in the left-right direction, a load along the left-right direction in FIG. 66 (b) is applied from the adjustment arm portion 345 to the first divided annular member 5450.

  Accordingly, when the main body ring portion 5410 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 66A in the clockwise direction when viewed from above (leftward in FIG. 66B), the first divided ring member 5450 moves to the adjustment arm portion 345. By being restricted, the first split annular member 5450 relatively moves with respect to the main body annular portion 5410. The same applies to the second divided annular member 5460.

  FIG. 67 is a top view of the operation device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67, the outer wall member 301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 310 are not shown. In FIG. 67, the main body member 340 is in the intermediate position state, and the main body ring portion 5410 rotates until the locking convex portion 5414 comes into contact with the adjustment portion 5454 of the first split ring member 5450. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the fully extended state of the main body ring portion 5410, the detected member 5413 extends outward in the radial direction and is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor KC51. Therefore, by confirming the change in the signal output from the detection sensor KC51, it can be determined whether or not the operation member 310 has been operated when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state.

  In this determination, there is no need to collate the change timing of the sensor signal for detecting the depression of the operation member 310 with the notification timing of the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4), or the like. Incorrect operation of the operation member 310 (operation when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state) can be easily detected. Moreover, the control flow used for the detection can be shortened.

  68 (a) and 68 (b) are partial side views of the opening / closing member 340 and the switching device 5400 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIa in FIG. 68 (a) shows a state at the same time as the state shown in FIG. 67, and FIG. 68 (b) shows that the main body ring portion 5410 is rotated clockwise (as viewed from above) from the state shown in FIG. 68 (a). A further rotated state is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the opening / closing member 340 rides on the upper surface of the main body plate portion 5451 of the first split annular member 5450 and is in the intermediate position, the second opening / closing member 340 is placed between the adjustment arm portion 345 and the adjustment step portion 5420. A one-segment annular member 5450 is interposed. Therefore, even if the operation member 310 is pushed again in the first effect state to the third effect state described in the first embodiment, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated until the adjustment arm part 345 contacts the adjustment step part 5420. The opening / closing member 340 continues to maintain the intermediate position state. Therefore, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 can be made different from the operation mode described in the first embodiment, and information that is beneficial to the player such as the jackpot expectation can be obtained from the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340. It can be made impossible to read. Thereby, a player who dislikes that he or she cannot read information that is beneficial to the player can be directed not to operate the operation member 310 when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state.

  Further, by setting the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 to a halfway state of an intermediate position state, an abnormal atmosphere is produced, and the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 is determined for a player who has accidentally operated the operation member 310 unintentionally. This can be used to notify that an erroneous operation has been performed. In this case, for example, as compared with the case where an error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the presence or absence of an erroneous operation can be notified without impairing the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the above-described effect of the first divided annular member 5450 is not caused by the operation timing of the main body annular portion 5410 or the switching of the operation direction. That is, it is not necessary to change the operation mode of the main body ring portion 5410 from the operation mode of the main body ring portion 410 of the first embodiment. Accordingly, it is possible to maintain the degree of freedom for setting the operation control of the main body ring portion 5410.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), when the main body ring portion 5410 is further rotated clockwise from the top surface (leftward in FIG. 68 (b)) from the most extended state shown in FIG. Since the relative movement of the first divided annular member 5450 with respect to the main body annular portion 5410 is restricted by the contact between the stop convex portion 5414 and the adjusting portion 5454 of the first divided annular member 5450, the first divided annular member 5450 is pushed by the main body ring portion 5410 and rotates clockwise when viewed from above (FIG. 68 (b) leftward).

  Here, since the opening / closing member 340 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction of the main body annular portion 5410, the adjustment arm portion 345 is moved as the first divided annular member 5450 moves leftward in FIG. 68 (b). The adjustment arm 345 is pushed upward along the inclination of the abutment surface 5452a, and the adjustment arm portion 345 abuts against the smooth upper surface 5452b of the first divided annular member 5450.

  As described above, the smooth upper surface 5452b has the same position as the first surface 421 of the adjustment step portion 5420 in the axial direction of the main body ring portion 5410. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. It will be in the 1st position state. Therefore, as long as the player does not operate the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 is maintained in the first position state.

  Further, when the contact between the contact surface 5452a of the first divided annular member 5450 and the adjustment arm portion 345 is released, it is counterclockwise when viewed from above (FIG. 68B). ) To the right), the first split annular member 5450 is moved to the depth of the recessed portion 5411 by the restoring force of the coil spring SP51 (see FIG. 60), and the first split annular member 5450 is accommodated. Return to the state (see FIG. 60). Therefore, when the main body annular portion 5410 is in the initial state again, the first divided annular member 5450 is returned to the accommodated state, and therefore a member for returning the first divided annular member 5450 is prepared separately. It can be made unnecessary.

  69 (a) to 69 (c) are side views of the switching device 5400 and the opening / closing member 340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIa in FIG. 69 (a), the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state and the opening / closing member 340 is in the intermediate position. In FIG. 69 (b), the main body ring is changed from the state shown in FIG. 69 (a). The state in which the portion 5410 is rotated counterclockwise in the top view (rightward in FIG. 69 (b)) is shown. In FIG. 69 (c), the main body ring portion 5410 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the top view from the state shown in FIG. A state rotated in the left direction (FIG. 69 (c)) is shown.

  FIG. 69 illustrates drive control for canceling the influence of the operation of the operation member 310 in the initial state. That is, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the adjustment arm portion 345 is inserted into a recess between the inclined surface 5412 of the main body annular portion 5410 and the abutment surface 5452a of the first divided annular portion agent 5450 ( Even when the operation member 310 is pushed in in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410), before the operation of rotating the main body ring portion 5410 clockwise as viewed from above (FIG. 69 (c) leftward), By previously rotating the main body ring portion 5410 counterclockwise when viewed from above (rightward in FIG. 69 (b)) (first driving mode), the adjustment arm portion 345 is lifted to the inclined surface 5412, and the opening / closing member 340 is moved to the first position. Return to position.

  Thereby, when the operation member 310 is operated unintentionally when the main body ring portion 5410 is in the initial state, the third symbol display device has a large jackpot (99% jackpot) effect (for example, “premier effect”). ) Is displayed, the open / close member 340 can prevent a discrepancy in the pachinko machine 10 as a whole, which performs an abnormal operation.

  That is, the behavior at the start of rotation of the main body ring portion 5410 can be changed according to the expectation degree of jackpot of the effect actually performed by the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the operation member 310 is operated in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, the presentation is performed with the first divided ring portion agent 5450 interposed between the opening / closing member 340 and the adjustment step portion 5420. Or the control device can select whether to cancel the intervention.

  When the main body ring portion 5410 is operated in the first drive mode shown in FIG. 69 only when the big hit effect is performed, the opening / closing member 340 in the intermediate position state is in the first position state in the preliminary operation. By confirming that, the player can know in advance that the performance of the jackpot is almost started.

  Therefore, in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410, it is possible to provide a game method in which the operation member 310 is intentionally pushed in, the opening / closing member 340 is set in the intermediate state, and the first operation is expected to return to the first position state. . In this case, the player's line of sight can be gathered in the change in the posture of the opening / closing member 340, and the attention of the opening / closing member 340 can be improved.

  In addition, the above-described game mode in which the operation member 310 is intentionally pushed in the initial state of the main body ring portion 5410 by setting an almost jackpot effect to occur with a very low probability (for example, 1/10000) is long. It is possible to prevent the period from being continued.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state by pushing the operation member 4310 when the switching device 4500 is in the first state has been described. In the operation device 6300, the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state even when the operation member 4310 is pushed in when the switching device 4500 is in the first state according to an operation mode in which the player operates the operation member 4310. It is possible to form a case that is not. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 70, the operation device 6300 includes a movable cover member 6360 that covers the opening / closing member 4340 in the vicinity of the rotation shaft portion of the opening / closing member 4340, and an upper surface of the slide member 4520 of the switching device 6500. Except that the outer push-out member 6550 and the inner push-out member 6560 are disposed, the same configuration as the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is provided. In FIG. 70, only in the vicinity of the rotation shaft portion of the opening / closing member 4340 and the moving cover member 6360, a cross-sectional shape at a position passing through a pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361 of the moving cover member 6360 is illustrated.

  That is, the operation device 6300 generates the driving force of the outer wall member 4301, the overlapping member 302, the operation member 4310, the pair of opening / closing members 4340, and the drive gear 4591 that operates the switching device, as in the fourth embodiment. A drive motor 4590 for moving, a movable cover member 6360 disposed on the opening / closing member 4340 so as to be capable of relative movement with respect to the opening / closing member 4340, and a lower portion of the opening / closing member 4340. It mainly includes a switching device 6500 configured to be able to switch between a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is urged by contact and a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 is not in contact with the opening / closing member 4340 by a straight movement.

  As in the fourth embodiment, the switching device 6500 includes a base member 4510, a slide member 4520, a first return member 4530, a second return member 4540, and a torsion spring NB4, and a moving cover. When the opening / closing member 4340 rotates in a state of facing the member 6360, the outer push-out member 6550 that places the moving cover member 6360 at the outer position, and in the state of facing the moving cover member 6360, the opening / closing member 4340 is in the first position state. The inner push-out member 6560 that mainly places the movable cover member 6360 at the inner position as the initial position is provided.

  71 (a) is a side view of the switching device 6500, and FIG. 71 (b) is a top view of the switching device 6500 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIb in FIG. 71 (a).

  In order to facilitate understanding, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), an imaginary straight line extending along the direction connecting the pair of first return members 4530 is connected to the first return member 4530 and the first return member 4530. 2 are arranged at equal intervals in the direction connecting the return member 4540. In FIG. 71, the base member 4510 is not shown.

  That is, FIG. 71B shows a fixed position line Wr passing through the center of the width of the pair of first return members 4530 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 71B) and the pair of second return members 4540. Of the non-fixed side position line Wn passing through the center of the width length, the return position line Wc disposed between the fixed side position line Wr and the non-fixed side position line Wn, and the fixed side position line Wr and the return position line Wc. A fixed intermediate line Wcr disposed in the middle and a non-fixed intermediate line Wcn disposed in the middle of the non-fixed position line Wn and the return position line Wc are illustrated.

  Each line Wr, Wn, Wc, Wcr, Wcn is illustrated as a reference line in which the center of the width length (dimension in the vertical direction of FIG. 70) of the opening / closing member 4340 is arranged in a top view.

  That is, for example, when the switching device 6500 is in the first state described above in the fourth embodiment, the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed on the fixed-side position line Wr in a top view. In the present embodiment, the slide member 4520 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 forms five types of stop positions arranged on the lines Wr, Wn, Wc, Wcr, Wcn in a top view. The

  The outer extrusion member 6550 is. When viewed from above, the center of the thickness length (length in the vertical direction in FIG. 71 (b)) coincides with the fixed-side intermediate line Wcr and the non-fixed-side intermediate line Wcn, and the width is wide in the front and rear (FIG. 71 (b) left and right). A main body portion 6551 having a T-shape in side view formed from the shape and a chamfered portion 6552 formed by chamfering at the upper end portion of the main body portion 6551 are mainly provided.

  The upper end portion of the main body portion 6551 is a portion that can come into contact with the movable cover member 6360 when the opening / closing member 4340 rotates. Since the chamfered portion 6552 is formed at all corners in a top view and has a substantially elliptical shape, the movable cover member 6360 and the outer push-out member 6550 come into contact with each other while the slide member 4520 is sliding. In addition, since the generated load can be released in a direction in which the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 can move, it is possible to prevent the constituent members from being damaged.

  The outer pushing member 6550 does not come into contact with the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 when the center of the width of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed on the other lines Wr, Wn, Wc in a top view. Formed from.

  The inner pushing member 6560 is formed by a pair of rod-like members arranged before and after the center of the thickness length (length in the vertical direction in FIG. 71 (b)) coincides with the return position line Wc when viewed from above, and has an upper end portion. The main body portion 6561 having an L-shape in side view and extending portions that extend to opposite sides from each other, and a chamfered portion 6562 formed by chamfering at the upper end portion of the main body portion 6561 are mainly provided.

  The upper end portion of the main body portion 6561 is a portion that can come into contact with the movable cover member 6360 when the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed in the first position state. Since the chamfered portion 6562 is formed at all corners at the tip of the extended portion in a top view, and is rounded, the moving cover member 6360 and the inner pushing member 6560 are in the middle of the sliding operation of the sliding member 4520. Even if the contact occurs, the generated load can be released in the direction in which the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 can move, so that the constituent members can be prevented from being damaged.

  The inner pushing member 6560 is in contact with the opening / closing member 4340 and the moving cover member 6360 when the center of the width of the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed on the other lines Wr, Wn, Wcr, Wcn in a top view. It is formed from the aspect which does not.

  Details of the opening / closing member 4340 and the movable cover member 6360 will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a) is a front view of the opening / closing member 4340, FIG. 72 (b) is a side view of the opening / closing member 4340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIIb in FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 72 (d) is a front view of the movable cover member 6360, FIG. 72 (d) is a side view of the movable cover member 6360 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIId in FIG. 72 (c), and FIG. 72 (e) is FIG. It is a top view of the movable cover member 6360 in the arrow LXXIIe direction view. Note that the opening / closing member 4340 described in the present embodiment and the opening / closing member 4340 described in the fourth embodiment are the same members, but the details will be described here.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the opening / closing member 4340 is formed in a long plate shape as viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 72 (a)), as in the fourth embodiment. A plate portion 341, a support hole 342, and a convex receiving portion 344 (see FIG. 8) are provided, and at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 341, the front-rear direction (see FIG. 72 (a ) An extending portion 4343 extending along the left-right direction), an adjusting arm portion 4345 extending to the opposite side of the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 341 facing the other opening / closing member 4340, and a shaft And a torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8) that is wound around the portion 4301c1 and is engaged with the convex receiving portion 344 to generate an urging force that rotates the opening / closing member 4340 to the inward position.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the end on the support hole 342 side of the main body plate portion 341 is thinner in the axial direction than other portions, and an inclined side surface 4341a is formed at the boundary of the thickness. . The inclined side surface 4341a is formed as a side surface parallel to the contact surface 4345a of the adjustment arm portion 4345.

  The adjustment arm portion 4345 mainly includes a contact surface 4345a disposed on the lower surface of the extended distal end portion and a rotation restricting surface 4345b intersecting with the extending direction.

  The contact surface 4345a is a surface that contacts the return members 4530 and 4540 of the switching device 6500 and presses the return members 4530 and 4540 by the rotation operation of the opening and closing member 4340.

  The rotation restricting surface 4345b is a surface constituted by a curved shape that is recessed toward the shaft portion 4301c1 side. In the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340 (see FIG. 54), the opening / closing member 4340 has a shape that coincides with the arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the return members 4530 and 4540 of the switching device 4500.

  As shown in FIGS. 72C to 72E, the movable cover member 6360 has a main body member 6361 formed in a U-shape when viewed from above and a pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361 having a long hole shape. A pair of adjustment long holes 6362 that are formed so as to penetrate, a connecting portion 6363 that is a part of the main body member 6361 and connects the pair of parallel plates, and extends from the tips of the pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361. Extending arm 6364 mainly.

  The main body member 6361 has a positioning flat surface 6361a formed as a flat surface on the upper surface thereof, in which the distance between the pair of parallel plates is approximately the same as the thickness of the end portion on the support hole 342 side of the opening / closing member 4340.

  A static frictional force is generated between the pair of parallel plates of the main body member 6361 and the opening / closing member 4340 in the assembled state (see FIG. 70). Therefore, in order to cause the opening / closing member 4340 and the main body member 6361 to move relative to each other, a load greater than the maximum static frictional force is required.

  In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring NB1 (see FIG. 8) that urges the opening / closing member 4340 toward the side disposed in the second position state causes the opening / closing member 4340 to be in the first position state (see FIG. 70). In the case where the biasing force of the torsion spring NB4 is greater than the maximum static friction force described above, and the displacement of the torsion spring NB4 is maximum (see FIG. 77), Thus, the spring constants of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 are set. Thus, when the movable cover 6360 is pressed against the outer push-out member 6550 or the inner push-out member 6560, the movable cover 6360 rubs relative to the opening / closing member 4340 and moves relative to the return member 4530, 4540. Can be prevented from moving relative to the opening / closing member 4340.

  The positioning plane 6361a is a surface that comes into contact with the inclined side surface 4341a in the assembled state (see FIG. 70). When the positioning flat surface 6361a and the inclined side surface 4341a are in surface contact with each other, the posture deviation of the movable cover member 6360 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340 is prevented.

  The adjustment long hole 6362 is a long hole that extends along a straight line parallel to the positioning plane 6361a and whose length in the short direction is equal to the diameter of the support hole 342. The adjustment long hole 6361a and the inclined side surface 4341a. In a state of surface contact, the support hole 342 is disposed at a position including the support hole 342 as viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 72C).

  Thus, in the assembled state (see FIG. 70), the opening / closing member 4340 and the moving cover member 6360 are supported by the common shaft portion 4301c1, and the moving cover member 6360 is extended from the opening / closing member 4340 by the adjustment long hole 6362. It can be relatively moved along the direction (the extending direction of the inclined side surface 4341a).

  The extended arm portion 6364 is axially disposed when the end portion of the adjustment elongated hole 6362 on the extended arm portion 6364 side and the support hole 342 of the opening / closing member 4340 are disposed at the same position as viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 70). It is formed in such a manner that it has the same outer shape as that of the adjustment arm portion 4345 when viewed. For example, the lower side surface of the extended arm portion 6364 is formed as a plane parallel to the positioning plane 6361 a and the adjustment slot 6362.

  Therefore, for example, when the end of the adjustment elongated hole 6362 on the extending arm portion 6364 side and the support hole 342 of the opening / closing member 4340 are disposed at the same position (see FIG. 70) (see FIG. 70). When the opening / closing member 4340 is rotated to come into contact with the return members 4530 and 4540, the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the open / close member 4340 and the return members 4530 and 4540 come into direct contact with each other. This is different from the mode in which 6360 is interposed. Hereinafter, a case where the moving cover member 6360 is interposed between the opening / closing member 4340 and the return members 4530 and 4540 will be described.

  73 is a top view of the operation device 6300, and FIGS. 74 and 75 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along the line LXXIV-LXXIV in FIG. In FIG. 73, the outer wall member 4301, the overlapping member 302, and the operation member 4310 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 73 illustrates a fixed-side intermediate state in which the fixed-side intermediate line Wcr of the switching device 6500 coincides with the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 in a top view, and in FIG. 74, the first position of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 75, the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 73, control is performed so that the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4), etc. do not notify the operation member 4310 to be pushed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 75 is a result of the player pushing the operation member 4310 without permission while the pachinko machine 10 is not informing at all.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, when the operating member 4310 is pushed and the opening / closing member 4340 rotates from the first position, the outer push-out member 6550 and the connecting portion 6363 of the movable cover member 6360 are in contact with each other. In contact therewith, the movable cover member 6360 is pushed from the inner position toward the outer position. When the opening / closing member 4340 is rotated to the second position by this pushing, the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position (see FIG. 75).

  Even if the player stops the push-down operation, the operation member 4310 returns upward from the state shown in FIG. 75, and the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the first position state, a force to return the movable cover member 6360 to the inside is generated. Therefore, the arrangement of the moving cover member 6360 is maintained at the outer position.

  Here, since the moving cover member 6360 moves on a straight line passing through the rotation axis of the opening / closing member 4340, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 4340 from changing due to the movement of the moving cover member 6360. . Thus, the reaction force applied to the player via the operation member 4310 can be prevented from changing, so that the player can change the state of the switching device 6500 between the fixed side and the change by the reaction force applied from the operation member 4310. It can be difficult to recognize that it is in a state.

  76 is a top view of the operation device 6300, and FIG. 77 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 6300 along the line LXXVII-LXXVII in FIG. In FIG. 76, the outer wall member 4301 and the overlapping member 302 are shown by imaginary lines, and the operation member 4310 is not shown. 76 shows a first state in which the fixed side position line Wc of the switching device 6500 coincides with the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 in a top view, and FIG. 77 shows a second position state of the opening / closing member 4340. Is illustrated.

  76 and 77, after the operating member 4310 is operated while the switching device 6500 is in the fixed intermediate state as shown in FIG. 75, the return position line Wc of the switching device 6500 is an opening / closing member in a top view. The case where the switching device 6500 is set to the first state without passing through the second state that coincides with the center of the width length of 4340 is illustrated. Therefore, the movable cover member 6360 is maintained at the outer position.

  As shown in FIG. 77, even when the operation member 4310 is operated with the movable cover member 6360 disposed at the outer position and the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state, the first return member 4530 remains on the movement locus. Since the movable cover member 6360 is still disposed and the movable cover member 6360 is interposed between the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530, the opening / closing member 4340 continues to receive a load from the first return member 4530.

  That is, when the opening / closing member 4340 is fixed in the second position state depending on whether the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the inner position or the outer position (see FIG. 54), The case where the movable cover member 6360 is interposed and still receives the reaction force from the first return member 4530 can be caused.

  In other words, the state of the switching device 6500 is the same as that in the first state depending on whether or not the player operates the operation member 4310 in a state where the switching device 6500 is disposed at the fixed-side intermediate position and there is no push-in notification. Nevertheless, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the operation member 4310 by the player. This change is a change that leads to confusion for the player. This will be described below.

  The operation device 6300 in the present embodiment notifies information that is beneficial to the player by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 when the operation member 4310 is pushed in. Since the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 can be switched depending on the state of the switching device 6500, the drive motor 4590 is driven so as to switch the state of the switching device 6500 in accordance with information that is beneficial to the player. The state of the device 6500 is controlled. In the present embodiment, the switching device 6500 is controlled so that the opening / closing member 4340 is easily maintained in the second position when the degree of jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level.

  Here, in the first state of the switching device 6500, if the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the inner position (initial position), the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position as the opening / closing member 4340 is brought into the second position state. This is a state maintained in the position state (see FIG. 54). On the other hand, in the third state of the switching device 6500 (see FIGS. 56 to 58), the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state, and returns to the first position state as the operation member 4310 is raised. Therefore, the player can grasp the difference in the state of the switching device 6500 based on whether or not the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the second position state, and the profit as the expectation degree as intended by the control side is determined from the difference in the state. Can be understood by the player (expected degree of jackpot in the first state> expected degree of jackpot in the third state).

  However, when the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position, even when the switching device 6500 is in the first state, the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state, and the first operation is performed as the operation member 4310 is raised. Since it returns to the position state, it cannot be distinguished from the case where the switching device 6500 is in the third state, and it is difficult to determine the state of the switching device 6500 from the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player visually recognizing the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 is reduced.

  In the state shown in FIG. 77, the first return member 4530 rotates in accordance with the rotation amount of the opening / closing member 4340, and the reaction force of the torsion spring NB4 that increases in accordance with the rotation angle is given to the player. This is given to the player because the reaction force applied to the player when the switching device 6500 is in the third state (see FIGS. 56 to 58) is equivalent in terms of absolute value and change mode. It becomes difficult to determine the state of the switching device 6500 from the reaction force. Therefore, the profit obtained by concentrating the consciousness on the reaction force when the player operates the operation member 4310 and identifying the difference in the reaction force is reduced.

  In other words, if the switching device 6500 is disposed at the fixed-side intermediate position and there is no push-in notification, and if the operation member 4310 is not operated, the player can obtain the profit obtained by visually recognizing the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340. Can be maintained. Further, it is possible to maintain the profit obtained by concentrating the consciousness on the reaction force given to the player through the operation member 4310 and identifying the difference in the reaction force. Thereby, it can suppress that a player pushes in and operates the operation member 4310 in the state where there is no notification of pushing.

  77, when the switching device 6500 is set to the second state, the movable cover member 6360 disposed at the outer position receives an inward load from the inner pushing member 6560 and is pushed to the inner position. (See FIG. 70). That is, the inner pushing member 6560 is formed in such a manner that the end in the extending direction of the adjusting arm portion 4345 and the end of the inner pushing member 6560 overlap on the same line when viewed in the axial direction (see FIG. 70). Accordingly, even when the moving cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position by operating the operation member 4310 by the player, the switching device 6500 goes into the first state after passing through the second state. The influence of the player's operation can be canceled.

  Thereby, when the operation member 4310 is operated unintentionally when the switching device 6500 is in the fixed-side intermediate state, the third symbol display device has an effect of almost jackpot (99% jackpot) (for example, “premier effect”). ) Is displayed, the open / close member 4340 can prevent a discrepancy in the pachinko machine 10 as a whole that performs an operation with a low degree of expectation (an operation that is not maintained in the second position state).

  In other words, the behavior of the switching device 6500 after the switching device 6500 is arranged in the fixed intermediate state is configured to be changeable according to the jackpot expectation of the effect actually performed by the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, when the switching device 6500 operates the operation member 4310 in the fixed intermediate state, the moving cover member 6360 performs an effect of urging the operation member 4310 to be pushed in a state where the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position. It is possible to select on the control device side whether or not an effect of urging the operation member 4310 to be pushed is performed after the position of is set to the inner position.

  For example, after the switching device 6500 is set to the fixed-side intermediate state before performing the effect of prompting the operation member 4310 to be pushed, the switching device 6500 is switched via the second state immediately before the effect of prompting the operation member 4310 to be pushed. By operating in the first mode of operation (first driving mode), even when the movable cover member 6360 is disposed at the outer position, the operation member 4310 is pushed after being returned to the inner position. Production can be performed.

  As another operation, after the non-fixed-side intermediate line Wcn of the switching device 6500 is set to the non-fixed-side intermediate state that coincides with the center of the width length of the opening / closing member 4340 when viewed from above, the effect of prompting the operation member 4310 to be pushed The switching device 6500 is provided with an operation mode (an operation mode in which the rotation direction of the drive motor 4590 is reversed with respect to the first drive mode) in which the switching device 6500 is set to the third state via the second state immediately before. Therefore, it can be difficult to grasp the operation sound or mechanical vibration of the switching device 6500 operating in the first drive mode (the player can hear the operation sound or the frame of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). It can be difficult to notice that the switching device 6500 is operating in the first drive mode by feeling the vibration transmitted through.

  As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the jackpot expectation information corresponding to the difference in the state of the switching device 6500 without pressing the operation member 4310. That is, the difference in the state of the switching device 6500 cannot be grasped unless the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 that operates in accordance with the operation of the operation member 4310 is visually recognized. Therefore, attention to the state of the opening / closing member 4340 after operating the operation member 4310 can be improved, and the player can be directed to operate the operation member 4310.

  As described above, the sixth embodiment is configured such that when the operation member 4310 is pushed in when there is no notification for pushing, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 changes, and the information obtained from the opening / closing member 4340 is reduced. Therefore, the player can be directed to perform the operation as informed.

  In addition, whether or not the operation member 4310 is pushed while ignoring the notification, the notification is ignored by mixing the operation mode of the opening and closing member 4340 with a control that enables the player to obtain useful information. Thus, even after the operation member 4310 is operated, it is possible to maintain the attention to the opening / closing member 4340.

  Further, even if the operation member 4310 is operated when there is no notification for pushing, the reaction force applied to the player from the operation member 4310 does not change, so the operation mode of the opening / closing member 4340 is intentionally ignored at a desired timing. It is possible to prevent the player who operates the operation member 4310 from feeling uncomfortable due to the reaction force changing during the push-in operation.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 92. In the third embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 340 can be rotated and the case where the opening / closing member 340 is not rotated depending on the distance by which the operation member 310 is pushed is described. However, the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment Depending on the period during which the operation device 7300 is operated, there are formed a case where the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state and a case where the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state and returns to the first position state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  78 and 79 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 78 and 79, the switching device 7500 is in a first state to be described later. 78, the first position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated, and in FIG. 79, the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340 is illustrated.

  The operation device 7300 in the present embodiment is configured such that the operation member 4310 is relatively movable with respect to the operation cover 7320 that is directly operated by the player while partially using the configuration of the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. Is very different.

  That is, the operation device 7300 includes an opening / closing member 4340 having the same shape as that of the fourth embodiment, and has a function of giving a rendering effect to the operation device 7300 itself by partially viewing the internal mechanism. The outer wall member 7301 is formed to have an opening 301a at the bottom center of the shape and is fixed to the front frame 14 in such a manner that an operation device such as the switching device 7500 is accommodated between the front frame 14 (see FIG. 5). The outer wall member 7301 has an opening 7302a that is formed in a shape with a reduced width in the height direction and that is coaxial with the opening 301a and has a slightly larger diameter, and an internal space is formed between the outer wall member 7301 and the outer wall member 7301. And an internal space formed by the outer wall member 7301 and the overlapping member 7302 inserted through the openings 301a and 7302a. The plate-shaped operation member 4310 made of a light transmissive material, the operation of which is restricted by the operation member 4310, the operation cover 7320 covered by the operation member 4310, and the operation member 4310 supported by the outer wall member 7301. And a pair of opening / closing members 4340 configured to be tiltable according to the amount of operation, and the opening / closing member 4340 disposed below the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state even after the player releases his / her hand from the operation member 4310. The switching device 7500 configured to be able to switch between the state that can be maintained in the state and the state that the opening / closing member 4340 cannot be maintained in the second position state, and the drive that generates the driving force of the drive gear 4591 that operates the switching device 7500 And a motor 4590.

  The outer wall member 7301 includes an opening 301a, a recessed portion 301b, a pair of support arm portions 4301c, and a tilt prevention arm portion 4301d in the same manner as the outer wall member 4301 in the fourth embodiment, and is equivalent to the outer wall member 4301. In addition, the upper end position of the support arm portion 4301c is formed at the inner side of the opening 301a so as to be lowered, and is formed in a U-shaped push-up member 7301e that is pivotally supported by the support arm portion 4301c. It mainly includes a through hole 7301f drilled in the bottom of the portion 301b and a detection sensor KC71 disposed below the through hole 7301f.

  The support arm 4301c is longer in width in the present embodiment than in the fourth embodiment, so that a region for supporting the push-up member 7301e can be secured and the switching device 7500 in a top view can be secured. Visibility can be deteriorated. Therefore, it is satisfied by grasping the state of the switching device 7500 through the operation member 4310, and the game method of not operating the operation member 4310 can be suppressed.

  The push-up member 7301e is a member that changes its posture as the operation cover 7320 is pushed down. Details of the relationship with the operation cover 7320 will be described later.

  The opening 7302a of the overlapping member 7302 is formed to have a larger diameter than the opening 302a corresponding to the operation cover 7320 having a larger diameter than the operation member 4310 of the fourth embodiment.

  The operation cover 7320 is a member that is covered with the operation member 4310 and is formed in a reverse cup shape from a light-transmitting material, and has a reverse cup-shaped main body having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the operation member 4310. A portion 7321, a protruding portion 7322 that protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 7321 toward the axial center side, and an annular shape extending from the opening tip of the main body portion 7321 in the outer diameter direction. A flange portion 7323 extending further downward from the extending tip, a restricting portion 7324 extending in the inner diameter direction from the lower end portion of the flange portion 7323, and a through hole 7301 f of the outer wall member 7301 from the restricting portion 7324. And a detection unit 7325 extending so as to be able to be inserted therethrough.

  The protruding portion 7322 is a portion that reduces the contact area between the operation member 4310 and the operation cover 7320 by being arranged between the operation member 4310 and the operation member 4310. As a result, the operation member 4310 easily rubs against the operation cover 7320 (it becomes easy to move relative).

  The downward extending length of the flange portion 7323 is formed longer than the thickness of the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 4310, and the restricting portion 7324 is disposed below the outer extending portion 313. That is, when the load that restricts the vertical movement of the operation member 4310 is released, the operation member 4310 is configured to move downward to a position where the outer extending portion 313 rides on the restriction portion 7324.

  The detection unit 7325 is detached from the detection sensor KC71 when the operation cover 7320 is not pushed in and is disposed at the upper end position, and is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor KC71 after the operation cover 7320 is pushed in (FIG. 79). Thereby, the control operation side can recognize whether or not the operation cover 7320 has been pushed.

  FIG. 79 illustrates a state in which the operation member 4310 is disposed at the lower end of the movement range with respect to the operation cover 7320. When the operation member 4310 is arranged as shown in FIG. 79, the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state for the first time. In other words, when the operation member 4310 is not arranged as shown in FIG. 79 (see, for example, FIG. 78), the opening / closing member 4340 is not in the second position state no matter how much the operation cover 7320 is pushed. Therefore, in the following, the state of the operation member 4310 shown in FIG. 79 (the state disposed at the lower end of the movement range) is referred to as an allowable state of the operation member 4310, and the other state is referred to as a restricted state of the operation member 4310.

  In this embodiment, when a load from the push-up member 7301e is generated on the operation member 4310, the operation member 4310 is in a restricted state, and the load from the push-up member 7301e on the operation member 4310 is released. Then, the operation member 4310 is configured to descend by the action of gravity.

  With reference to FIGS. 80 and 81, a change in the state of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in will be described. FIG. 80A, FIG. 80B, FIG. 81A, and FIG. 81B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line LXXXa-LXXXa in FIG. In FIG. 80A, the state in which the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the upper end position of the moving range is shown, and in FIG. 80B, the state in which the operation cover 7320 is pushed by a predetermined amount is shown in FIG. FIG. 81 (b) shows a state where the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the lower end position of the movement range, and FIG. 81 (b) shows a state after a predetermined period has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 81 (a). Note that the illustration of the detection sensor KC71 and the detection unit 7325 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the push-up member 7301e is urged upward by the urging spring, and in the state shown in FIG. 80A, the push-up load having a magnitude exceeding the load due to gravity is applied to the operation member 4310. give. That is, the state shown in FIG. 80A is maintained by the push-up member 7301e supporting the operation member 4310.

  FIG. 80B is illustrated as a limit position for supporting the operation member 4310 with respect to the operation cover 7320. That is, when the operation cover 7320 further moves down, the push-up member 7301e is pushed down by the restricting portion 7324, and the push-up member 7301e is separated from the operation member 4310.

  In FIG. 81A, the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the lower end position of the movement range, while the push-up member 7301e is separated from the operation member 4310 (a state separated downward). In this state, since no load is applied from the push-up member 7301e to the operation member 4310, the operation member 4310 is gradually lowered by its own weight.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (b), the lowering operation of the operation member 4310 stops at a position where the outer extending portion 313 of the operation member 4310 gets on the restriction portion 7324. The state shown in FIG. 81B is an allowable state of the operation member 4310 (see FIG. 79).

  That is, in this embodiment, after the operation cover 7320 is pushed in, the opening / closing member 4340 is brought into the second position state after a predetermined period. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

  82 and 83 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along the line corresponding to the XLVIII-XLVIII line of FIG. 82 and 83, the switching device 7500 is in a first state to be described later. 82 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 81A, and FIG. 83 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 81B. FIG. 83 shows the second position state of the opening / closing member 4340.

  In FIG. 82, although the operation cover 7320 has been pushed to the lower end of the movement range, the opening / closing member 4340 is still receiving a load from the first return member 4530 (the opening / closing member 4340 on the movement locus of the first return member 4530). Is placed). Therefore, when the player releases his hand from the operation cover 7320 in the state shown in FIG. 82, the operation cover 7320 and the operation member 4310 return to the upper end position, and the opening / closing member 4340 returns to the first position state.

  On the other hand, if the push-in is maintained for a certain period (about 3 seconds in this embodiment) from the state shown in FIG. 82, the operation member 4310 descends with respect to the operation cover 7320, and the opening / closing member 4340 is moved to the first position as shown in FIG. There is a two-position state. Therefore, only when the player operates the operation cover 7320 with a short-time operation or operates the operation cover 7320 with a long-term operation (about 3 seconds or more), the opening / closing member 4340 has the second opening / closing member 4340. It can be made to be in a position state.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a change in the arrangement of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time. FIG. 85 shows the arrangement of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short time. FIG.

  First, FIG. 84 will be described. The upper graph in FIG. 84 shows a change in timed arrangement of the operation cover 7320 (upper position or lower end position), and the lower graph in FIG. 84 shows a change in timed arrangement of the operation member 4310. Note that the vertical length of the upper graph and the vertical length of the lower graph do not correspond to each other (the lower graph has a vertically compressed relationship). Also, in the lower graph of FIG. 84, the restricted state is a position immediately before reaching the lower end position of the operating range of the operating member illustrated by a white circle from the upper end position of the operating range of the operating member 4310 illustrated by the black circle It is illustrated as a range up to.

  In the first state of the switching device 7500 shown in FIG. 84, since the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed opposite to the first return member 4530 of the switching device 7500, the operation member 4310 is allowed to be allowed, that is, the operation cover 7320 This means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position when pushed. Therefore, in FIG. 84, when the lower graph is in the allowable state, it means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state.

  As shown in FIG. 84, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long period of time, the operation member 4310 is allowed after a predetermined period (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed. Therefore, the opening / closing member 4340 can be brought into the second position state by pushing the operation cover 7320 for a long time.

  Next, FIG. 85 will be described. The upper and lower graphs show the same items as in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short period (less than 3 seconds in this embodiment, about 1 second), each time the operation cover 7320 is placed at the upper end position of the movement range, Since the operation member 4310 is pushed up by the push-up member 7301e, the operation member 4320 is not allowed. The same applies to a case where the operation is repeated for a short period of time (continuous hitting operation).

  Therefore, when the switching device 7500 is set to the first state, the operation member 4310 is allowed to be in an allowable state by pressing the operation cover 7320 for a long period of time, while the operation member 4310 is in an allowable state for an operation of pressing the operation cover for a short period of time and repeated operations. The opening / closing member 4340 is formed so as not to be in the second position state.

  In this way, it is possible to change whether or not the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state according to the operation mode of the operation cover 7320 without changing the arrangement of the switching device 7500. In the effect that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher than a certain level in the position state, the player can be directed to perform the operation as informed.

  In other words, when the switching device 7500 is in the first state and the expected value of jackpot is higher than a certain level, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4) notify that “Press and hold the button”. When the player presses the operation cover 7320 for a long time (see FIG. 84), the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state, and the player can grasp that the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level. When the notification is ignored and the button is pressed or repeatedly hit, the opening / closing member 4340 is not in the second position state, and the player cannot grasp that the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level.

  In this case, if the operation cover 7320 is operated while ignoring the notification, the amount of information that can be obtained by the player is reduced even if the operation cover 7320 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to perform the operation as reported as an operation method that does not impair the amount of information obtained.

  If the player does not want to obtain any information related to the jackpot expectation level, the user can achieve the purpose by not operating the operation cover 7320 at all.

  Next, the switching device 7500 will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (a) is a top view of the switching device 7500, FIG. 86 (b) is a side view of the switching device 7500 in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a), and FIG. It is a front view of the switching apparatus 7500 in the arrow LXXXVIc direction view of Fig.86 (a). In FIG. 86, the base member 4510 is not shown.

  The switching device 7500 includes a base member 4510 (see FIG. 78), a slide member 4520, a first return member 4530 in which two pairs of front and rear members are disposed on the left and right, and between the two sets of first return members 4530. Are mainly provided with a second return member 7540 that is disposed at a position that equally divides the slide member 4520 and a pair of pillar members 7550 that extend upward from the front and rear ends of the slide member 4520.

  The second return member 7540 mainly includes a main body portion 4541, a rotation restricting portion 4542, and an inclined surface portion 7543 formed on the main body portion 4541 at the end opposite to the side where the rotation restricting portion 4542 is formed. Prepare.

  The inclined surface portion 7543 prevents the second return member 7540 and the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340 from colliding with each other at the surfaces orthogonal to the operation direction and being damaged when the slide member 4520 slides. The inclined surface is formed at least from the end portion of the main body portion 4541 so as to be in contact with the adjustment arm portion 4345 of the opening / closing member 4340. Unlike the fourth embodiment, the main body portion 4541 is formed on both left and right sides.

  FIG. 87 is a top view of the operation device 7300. In FIG. 87, the outer wall member 7301, the overlapping member 7302, and the imaginary line are shown, and the cover member 7320 and the operation member 4310 are not shown. In FIG. 87, a third state of the switching device 7500 is shown.

  Note that the description of the third state of the switching device 7500 represents one arrangement of the slide member 4520 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340. Here, in the third state, in the slide member 4520, the opening / closing member 4340 and the first return member 4530 on the left side (left side in FIG. 87) are arranged to face each other. In the first state of switching device 7500 shown in FIG. 78, slide member 4520 has opening / closing member 4340 and first return member 4530 on the right side (right side in FIG. 87) arranged to face each other.

  As described above, in the first state and the third state of the switching device 7500, the opening and closing member 4340 is similarly opposed to the first return member 4530. However, in the first state and the third state, the push-up member The state of 7301e is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 87, in the third state of the switching device 7500, the push-up member 7301e is brought into contact with the column member 7550 and changes its posture. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  88A and 88B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 88A shows a state in which the operation cover 7320 is disposed at the upper end position of the movement range, and FIG. 88B shows a state in which the operation cover 7320 has been pushed down to the lower end position of the movement range. Illustrated. Note that the illustration of the detection sensor KC71 and the detection unit 7325 is omitted for easy understanding.

  89 and 90 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 taken along line LXXXIX-LXXXIX in FIG. 87. 89 shows a state corresponding to FIG. 88 (a), and FIG. 90 shows a state corresponding to FIG. 88 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 89, in the third state of the switching device 7500, the column member 7550 is in a tilted position in contact with the push-up member 7301e, so that the push-up member 7301e and the operation member 4310 are , And the load on the operating member 4310 from the push-up member 7301e is released.

  At this time, even if the operation cover 7320 is pushed in, a load from the push-up member 7301e is not given to the player, so that the operation cover 7320 is arranged (with the operation amount) via the operation cover 7320. The magnitude of the reaction force given to the player is different from the reaction force generated when the switching device 7500 is in the first state.

  When the load from the push-up member 7301e is released, the operation member 4310 descends by its own weight and stops at the lower end position with respect to the operation cover 7320 (see FIG. 89). That is, since the operation member 4310 forms a preliminary state in an allowable state in advance, the opening / closing member 4340 can be immediately brought into the second position state after the operation cover 7320 is pushed down (FIG. 88 ( b) and FIG. 90).

  The operation member 4310 moves up and down inside the operation cover 7320 that moves up and down by operation. Since this moving direction is along the line of sight (vertical direction) in which the player visually recognizes the operation cover 7320, it is difficult to recognize that the operation member 4310 has moved relative to the operation cover 7320. .

  In this embodiment, the urging force of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 applied upward to the operation member 4310 via the opening / closing member 4340 causes the operation member 4310 to move within the operating range of the opening / closing member 4340 and the return members 4530 and 4540. The spring constants of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4 are set so as to be smaller than the own weight. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lowering operation of the operation member 4310 from being obstructed by the urging force of the torsion springs NB1 and NB4.

  In the present embodiment, when the switching device 7500 is in the third state, the drive motor 4590 is pushed in for a long period (about 3 seconds or longer) and the drive motor 4590 is switched to the second state of the switching device 7500. Control is performed so as to drive toward a state (a state in which the opening / closing member 4340 and the second return member 7540 face each other). Therefore, when the state of FIG. 90 is maintained (when the operation cover 7320 is pressed for 3 seconds or more), the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state when the hand is released from the operation cover 7320.

  Therefore, only when the player operates the operation cover 7320 with a short-time operation or operates the operation cover 7320 with a long-term operation (about 3 seconds or more), the opening / closing member 4340 has the second opening / closing member 4340. It can be made to be in a position state.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a change in time-position of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time, and FIG. 92 is a view of the arrangement of the operation member 4310 when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short time. FIG.

  First, FIG. 91 will be described. The upper graph in FIG. 91 shows the time variation (upper end position or lower end position) of the arrangement of the operation cover 7320, and the intermediate position graph in FIG. The time change is shown, and the lower graph in FIG. 91 shows the drive state of the drive motor 4590. Note that the upper and lower lengths of the upper graph and the upper and lower lengths of the intermediate graph do not correspond to each other (the intermediate graph is more vertically compressed). Further, in the intermediate position graph of FIG. 91, the restricted state is a position immediately before reaching the lower end position of the operating member movement range illustrated by the white circle from the upper end position of the operating member 4310 illustrated by the black circle. It is illustrated as a range up to.

  In the third state of the switching device 7500 shown in FIG. 91, the opening / closing member 4340 is disposed opposite to the first return member 4530 of the switching device 7500, so that the operation member 4310 is in the permitted state, that is, the operation cover 7320 This means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position when pushed. Therefore, in FIG. 91, when the graph of the intermediate position is in the allowable state, it means that the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in, the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state almost simultaneously with the completion of the pushing operation. When the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time, the detection sensor KC71 detects pushing for a predetermined period (3 seconds in the present embodiment), whereby the drive motor 4590 is operated, and the state of the switching device 7500 is changed to the opening / closing member 4340. And the second return member 7540 change toward a state where they are arranged to face each other. Therefore, when the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a long time, the second maintenance state of the opening / closing member 4340 cannot be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 92 will be described. Each graph shows the same items as in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 92, if the operation cover 7320 is pushed in for a short period, the detection sensor KC71 does not detect that the operation cover 7320 has been pushed in for a predetermined period. Therefore, the drive motor 4590 is not driven, and the switching device 7500 The three states are maintained, and the opening / closing member 4340 can be maintained in the second position state. The same applies to a case where the operation is repeated for a short period of time (continuous hitting operation).

  Therefore, when the switching device 7500 is in the third state, the opening / closing member 4340 can be maintained in the second position state by pressing the operation cover 7320 for a short period of time and continuously striking, while pressing the operation cover 7320 for a long period of time. Then, the opening / closing member 4340 is formed so as not to be maintained in the second position state.

  In this way, it is possible to change whether or not the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state according to the operation mode of the operation cover 7320 without changing the arrangement of the switching device 7500. The player who is maintained in the second position state can be directed to perform the operation as informed to the player in the effect that the expected degree of jackpot is higher than a certain level.

  That is, when the switching device 7500 is in the first state and the expected value of jackpot is higher than a certain level, a notification that “please hit the button repeatedly” is given as an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 4), or the like. When the player hits the operation cover 7320 repeatedly (see FIG. 92), the player can grasp that the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state and the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level. When the push operation is performed for a long time ignoring the notification, the opening / closing member 4340 is not maintained in the second position state after the player releases the hand from the operation cover 7320, and the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level. The player cannot grasp this.

  In this case, if the operation cover 7320 is operated while ignoring the notification, the amount of information that can be obtained by the player is reduced even if the operation cover 7320 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player to perform the operation as reported as an operation method that does not impair the amount of information obtained.

  If the player does not want to obtain any information related to the jackpot expectation level, the user can achieve the purpose by not operating the operation cover 7320 at all.

  In the present embodiment, when the switching device 7500 is in the first state, the player can grasp that the expected value after the jackpot is higher than a certain level when the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state by the pushing operation. (See FIGS. 84 and 85) When the switching device 7500 is in the third state, after the opening / closing member 4340 is in the second position state by the push-in operation (regardless of the operation method, the second position state is not reached). After that, the player can grasp that the jackpot expectation is higher than a certain level only when the opening / closing member 4340 is maintained in the second position state even after the player releases the operation cover 7320. (See FIGS. 91 and 92).

  In this manner, by changing the movement of the opening / closing member 4340 with respect to the operation as informed, attention to the operation device 7300 can be maintained, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

  In the present embodiment, since the distance from the second return member 7540 to the two sets of first return members 4530 is the same, the opening / closing member 4340 and the second return member 7540 are arranged in a state opposite to each other. The operation amount of the drive motor 4590 until the first state is formed is opposite to the operation amount of the drive motor 4590 from the state where the opening / closing member 4340 and the second return member 7540 are arranged to face each other until the third state is formed. Same amount in direction. That is, the switching device 7500 can be set to the first state or the third state by operating at the same operation speed for the same period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the state of the switching device 75000 from the operation sound and vibration of the drive motor 4590, and to improve the player's interest in pushing the operation cover 7320. .

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, in a state where the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 and the third surface 423 of the adjustment step portion 420 are arranged to face each other, after the opening / closing member 340 is rotated from the first position state, Although the case where the pair of opening / closing members 340 can be simultaneously returned to the first position state by rotating the main body ring portion 410 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second surface 422 may be formed instead of the third surface 423. In this case, after the pair of opening / closing members 340 are in the second position state, an operation of returning to the first position state can be performed at the same time.

  In the first embodiment, the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 is rotated while facing the third surface 423 of the adjustment step portion 420, and the side surface of the opening / closing member 340 and the inner surface of the operation member 310 are surfaces. Although the case where it hits was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, a concave portion may be formed on the inner wall of the operation member 310, and a convex portion protruding from the opening / closing member 340 may be fitted into the concave portion. In this case, the operation member 310 can be easily maintained at the lower end position.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the straight line extending in the extending direction of the inner surface of the hook-shaped inner surface of the engaging claw 343 does not pass through the shaft portion 323 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a straight line extending in the extending direction of the inner surface of the hook shape of the engaging claw 343 may pass through the shaft portion 323. In this case, when the opening / closing member 340 is in the first position state, the direction of the load applied from the extending portion 333 to the engagement claw 343 and the operation direction of the engagement claw 343 are opposite (on the same straight line). Therefore, the wobbling of the opening / closing member 340 can be effectively suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the connecting portion between the first surface 421 and the second surface 422 of the adjustment step portion 420 is formed from a slope that is linearly inclined has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, it may be formed by a curved surface that is secondarily linearly curved when viewed in the radial direction. In this case, acceleration can be applied to the rotation operation of the opening / closing member 340 while rotating the main body ring portion 410 at a constant speed.

  In addition, the aspect of curvature is not specifically limited. For example, the main ring portion 410 may be curved so that the tangent slope with respect to the horizontal direction is deeper at the higher position than at the lower position. In this case, when the load from the torsion spring NB1 that urges the opening / closing member 340 to the outside is reduced (when the opening / closing member 340 is disposed on the second position state side), the return speed of the opening / closing member 340 is increased (reset). When the load from the torsion spring NB1 increases (when the opening / closing member 340 is disposed on the first position state side), the return speed of the opening / closing member 340 is reduced (load applied in the return direction). Can be reduced). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 340 is restored, the load applied to the opening / closing member 340 from the main body ring portion 410 can be made uniform.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the main body ring portion 410 is controlled by a constant operation regardless of whether or not the player pushes the operation member 310 is described, but is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, it may be detected whether or not the operation member 310 has been pushed in, and the operation mode of the main body ring portion 410 may be changed based on the detection. In this case, it is possible to configure a game property in which the operation means 310 is pushed by the player's intention and selection. For example, from the third symbol display means, a notification of “press” is made for a specified number of times (for example, 5 times), and the player is allowed to perform a pushing operation for a specified number of times (for example, 2 times). Under the condition that the player can push the operation member 310 with his / her own intention and selection by setting the expectation of jackpot expectation to change depending on how many times it is pushed. It is decided. In this case, for example, if the operation member 310 is pushed twice during the first or second notification period, the probability of the opening / closing member 340 rotating is high, but the expectation for jackpot when the opening / closing member 340 rotates is low. When the operation member 310 is pushed once in the first or second notification period, and the operation member 310 is pushed once in the third to fifth notification periods, the opening / closing member 340 rotates. Although the probability is low, the expectation of jackpot when the opening / closing member 340 rotates is set to be high, and the operation member 310 is pushed twice in the third to fifth notification periods, and the opening / closing member 340 is pushed by the second pushing. However, the probability of jackpot when the opening / closing member 340 rotates is set to be very high. Thereby, the player who is not interested in the jackpot expectation degree and wants to operate the opening / closing member 340 can satisfy the desire by completing the operation of the operation member 310 by the first or second notification, and can open / close the opening / closing member. A player who wants to predict the degree of jackpot expectation from the operation of the member 340 can satisfy the desire by operating the operation member 310 during the third to fifth notification periods. In other words, the first request that the player wants to play a lively game regardless of the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and the first request is different from the first request. The second requirement that the 340 only move when the jackpot expectation is high can be met by the player's will and choice.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the detected member 5413 is detected by the detection sensor KC51 when the player pushes the operation member 310 when there is no push notification has been described. Similarly, in the sixth embodiment, Alternatively, a sensor may be provided that detects that the player has pushed the operation member 4310 when there is no push notification.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 340 performs a special operation when the player pushes the operation member 310 when there is no notification has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a solenoid may be housed in the base member 320, and the main body bar portion 331 may be pulled downward by driving the solenoid. In this case, when the player repeatedly pushes the operation member 310, the contact portion 332 of the clutch member 330 and the protruding portion 312 of the operation member 310 can be prevented from repeatedly colliding, The durability of the contact portion 332 and the protruding portion 312 can be improved.

  Further, instead of pulling down the main body bar portion 331 downward, only the contact portion 332 of the clutch member 330 may be displaced so as to be buried in the main body bar portion 331. In this case, the opening / closing member 340 can be maintained in the first position while avoiding a collision between the protruding portion 312 and the contact portion 332. Note that examples of the method of burying the contact portion 332 in the main body bar portion 331 include a mode of drawing with a solenoid, a mode of using a mechanism of a knock-type ballpoint pen, and the like.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing member 340 rotated by the operation of the operation member 310 applies a load to the first divided annular member 5450 and the main body plate portion 5451 moves by the load applied from the opening / closing member 340 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion 5451 may be moved by a solenoid that is driven by detecting the operation of the operation member 310 outside the notification period. Thereby, for example, the operation member 310 is in a state in which the adjustment arm portion 345 of the opening / closing member 340 faces the connecting surface (for example, the inclined surface connecting the first surface 421 and the second surface 422) of the adjustment step portion 5420. When the opening / closing member 340 is operated to rotate, it is possible to prevent the coupling surface and the adjustment arm portion 345 from colliding with each other. Therefore, the adjustment arm portion 345 collides with the inclined surface, and a load is applied to the adjustment arm portion 345 along a direction oblique to the rotation direction of the opening / closing member 340, and the durability of the adjustment arm portion 345 decreases. Can be prevented.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the operation member 4310 is operated when there is no notification and the appearance at the time of operation does not change as usual and it is difficult to recognize that it is an erroneous operation has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, a lamp that emits light when the operation member 4310 is operated when there is no notification may be disposed at a location that is visible to the player of the operation device 6300. In this case, it is possible to notice an erroneous operation by visually recognizing how the lamp shines.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case has been described in which the operation member 4310 disposed inside the operation cover 7320 moves up and down with respect to the opening / closing member 4340 so that the permissible state and the restricted state are switched. It is not limited. For example, the bulging portion 4312 is configured with a shape that changes for each phase in the bottom view, and the operation member 4310 rotates around the center of the bottom plate of the operation member 4310 with respect to the opening / closing member 4340, thereby allowing and restricting the operation state. And may be switched. In this case, since it is not necessary to change the upper surface position of the operation member 4310 between the allowable state and the restricted state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state change of the operation member 4310 from the appearance.

  Although the case where the operation member 4310 moves by gravity with respect to the operation cover 7320 has been described in the seventh embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a drive motor that moves the operation member 4310 up and down with respect to the operation cover 7320 may be provided, or may be driven by a damper device.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the switching devices 400, 2400, 3400, and 5400 have been described as having a perfect circular ring shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise from the top view elliptical shape. In this case, the distance between the contact point between the main body ring portion 410 and the adjustment arm portion 345 and the shaft portion 323 can be changed depending on the phase at which the main body ring portion 410 faces the adjustment arm portion 420. In addition, the degree of freedom in designing the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 can be improved. Further, the main body ring portion 410 may be constituted by a plurality of coaxial annular rings.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the clutch member 330 operates in conjunction with the operation of the operation member 310 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a solenoid may be housed in the base member 320, and the main body bar portion 331 may be pulled downward by driving the solenoid. In this case, even when the player does not push in the operation member 310, the opening / closing member 340 can be rotated to the second position state.

  For example, the main body bar portion 331 is pulled in at a timing when there is no push-in instruction, the opening / closing member 340 is rotated, and after detecting the push-in operation after the push-in operation of the operation member 310 is detected, the main body ring portion 410 is rotated. An effect of closing the opening / closing member 340 can be performed.

  Further, the opening / closing member 340 opens and closes a plurality of times by rotating the main body ring portion 410 a plurality of times (forward operation, reverse direction, inversion, and a combination thereof) while the main body rod portion 331 is retracted. It is possible to produce a repetitive effect.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening / closing members 340, 2340, and 4340 are opened / closed with respect to the switching devices 400, 2400, 3400, 4500, 5400, 6500, and 7500 that are arranged on the back side of the opening / closing members 340, 2340, and 4340. Although the case where the state is changed by the change (displacement) of the state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state of opening / closing of the opening / closing members 340, 2340, 4340 may be changed by changing the state of the operation members 310, 4310 (for example, rotational displacement about the axis center). In this case, the player who operates the operation members 310 and 4310 can recognize that there has been a change from the normal state by visually recognizing the state change of the operation members 310 and 4310. Can improve expectations.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening / closing member 340 is biased toward the second position state side, the opening / closing member 340 rotates to a predetermined position regardless of the operation depth of the operation member 310, and the opening / closing member 4340. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing member 340 rotates regardless of the operation depth of the operation member 310 until the third position state, which is a combination thereof, that is, the state between the first position state and the second position state of the opening / closing member 340. Once the operation member 310 stays there, and the operation member 310 is further pushed in, the opening / closing member 340 may rotate in accordance with the pushing depth of the operation member 310. In this case, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching device 400 by arranging the switching device 400 below the opening / closing member 340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by attaching a non-permeable film to the bottom surface of the operation member 310 and cutting out only a portion of the film that faces the opening / closing member 340, the opening / closing member 340 can be visually recognized through the operation member 310, but portions other than the opening / closing member 340 (The part of the switching device 400) may be configured so as not to be visually recognized by being shielded by the film. In this case, it is possible to prevent a game in which the situation of the switching device 400 is grasped by staring at the player and the expectation degree of jackpot is grasped without actually pressing the operation member 310.

  In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing member 340 has been described as a member that rotates, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a member that slides in a double-open manner in a direction that intersects the operation direction of the operation member 310 may be used.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the operation member 310 operated by the player maintains the shape and the opening / closing member 340 that is isolated from the player operates with the operation member 310 interposed therebetween, but is not necessarily limited thereto. is not. For example, the operation member 310 may be operated (deformed) by the player's operation, for example, the upper bottom portion of the operation member 310 may be broken at the center position.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing member 340 is pivotally supported by the base member 320 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a mode in which a plurality of spherical members (beads and the like) are accommodated in the operation device 300 and the spherical members move (bounce off) as the operation member 310 is pushed in may be possible. In this case, the player can perform an unexpected effect.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the state of the opening / closing member 340 is not particularly detected and the presentation is performed by a change in its appearance has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the state of the opening / closing member 340 may be detected, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 may be switched depending on the arrangement.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the jackpot expectation degree can be predicted by the operation mode of the opening / closing member 340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operating mode of the opening / closing member 340 may actually affect whether or not a big hit is made. For example, a random number that has already been acquired by the main control device may be rewritten to another random number when the opening / closing member 340 performs a predetermined operation mode. In this case, even if the initial random number is an out-of-range random number, there is a possibility of acquiring a jackpot random number by rewriting.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right, a three-time right, etc.) that increases the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, twice or three times). May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives the player a predetermined game value is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Direction that the button itself breaks. How to break and return can be changed>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means And a return means for returning to the first position, the game machine further comprising a second operation means interposed between the operation means and the operation means and capable of operating synchronously with the operation means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the operating means operates when the second operating means is displaced by a predetermined amount with respect to the operating means in synchronization with the means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a cover member that can form a state in which the button cannot be pushed by covering the button and a state in which the button can be pushed in by being exposed away from the button. There is a gaming machine that produces an effect of changing the appearance around the push button by operating a cover member with a drive motor (see, for example, JP-A-2015-112276). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the cover member is not mechanically engaged with the button, it is difficult to produce an effect in which the operation timing of the button and the cover member is synchronized and synchronized with each other. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the second operation means that is operated between the operation means and the operation means and that can operate synchronously with the operation means is operated by the operation means. Since the operation is performed by displacing the device by a predetermined amount, the timing of the operation of the operation device and the operation of the operation device can be matched. As a result, it is possible to obtain an actual feeling that the player has been involved in the performance related to the operation means by the operation.

  Examples of the second operation means include a means fixed to the operation means, a means that operates synchronously by operating while staying on the operation means in a fixed section during operation of the operation means, and the like.

  In the gaming machine A1, a load is applied from the second operating means to the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the operating means can be started by mechanical engagement, so that the second operating means and the operating means are arranged apart from each other. In comparison, each operation timing can be easily adjusted.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, it is possible to form a variable state in which the operating means is displaced before and after operating the operating means, and an invariant state in which the operating means is disposed at the same position before and after operating the operating means. A gaming machine A3, comprising: a switching means; and a driving means for generating a driving force for arbitrarily changing the state of the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the state of the switching unit can be changed by the driving unit, so that the player who operates the operating unit increases the attention to the operating unit. be able to.

  In addition, the aspect of the position change of the operation means in the variable state is not limited, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, by operating the operating means above a predetermined threshold value, the operating means may change its position by a predetermined amount irrespective of the magnitude of the operating amount, or it corresponds to the operating amount of the operating means. Thus, the displacement amount of the operating means may be increased or decreased.

  Moreover, the behavior of the operation means in the invariant state is not limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, while the player is operating the operating means, the operating means may be maintained at the same position, or while the player is operating the operating means, the operating means is displaced. When the operation of the operation unit is finished, the operation unit may return to the position before the operation.

  In the gaming machine A3, the switching means constitutes the return means, the gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, it is possible to eliminate the need to individually prepare return means for returning the operating means to the first position, and by reducing the number of members, the assembly man-hour can be reduced. This can reduce the cost of components.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the switching means includes a facing portion that is disposed to face the operating means, and the distance between the facing portion and the operating means changes between the variable state and the unchanged state. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the distance between the facing portion and the operating means changes, so that the variable state and the invariable state are switched. Due to the contact between the operating member and the switching means, the operation of the operating means can be mechanically prevented.

  Therefore, it is not necessary to wait for the player to operate the operation means and drive the drive means so as to prevent the operation means from operating at the timing of the operation. Then, it is possible to wait for the operation of the operation means.

  In the gaming machine A5, the switching means is configured to be capable of forming a plurality of types of distances between the facing portion and the operating means when the variable state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of operation amounts of the operating means when the player operates the operating means, so that the player operating the operating means Therefore, attention to the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the operating means is formed of a pair of movable members, a first distance that is a distance between one of the movable members and the facing portion, the other movable member, The gaming machine A7, wherein the switching means is formed so that the second distance, which is the distance between the facing portions, can be configured with different sizes.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the pair of movable members can be arbitrarily changed into a variable state or an invariable state, so that the operating means is composed of a single member. Compared to the case, the operation mode of the operation means can be prepared more. Thereby, the player's attention to the operating means can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A7, the switching unit constitutes the return unit, the switching unit is configured to be operable in both forward and reverse directions, and the pair of movable members return from the second position toward the first position. The gaming machine A8 is configured to be switchable according to the operation mode of the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the change of the state of the switching means is not only the possibility of displacement of the operating means before and after the operation of the operating means, but also a pair of movable members constituting the operating means Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of members (particularly, the number of drive means for driving the switching means) by using the action member also. In other words, the switching of whether or not the operating means (movable member constituting the operating means) is displaced before and after the operation of the operating means by one driving means and the operating means (movable member constituting the second position) at the second position. The position maintenance length can be switched.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the game machine includes an urging unit that generates an urging force that moves the operating unit toward the second position, and the second operating unit moves the operating unit to the first position. It is possible to form a fixed state to be maintained and a release state in which the operating means is movable from the first position, and the second operating means is moved from the fixed state by operating the operating means by a predetermined amount. A gaming machine A9 that is in the released state.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, is the load related to the operation of the operation means generated by the urging means, and can the operation means be operable in the second operation means? By giving the role of switching whether or not, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the operating means from the operating member, and to prevent the reaction force received by the player operating the operating means from changing due to the arrangement of the operating means can do. This can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in reaction force during operation.

  In the gaming machine A9, when the second operation means forms a fixed state, the operation means starts moving from the first position toward the second position, so that the fixing force of the second operation means increases. A gaming machine A10 characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the operating means is moved from the first position to the second position by an impact given to the gaming machine by the player and vibrations of other vibrating members. When the load to be increased unintentionally and the operating means is about to start operating from the first position, the fixing means is configured to increase the fixing force, so that the operating means moves from the first position. It can be made easy to prevent.

  In the gaming machine A9 or A10, the switching means applies a predetermined urging force to the operating means regardless of the state of the switching means when the operating means is operated beyond a predetermined threshold. A gaming machine A11 comprising a force means.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A9 or A10, the effect of preventing the player from determining the state of the operating means by the reaction force applied to the player via the operating means, and a predetermined threshold value The effect of providing the player with an indication of the operation amount by applying the urging force from the reaction force means to the operation means when operated as described above can be achieved by only one device, that is, the switching means. . Thereby, the arrangement | positioning number of a drive means can be reduced.

<Whether or not the operating means changes depending on the button press mode>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means A gaming machine comprising a return means for returning to the first position, comprising a switching means for switching an operation mode of the operation means required for the operation means to perform a predetermined operation.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a button that identifies a pressing state of two or more values depending on how it is pressed (see, for example, JP-A-2008-119165). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the difference in the identified push-down mode is notified by whether or not the movable accessory is driven, and the mode of the button as the operation target does not change, so the effect by the button is There is a problem that it cannot be said that the attention of the buttons can be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the switching means is configured so that the operating means that operates in accordance with the operation of the operating means can be switched between the operation modes of the operating means required to operate. Differences in the operation mode of the operation means can be reflected in the operation of the operation means. Therefore, an effect that changes depending on the operation mode of the operation means can be performed by the operation means, and the attention of the operation means can be improved, and the attention of the operation means related to the operation of the operation means can be improved. Can be made.

  Note that the operation means operating means that the player is operating so clearly that the player can confirm the operation. That is, the mode of opening for a moment and returning immediately is an operation that is misunderstood as a malfunction, and does not include such an operation.

  In addition, as a difference of the operation mode which operates an operation means, it does not limit at all, A several aspect is illustrated. For example, the distance for operating the operating means may be different, and the period for operating the operating means may be different. Further, the frequency of operating the operating means may be different.

  In the gaming machine B1, the switching unit is interposed between the operation unit and the operation unit, and permits a movement of the operation unit to the second position, and a regulation state different from the permitted state. Is configured to be able to change the operation mode that forms the permissible state and to displace the interposition unit in advance according to the operation mode corresponding to the permissible state. And a gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, an operating mode in which an intervening means displaced by the displacing means is interposed between the operating means and the operating means, and allows the operating means to move to the second position. Since the intervening means is changed in advance in accordance with the player's operation mode, it operates based on the player's operation compared to the case where the operation mode of the operating means is determined by driving other members corresponding to the player's operation mode. Responsiveness until the means operates can be improved, and the certainty of operation of the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B2, the reaction force returned to the player when the operation means is operated is made equal regardless of the position of the interposition means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, it is possible to prevent the reaction force returned to the player from changing at the position of the intervening means, so that the player feels uncomfortable when operating the operating means. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine B3, the switching means includes a reaction force means for applying a predetermined urging force to the operation means when the operation means is operated above a predetermined threshold. B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the reaction force means can provide the player with an indication of the amount of operation as to whether or not the operation has been performed beyond a predetermined threshold as a reaction force change. it can. This allows the player to intuitively switch the operation mode between operating with a large amount of operation or operating with a small amount of operation compared to when the amount of operation is notified by voice or video. Can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the switching unit includes an operation time switching unit that changes a state in contact with the operation unit and changes a movable range of the operation unit by changing the state. A gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the second means has an operation time switching means for changing the state by contact with the operating means and changing the movable range of the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a time delay from the time when the operation means is operated until the state change of the operation time switching means, as compared with the case where the operation time switching means is driven by an electric motor or the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the operating means operates even if the condition for starting the operation of the operating means switched by the switching means is not satisfied.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the switching unit is hidden from view by the player and is configured to be operable in both forward and reverse directions, and operates in the same direction in either the forward direction or the reverse direction. By doing so, it is possible to form an intermediate arrangement in which the operation mode of the operation means required for the operation means to start operation after switching can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B5, it is difficult to predict the state of the switching means even if the player listens carefully to the operation sound of the switching means. Thereby, the attention of the operating means can be maintained until the operating means is operated.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the return means is formed by the switching means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the switching means is also used as the returning means, so that the switching means is arranged compared to the case where each is constituted by other members. Installation space can be secured. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare an individual member as the return means, the component cost can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the operation mode switched by the switching unit corresponds to the operation amount of the operation unit, and regardless of the operation amount, the presence or absence of the operation is detected by a single detection unit. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, it is possible to prevent the number of detection means from increasing while changing the effect due to the difference in the operation amount of the operation means. it can.

  In the gaming machine B2, the reaction force returned to the player at the time of operation of the operation means is changed by changing the state of the interposition means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, the reaction force returned to the player varies depending on the state of the intervening means, so the reaction force upon operation of the operating means causes the player to You can notice changes in

  In the gaming machine B2, the switching means includes a first urging means for generating a urging force that presses the interposition means against the operation direction of the operation means, and the operation means is separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance or more. Release means for releasing the urging force of the urging means, and a moving space is formed in which the interposing means can move relative to the operating means in the operating direction of the operating means, and the moving space is interposed in the intervening space. The allowable state is formed by relative movement of the means, and a load in the direction along the operation direction of the operation means that is smaller than the urging force of the first urging means is applied to the interposition means. A gaming machine B10 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of B2, the urging force by the first urging means is released by the arrangement of the operating means, and the interposing means moves due to the load in the direction opposite to the urging force. It is possible to secure a period from the time when the intervention means is allowed to be allowed after being separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance or more. Accordingly, it is possible to provide gameability that allows the operating means to be moved to the second position by operating the operating means for a certain period or longer.

<Deformation of operating means → Change the interval until return to improve attention after pressing>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means A game machine comprising: a return means for returning to the first position; and a switching means for switching a mode of reaction of the operation means with respect to an operation by changing an operation mode of the operation means. Machine C1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, by changing the elastic force of the biasing spring for returning the button in advance, the repulsive force felt by the player who pressed the button is changed and used for the production. (See, for example, JP 2010-252949 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the button is still moved to the end of the moving range and stopped, and it is difficult to recognize a change occurring in the button at a glance. In addition, since it is difficult for a player who receives various information (video and audio) during a game to recognize a change in the repulsive force received from the button, the button change is sufficiently reflected in the production. There was no problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the switching of the operation mode of the operation unit with respect to the operation occurs due to the change in the operation mode of the operation unit, the player can visually check the operation unit to switch by the switching unit. Can easily grasp that happened. Thereby, the attention of the operating means and the operating means can be improved.

  Further, since the operation of the operating means occurs when the player operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the attention of the operating means and the operating means after the operation from being reduced.

  Here, the “period until the return” is not particularly limited. For example, it may be a period until the return starts or a period until the return to the second position is completed.

  Moreover, the mode of switching the reaction of the operating means with respect to the operation is not particularly limited. For example, the operation means after the operation may be prevented from returning to the position before the operation (stopped in the middle), or before the operation means after the operation is returned to the position before the operation. It is also possible to repeat the pause in several stages. Moreover, you may comprise so that the reaction force given to a player may change.

  In the gaming machine C1, the switching means can switch the return after the operation of the operation means in a state in which the operation means is located at the second position so that it can be delayed.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the switching means can delay the return after the operation of the operation means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly operating the operation means at unnecessary timing. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the operating means from being damaged due to unnecessary repeated hitting.

  Further, since the state where the operating means is arranged at the second position corresponds to the case where the return of the operating means is delayed, it is possible to indicate that the manner of return of the operating means has changed by paying attention to the operating means. Can be easily grasped by a person.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operating means passes through the third position which is in the middle while operating from the first position to the second position, and the switching means is an operation of the operating means. The mode is configured to be switchable between a first operation mode in which the operation unit operates to the second position and a second operation mode in which the operation unit operates to the third position and does not reach the second position. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the mode of reaction of the operating means is switched depending on whether or not the operating means reaches the second position.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the operation mode of the operation means can be formed by a plurality of first operation modes and second operation modes. In the second operation mode, the response mode of the operating means is maintained the same as when the operating means does not operate, so that the attention to the operating means is maintained even after the operating means is operated. Can do.

  Note that the second position and the third position are desirably different to the extent that it is difficult for the player to visually identify the difference. This makes it difficult for the player to visually identify the state of the operating means after the operation, and to grasp whether or not the mode of reaction of the operating means has been switched to the operating means immediately after the operation. You can maintain your attention.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the operating means abuts against a side surface of the operating means along the operating direction of the operating means at the second position.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the operating means is arranged at the second position, so that the operating means abuts against the side surface of the operating means along the operating direction, Since it acts in such a manner as to prevent the operation means from operating, the force for operating the operation means can be effectively applied to the operation means, and the reproducibility of the operation of the operation means can be maintained.

  In the gaming machine C4, in a state where the operating means is arranged at the second position, the operating means is arranged at the terminal position of the movement width in the operating direction.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C4, even when the player tries to operate the operating means in a state where the operating means is disposed at the second position, the operating means does not move any further. Therefore, even if the player forcibly operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the operating means from being damaged by the load generated between the operating means and the operating means.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machine C6 is configured in such a manner that the operation unit returns to the first position by operating the switching unit by a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the switching means for switching the operation mode of the operating means can be used as the means for returning the operating means to the first position. Compared to a case where another means for returning the operating means to the first position is prepared, the arrangement space of the switching means can be expanded and the number of parts can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the switching means can switch a change mode of a load applied to the player via the operation means corresponding to an operation amount of the operation means in a plurality of types. A gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the switching means changes the manner in which the load applied to the player via the operating means in accordance with the operation amount of the operating means is changed in a plurality of types. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability that the player operates the operation means in an operation mode in which the load change mode can be easily determined. That is, it is possible to suppress an operation mode in which the operation unit is struck and promote an operation mode in which the operation unit is pushed in over time, so that the load received by the operation unit by the operation can be reduced, and the operation unit is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine C7, the switching unit is configured to be able to maintain the operation unit at the second position, and a load applied to the operation unit by operation of the operation unit is arranged at the second position. A gaming machine C8, which is configured to be switchable so as to be minimized when played.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C7, when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the load applied from the operating means to the operating means can be minimized, By maintaining the operating means at the second position, the load applied to the operating means by the operation of the operating means can be reduced, and damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

<Push-in operation at a timing outside the instruction-> Drive control remains the same and does not move correctly>
An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means In a gaming machine comprising a return means for returning to the first position and a notifying means for notifying a player of a period for operating the operating means, the operating means is outside the period notified by the notifying means. A gaming machine D1 comprising a switching unit that is switched from the first state to the second state when the operation is performed, and capable of changing an operation mode of the operation unit by switching the state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the stopper member that restricts the movement of the button is displaced, and a state in which the button cannot be pushed down can be formed, thereby making it possible to suppress a meaningless continuous hitting operation. (For example, refer to JP2012-115586A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the button does not descend in the first place and it is not possible to detect that the player is pushing down, it is a specification that an inexperienced player cannot push down the button (hard Even if you misunderstand that it is a button) and try to push it down with a greater force (incorrect operation), you can't give an alarm from the gaming machine side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the state is switched when the operation unit is operated outside the period in which the operation is prompted by the notification unit, and the switching unit can change the operation mode of the operation unit by switching the state. Therefore, even an unfamiliar player can be made aware that an erroneous operation is performed by visually recognizing the operation mode of the operation means.

  In addition, the operating mode of the operating means changes, so that the operating means cannot be pushed in, leading to the player's hand hurting, or the effect is interrupted by the player's operation, such as when the liquid crystal effect changes. Can be prevented. Therefore, a player who dares to perform an erroneous operation can continue the game as usual. That is, the player can select how to operate the operation means.

  In addition, the mode of notification by the notification unit is not limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a mode in which characters such as “push” and “PUSH” are displayed on a liquid crystal display device, a sound such as “now” may be output from an acoustic device, and predetermined conditions are set. It may be considered that the notification has been made by aligning them (so-called “back button”).

  The profit that the player can obtain from the operation of the operating means when operating the operating means outside the notification period is set to be equal to or less than the profit that the player can obtain from the operation of the operating means when operating during the notification period. Anyway.

  In this case, since it is not disadvantageous for the player to operate during the notification period compared to when operating outside the notification period, it is desirable to obtain a little more advantageous information from the operation mode of the operation means (for example, the jackpot expectation degree) It is possible to direct the player to operate the operation means according to the notification of the notification means. Thereby, it can suppress that a player carries out a meaningless repeated operation of an operation means in periods other than the period alert | reported by an alerting | reporting means. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently enhance the deterrence against a player who is highly emotional from repeatedly hitting the button.

  In addition, the aspect of the profit which a player obtains is not limited, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, it is possible to use a profit that can grasp the jackpot expectation degree (expectation for occurrence of a special gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state) with high accuracy, or the ball can easily reach the winning opening when the opening and closing member of the electric tulip is open The profit which can grasp | ascertain a timing may be sufficient, and the profit which can grasp | ascertain the firing strength and the firing timing which a player tends to become advantageous may be sufficient.

  The gaming machine D1 includes reaction force generation means for applying a reaction force to the player via the operation means, and the reaction force provided by the reaction force generation means is equal regardless of whether there is an operation outside the notification period. A gaming machine D2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the reaction force applied to the player by the reaction force generating means does not change regardless of whether or not there is an operation outside the notification period. Even a player who operates the operating means can operate the operating means without feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, it is possible to improve attention to the operation means by preventing the player from noticing that the difference in the operation mode has changed due to the difference in the reaction force.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the switching means includes a contact means for changing an operation mode of the operation means by contact, a drive means for driving the contact means, and an operation outside the notification period of the notification means. Displacement means capable of changing the state from the first state to the second state when the operation means operates in the second state, the displacement means in the second state between the operation means and the contact means. A gaming machine characterized in that an operation mode of the operation means changes in accordance with an operation of the operation means when the displacement means is interposed between the operation means and the contact means. D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement means is in the second state, and the operation mode of the operation means is changed by being interposed between the operation means and the contact means. Even if the mode of the switching unit with respect to the operating member of the contacting unit is not switched, the operating mode of the operating unit can be changed depending on whether or not the player operates the operating unit outside the notification period of the reporting unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the drive means for driving the contact means, as compared with the case where the mode of the contact means with respect to the operation means is switched when the player operates the operation means.

  In addition, the arrangement | positioning place of a displacement means is not limited. For example, it may be disposed on the contact means, may be disposed on the operation means, or may be disposed on another means disposed between the contact means and the operation means.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is provided with detecting means for detecting that the displacement means has changed to the second state.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, since the detecting means can detect that the displacement means has changed to the second state, it is outside the notification period of the notification means without collating with the notification of the notification means. It can be determined that the operating means has been operated. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the control flow for determining that the operation means is operated outside the notification period of the notification means.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operation mode of the operation unit that occurs when the displacement unit is interposed between the operation unit and the contact unit is any of cases where the operation unit is not operated outside the notification period. A game machine D5, which is also different from the operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operating mode of the operating means that occurs when the displacement means is interposed between the operating means and the contacting means is outside the notification period of the operating means. Since it is different from any operation mode when the operation is not performed, even when the player unintentionally operates the operation unit outside the notification period of the notification unit, it is possible to pay attention to the operation mode of the operation unit. It can be noticed that the operation means is operated in an operation mode different from usual.

  In addition, compared with the case where the display of the liquid crystal device is changed (for example, an error is displayed) or the abnormality is notified by the sound / lighting device, the operation means is not excessively stressed. It is possible to produce an effect that only noticed players are noticed.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operation mode of the operation means that occurs when the displacement means is interposed between the operation means and the contact means is when the operation means is not operated outside the notification period. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being equivalent to any operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the operating mode of the operating means that occurs when the displacement means is interposed between the operating means and the contacting means is outside the notification period of the operating means. Since it is equivalent to one of the operation modes when the operation is not performed, the operation mode of the operation means currently occurring is caused by the intervention of the displacement means, or is caused without the intervention of the displacement means. However, it is difficult for the player to grasp, and it is possible to produce an effect that confuses the player who operates the operation means outside the notification period of the notification means. Thus, the player can be directed not to operate the operation means outside the notification period of the notification means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the driving means is configured to be drivable in a first driving mode in which the displacement means is switched from the second state to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the driving means is driven in the first driving mode even if the player operates the operating means outside the notification period of the notification means. As a result, the displacement means is switched from the second state to the first state. Therefore, by making it impossible to grasp the drive mode of the drive unit, whether the operation mode of the operation unit is caused by the intervention of the displacement unit or not It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the means is present without intervention.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, and D1 to D7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, and D1 to D7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B10, C1 to C8, and D1 to D7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an opening and closing member that can form a state in which the button cannot be pushed by covering the button and a state in which the button can be pushed by leaving the button. There is a gaming machine that produces an effect of changing the appearance around a button by being operated by a drive motor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-112276).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement regarding the operation of the button and the opening / closing member.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the operation of the button and the opening / closing member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes an operating means operated by a player, a first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and a second position different from the first position. And a return means for returning the operating means to the first position. The game machine is interposed between the operating means and the operating means. Second operating means that can be synchronized with the operating means, and the second operating means is displaced by a predetermined amount with respect to the operating means in synchronization with the operating means, whereby the operating means operates.
In the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, a load is applied from the second operation means to the operation means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the operation means is displaced before and after the operation means is operated, and the operation before and after the operation means is operated. A switching unit capable of forming an invariant state in which the units are arranged at the same position; and a driving unit that generates a driving force for arbitrarily changing the state of the switching unit.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operation of the operating means and the operating means can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operating means can be operated by a load transmitted through the second operating means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the operation mode of the operating unit is changed while the operating unit is maintained in an operable state. Can do.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device (part of the notification means)
310 Operation member (operation means)
330 Clutch member (second operating means)
340, 2340, 4340 Opening / closing member (operation means, movable member)
340a Open / close member (part of movable member)
340b Open / close member (part of movable member)
345 Adjustment arm (part of movement means, part of movable member)
400 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
420, 2420, 3420 Adjustment step (opposite part)
490, 4590 Drive motor (drive means)
2340a First opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2340b Second opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2340c Third opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2340d Fourth opening / closing member (part of movable member)
2400 Switching device (part of return means, switching means)
3400 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
3410 Ring body part (part of displacement means)
3440 1st operation | movement apparatus (a part of interposition means, switching means at the time of operation)
3450 Second operating device (part of intervening means, switching means at operation)
4310 Operation member (operation means, part of switching means, intervening means)
4312 Swelling part (second operating means)
4500 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
4520 slide member (part of displacement means, part of contact means)
4530 1st return member (a part of contact means)
4540 Second return member (part of contact means)
5400 Switching device (part of return means, switching means)
5413 Detected member (part of detection means)
5420 Adjustment step (opposite part, part of contact means)
5450 First divided annular member (part of displacement means)
5460 Second divided annular member (part of displacement means)
6360 Moving cover member (displacement means)
6500 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
7301e Push-up member (part of displacement means, first biasing means, switching means)
7320 Operation cover (operation means)
7324 Restriction part (release means)
7500 switching device (part of return means, switching means)
NB1 Torsion spring (part of return means, biasing means)
KC51 detection sensor (part of detection means)
KC71 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 spring (part of reaction force generation means)
SP2 spring (part of reaction force generation means)

Claims (3)

An operating means operated by a player, an operating means capable of operating between a first position and a second position different from the first position in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and the operating means In a gaming machine comprising return means for returning to the first position,
A second operating means that is interposed between the operating means and the operating means, and is operable in synchronization with the operating means;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operating means operates when the second operating means is displaced by a predetermined amount with respect to the operating means in synchronization with the operating means.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a load is applied from the second operation means to the operation means. A variable state in which the operating means is displaced before and after operating the operating means;
Switching means capable of forming an invariant state in which the operating means is disposed at the same position before and after operating the operating means;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force that arbitrarily changes a state of the switching unit.

Images